% \iffalse
% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o exerquiz.gls exerquiz.glo
%<*copyright>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Exerquiz.sty package,             2013-12-11         %%
%% Copyright (C) 1999-2013  D. P. Story                 %%
%%   dpstory@uakron.edu                                 %%
%%                                                      %%
%% This program can redistributed and/or modified under %%
%% the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License        %%
%% Distributed from CTAN archives in directory          %%
%% macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either version 1 of the  %%
%% License, or (at your option) any later version.      %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%</copyright>
%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
%<package>\ProvidesPackage{exerquiz}
%<driver>\ProvidesFile{exerquiz.drv}
%<aebjs>\ProvidesFile{aebjs.def}
%<eqexam>\ProvidesFile{eqexam.def}
%<randomize>\ProvidesFile{aebrandom.def}
%<sumrytbls>\ProvidesFile{aebsumrytbls.def}
%<template>\ProvidesFile{template.def}
%<package|driver|aebjs|eqexam|randomize|sumrytbls|template> [2013/12/13 v6.7p %
%<package>  Exerquiz: Exercises and Quizzes for LaTeX/PDF package (dps)]
%<driver>  Exerquiz documentation driver file (dps)]
%<aebjs>  Exerquiz document level JavaScript (dps)]
%<eqexam>  Exerquiz support file for eqexam (dps)]
%<randomize> Exerquiz support for randomization (dps)]
%<sumrytbls> Exerquiz support for summary tables (dps)]
%<template>  Exerquiz template for language support (dps)]
%<eqfr>\ProvidesFile{eqfr.def}
%<eqde>\ProvidesFile{eqde.def}
%<eqno>\ProvidesFile{eqno.def}
%<eqnl>\ProvidesFile{eqnl.def}
%<eqes>\ProvidesFile{eqes.def}
%<eqit>\ProvidesFile{eqit.def}
%<eqru>\ProvidesFile{eqru.def}
%<eqda>\ProvidesFile{eqda.def}
%<eqpo>\ProvidesFile{eqpo.def}
%<eqfin>\ProvidesFile{eqfin.def}
%<eqcat>\ProvidesFile{eqcat.def}
%<eqcz>\ProvidesFile{eqcz.def}
%<eqbr>\ProvidesFile{eqbr.def}
%<eqtr>\ProvidesFile{eqtr.def}
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\usepackage[colorlinks,hyperindex]{hyperref}
\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\\\textbackslash}
\OnlyDescription  % comment out for implementation details
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\begin{document}
  \GetFileInfo{exerquiz.sty}
  \title{Exerquiz: Exercises and Quizzes for \LaTeX/PDF}
  \author{D. P. Story\\
    Email: \texttt{dpstory@uakron.edu}}
  \date{processed \today}
  \maketitle
  \tableofcontents
  \let\Email\texttt
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
    \let\efill\relax
    \begin{itemize}}{\end{itemize}}
   \value{GlossaryColumns}=1
  \DocInput{exerquiz.dtx}
  \PrintIndex
\end{document}
%</driver>
% \fi
%
% \MakeShortVerb{|}
%
% \DoNotIndex{\def,\edef,\gdef,\xdef,\global,\long,\let}
% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\string,\the,\ifx,\else,\fi}
% \DoNotIndex{\csname,\endcsname,\relax,\begingroup,\endgroup}
% \DoNotIndex{\DeclareTextCommand,\DeclareTextCompositeCommand}
% \DoNotIndex{\space,\@empty,\special}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \IfFileExists{\jobname.gls}{\section{Change History}\PrintChanges}{}
%
% \section{Package options and setup}\label{options}
%
% Introduce a number of useful options for \textsl{exerquiz}.
% \subsection{Options for paper, solutions, JavaScript and preview}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\usepackage{keyval}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.4t}{2012/06/18}{Added ifpdf as a required package}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{ifpdf}[2006/02/20]
\RequirePackage{ifxetex}[2006/08/21]
\@ifundefined{exqtable}{\def\exqtable{table}}{}
\IfFileExists{xcolor.sty}{%
    \def\eq@ColorPackage{xcolor}%
    \PassOptionsToPackage{\exqtable,hyperref}{xcolor}}
    {\def\eq@ColorPackage{color}}
\DeclareOption{noxcolor}{\def\eq@ColorPackage{color}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{forpaper}
%    \begin{macro}{forcolorpaper}
%    Pass the |monochrome| option to the color package
%\changes{v6.06a}{2007/04/09}
%{
%   Added the \texttt{forcolorpaper} option for those using
%   \textsf{exerquiz} without \textsf{web}.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{forpaper}{%
   \eqforpapertrue\PassOptionsToPackage{monochrome}{\eq@ColorPackage}
   \AtBeginDocument{\ifnum\eq@drivernum=4 \else\AllowPeeking\fi}
}
\DeclareOption{forcolorpaper}{\eqforpapertrue  % for print
   \AtBeginDocument{\ifnum\eq@drivernum=4 \else\AllowPeeking\fi}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{preview}
% With this option, the bounding boxes of all form fields appear in the
% dvi preview. Use this option of properly positioning your fields, then
% remove this option on the final build of the document. This option is no
% appropriate for the \texttt{pdftex} option which does not have a dvi preview.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{preview}{\PassOptionsToPackage{preview}{eforms}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{nosolutions}
%    With the option, the solutions to the exercises are not
%    included in the typeset document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{nosolutions}{\eq@nosolutionstrue\eq@nolinktrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{noquizolutions}
% No solutions for quizzes (shortquiz and quiz environments).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{noquizsolutions}{\eq@noquizsolutionstrue\eq@nolinktrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{online}
% An \texttt{online} options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\let\eq@YES=y \let\eq@NO=n
\let\eq@One=1 \let\eq@Zero=0
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
\DeclareOption{online}{\let\eq@online\eq@YES}
\let\eq@online\eq@NO
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{nohiddensolutions}
% Overrides any hidden solutions specified with the \texttt{exercise}
% environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{nohiddensolutions}{\eq@globalshowsolutionstrue}
\DeclareOption{noHiddensolutions}%
    {\eq@globalshowsolutionstrue\AtBeginDocument{\def\Hidesymbol{h}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{solutionsafter}
%    Solutions will appear after the statement of the exercise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{solutionsafter}{\eq@solutionsaftertrue\eq@nolinktrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{solutionsonly}
% Here is a highly specialized option, put in at the request of a former friend.
%\changes{v6.2f}{2007/12/21}{Added a solutionsonly option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{solutionsonly}{\solutionsonlytrue\answerkeytrue
    \therearesolutionstrue\AtEndOfPackage{\let\exerSolnsHeadnToc\relax}}
\newif\ifsolutionsonly\solutionsonlyfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{contsolns}
%    This option requires both \textsf{web} and \textsf{exerquiz}. The package
%    tests for the presence of the \textsf{web} and whether webheadings pagestyle
%    is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{contsolns}{\AtEndOfPackage{\InputIfFileExists
    {contsolns.def}{\contsolnsInputMsg}{\contsolnsErrorMsg}}}
\def\contsolnsInputMsg{\PackageInfo{exerquiz}{contsolns option,
    inputting file contsolns.def}}
\def\contsolnsErrorMsg{\PackageInfo{exerquiz}{contsolns option,
    cannot find file contsolns.def}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}

%    \begin{macro}{nocorrections}
%    The code for correcting the |quiz| environment is
%    not written; this results in a smaller file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{nocorrections}{\nocorrectionstrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{proofing}
%    An option for marking the correct answers for shortquiz and quiz
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{proofing}{\eq@proofingtrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{showgrayletters}
% When this option is in effect, capital letters in gray appear under
% the multiple choice question boxes of quizzes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifaebshowgrayletters\aebshowgraylettersfalse
\DeclareOption{showgrayletters}{\aebshowgrayletterstrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{vspacewithsolns}
% This is for the \texttt{vspacewithsolns} option designed for
% \textsf{eqexam}, but can be used in \textsf{exerquiz}. The switch
% \cs{ifvspacewithsolns} is defined in \textsf{eqexam}, and we olnly
% define it here is \textsf{eqexam} is not loaded.
% \changes{v6.3x}{2011/04/05}{Added \texttt{vspacewithsolns}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{ifvspacewithsolns}{%
    \DeclareOption{vspacewithsolns}{\vspacewithsolnstrue}
    \newif\ifvspacewithsolns\vspacewithsolnsfalse
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{nodljs}
%    An option for excluding all DLJS from the document. Useful with the
%    \texttt{forpaper} option, or a document destined to be printed. Pass
%    on to insdljs package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{nodljs}{\PassOptionsToPackage{nodljs}{insdljs}%
     \AtEndOfPackage{\let\importdljs\eq@YES}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{execAfter}
% Execute any JS defined within the \texttt{execJS} environment. Works only for
% authors using Acrobat 5.0 or Acrobat Approval.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{execJS}{\PassOptionsToPackage{execJS}{insdljs}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{exercisesonly}
% If the document author wants only to create a series of exercises, no quizzes, there is no
% need for the Document-level JavaScript. So, we have a couple of convenience options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{exercisesonly}{\PassOptionsToPackage{nodljs}{insdljs}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{debug}
%    An option for debugging JavaScript. Pass on to insdljs package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{debug}{\PassOptionsToPackage{debug}{insdljs}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{allowrandomize}
% Beginning with version 6.1 of \textsf{exerquiz}, it is possible to randomize
% the choices in a multiple choice question. These choices must be set off
% by the command \cs{bChoices}/\cs{eChoices} pair. The command \cs{bChoices} now has
% two optional arguments \texttt{nCols} and \texttt{random}. See \autoref{randomize}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{allowrandomize}{\AtEndOfPackage{\inputRandomizeChoices}}
\def\inputRandomizeChoices{\InputIfFileExists{aebrandom.def}
    {\typeout{inputting aebrandom.def}}{cannot find aebrandom.def}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{usesumrytbls}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{usesumrytbls}{%
    \def\inputSumryTblCode{\InputIfFileExists{aebsumrytbls.def}
    {\typeout{inputting aebsumrytbls.def}}%
    {cannot find aebsumrytbls.def}}}
\let\inputSumryTblCode\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \subsection{Driver Options}
%     The \textsf{web} package passes these driver options to \textsf{exerquiz}.
%    These options are needed is \textsf{exerquiz} is used without
%    \textsf{web}; in this case, the options below must explicitly included.
%    \begin{macro}{dvipsone}
%    Set the driver dependent code for the |quiz| environments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \def\eq@drivernum{5} % 5 = no choice
\DeclareOption{dvipsone}{%
    \def\eq@drivernum{0}\def\eq@driver{dvipsone}%
    \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipsone}{eforms}
}
\DeclareOption{dvips}{%
    \def\eq@drivernum{0}\def\eq@driver{dvips}%
    \PassOptionsToPackage{dvips}{eforms}
}
\DeclareOption{pdftex}{%
    \def\eq@drivernum{1}\def\eq@driver{pdftex}%
    \PassOptionsToPackage{pdftex}{\eq@ColorPackage}
    \PassOptionsToPackage{pdftex}{eforms}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{dvipdfm}
%    Set the driver dependent code for the \texttt{quiz} and \texttt{quiz}
%    environments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{dvipdfm}{%
    \def\eq@drivernum{2}\def\eq@driver{dvipdfm}%
    \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipdfm}{\eq@ColorPackage}%
    \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipdfm}{eforms}%
}
\DeclareOption{dvipdfmx}{%
    \def\eq@drivernum{2}\def\eq@driver{dvipdfmx}%
    \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipdfmx}{\eq@ColorPackage}%
    \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipdfmx}{eforms}%
}
\DeclareOption{xetex}{%
    \def\eq@drivernum{2}\def\eq@driver{xetex}%
    \PassOptionsToPackage{xetex}{\eq@ColorPackage}
    \PassOptionsToPackage{xetex}{eforms}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{textures}
% This option, and testing are due to Ross Moore  3/6/02
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{textures}{\def\eq@drivernum{3}%
  \def\eq@driver{textures}%
  \PassOptionsToPackage{textures}{\eq@ColorPackage}%
  \PassOptionsToPackage{textures}{eforms}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{dviwindo}
%    Set \cmd{\eq@noformstrue}, this inserts an \cmd{\endinput} just after
%    the end of the |exercise| environment.  No quizzes for
%    \texttt{dviwindo}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{dviwindo}{\def\eq@drivernum{4}\def\eq@driver{dviwindo}%
    \eq@noformstrue\PassOptionsToPackage{nodljs}{insdljs}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% If no driver is passed to \textsf{exerquiz}, assume it is
% dvipsone or dvips---\textsf{hyperref} defines the specials.
% Default driver dvipsone/dvips
% \def\eq@drivernum{5}
% \def\eq@driver{dvipsone/dvips}
% \def\eq@driver{no driver specified}
%    \begin{macro}{unicode}
% Passes the unicode option to \textsf{hyperref}.
% \changes{v6.3}{2008/03/19}
% {
%   Added the \texttt{unicode} option, which is passed to hyperref.
% }
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{unicode}{\PassOptionsToPackage{unicode}{hyperref}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{useui}
% Passes the useui option to eforms. With this option,
% the key-value pairs \textsl{\'{a} la xkeyval} can be used.
% \changes{v6.3}{2008/03/19}
% {
%   Added the \texttt{useui} option, which is passed to eforms.
% }
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{useui}{\PassOptionsToPackage{useui}{eforms}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \subsection{Language Options}
%    \textsf{exerquiz} uses many language dependent typeset labels
%    and JavaScript messages.  These messages are defined in the
%    English language in Section~\ref{ss:ldm}. The language options
%    defines the macro \cmd{\LangRedefinition} to input language
%    dependent redefinitions of these messages.  Initially,
%    \cmd{\LangRedefinition} is set to relax and no redefinition files
%    are input.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\LangRedefinitions\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{french}
%    Translations due to Jean-Michel SARLAT.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{french}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqfr.def}%
     {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting French Option}}%
     {\typeout{exerquiz: French Option: Cannot find the file eqfr.def,
      using the default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{german}
%    Translation due to Michael Wiedmann.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{german}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqde.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting German Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: German Option: Kann die Datei eqde.def
     nicht finden, benutze Default, Englisch.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{norsk}
%    Translation due to Hans Fredrik Nordhaug.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{norsk}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqno.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Norsk Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Norsk Option: Cannot find the file eqno.def,
   using the default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{dutch}
%    Translation due to Henny Wilbrink
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{dutch}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqnl.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Dutch Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Dutch Option: Kan bestand eqnl.def niet vinden,
   gebruik default, Engels.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{spanish}
%    Translation due to Pedro Luis Luque
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{spanish}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqes.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Spanish Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Spanish Option: Opci\'on Espa\~nola: no puede
    encontrar el fichero eqes.def, usar\'a por defecto, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{italian}
%    Translation due to PierLuigi Zezza
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{italian}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqit.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Opzione Lingua Italiana}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz, Opzione Italiano: Non trovo il file eqit.def,
    utilizzo  quello di default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{russian}
%    Translation due to Sergei V. Znamenskii
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{russian}{%
   \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
    \ifHy@unicode\else\PackageWarning{exerquiz}{%
        The unicode option recommended for hyperref\MessageBreak}\fi
   }{\PassOptionsToPackage{unicode}{hyperref}}
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqru.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Russian Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Russian Option: Cannot find the file  eqru.def,
   using the default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{dansk}
%    Translation due to Erik Leimand
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{dansk}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqda.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Dansk Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Dansk Option: Cannot find the file eqda.def,
   using the default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{polish}
%    Translation due to Jerzy Mycielski
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{polish}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqpo.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Polish Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Polish Option: Cannot find the file
    eqpo.def, using the default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{finnish}
% Translation due to Paivi Porras
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{finnish}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqfin.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Finnish Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Finnish Option: Cannot find the file eqfin.def,
   using the default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{catalan}
% Translation due to Ramon Ballester
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{catalan}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqcat.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Catalan Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Catalan Option: Cannot find the file eqcat.def,
   using the default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{czech}
% Translation due to Robert Marik
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{czech}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqcz.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Czech Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Czech Option: Cannot find the file eqcz.def,
   using the default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{brazil}
%    Translation due to Koichi Sameshima
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{brazil}{%
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqbr.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Brazilian Portuguese Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Portuguese Option: Opc\~ao Portugu\^es:
    n\~ao foi poss\'ivel encontrar o arquivo eqbr.def, usaremos
    o padr\~ao, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{turkish}
%    Translation due to Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{turkish}{%
   \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
    \ifHy@unicode\else\PackageWarning{exerquiz}{%
        The unicode option recommended for hyperref\MessageBreak}\fi
   }{\PassOptionsToPackage{unicode}{hyperref}}
   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqtr.def}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting Turkish Option}}%
   {\typeout{exerquiz: Cannot find the file eqtk.def,
    using the default, English.}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{\eq@ColorPackage}}
\@ifpackageloaded{xcolor}%
{%
    \@ifpackagelater{xcolor}{2004/07/04}{}
    {%
    \PackageError{exerquiz}{%
    *************************************************\MessageBreak
    * Your Version of `xcolor.sty' is too old!\MessageBreak
    * You need the version from 2004/07/04 or newer\MessageBreak
    * or use: \string\usepackage[noxcolor]{exerquiz}\MessageBreak
    *************************************************}{}%
    }%
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Switches}
%    Boolean switches used by the declared options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\iterate\relax
\newif\ifeq@solutionsafter \eq@solutionsafterfalse
\newif\ifeq@hidesolution \eq@hidesolutionfalse
\newif\ifeq@globalshowsolutions \eq@globalshowsolutionsfalse
\newif\ifeq@nosolutions \eq@nosolutionsfalse
\newif\ifeq@proofing \eq@proofingfalse
\newif\ifeqforpaper \eqforpaperfalse
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\newif\ifeq@noforms \eq@noformsfalse
\newif\ifeq@noquizsolutions \eq@noquizsolutionsfalse % dps new
\newif\ifnocorrections \nocorrectionsfalse
% changed \ifeq@nocorrections to \ifnocorrections
%\newif\ifeq@nocorrections \eq@nocorrectionsfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
% (4/28/11) A switch to control whether the declared vertical space
% for the \texttt{solution} environment will be preserved during the \texttt{answerkey}
% option. This is an \textsf{eqexam} feature.
%\changes{v6.3z}{2011/04/28}{%
%Created a switch \cs{ifkeepdeclaredvspacing}, used primarily by \textsf{eqexam}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifkeepdeclaredvspacing \keepdeclaredvspacingfalse
\newif\ifeq@nolink \eq@nolinkfalse
\def\eq@ckglobalhide{\ifeq@globalshowsolutions\eq@hidesolutionfalse\fi}
\def\hidesymbol{h}\def\Hidesymbol{H}
%    \end{macrocode}
% When the first solution is written, \cs{therearesolutions} is
% made true.  When the solutions are input back into the file, and
% this switch is still false, then no exercise header is typeset;
% this avoids an empty exercise section with only the header.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\iftherearesolutions \therearesolutionsfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\SolutionsAfter}
%    \begin{macro}{\SolutionsAtEnd}
%    \begin{macro}{\NoSpaceToWork}
%    \begin{macro}{\SpaceToWork}
% Some macros to turn \cs{eq@solutionsafter} on or off, and to suppress
% the vertical space in the solutions environment when the \texttt{nosolutions}
% option is in effect. Concerning leaving space to work, the default is to
% leave space to work (\cs{SpaceToWork}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\SolutionsAfter{\eq@solutionsaftertrue\eq@nolinktrue}
\def\SolutionsAtEnd{\eq@solutionsafterfalse\eq@nolinkfalse}
\def\NoSpaceToWork{\let\eq@insertverticalspace\eq@NO}
\def\SpaceToWork{\let\eq@insertverticalspace\eq@YES}
\SpaceToWork
\def\ifNoSolutions#1#2{%
    \ifeq@nosolutions\expandafter#1\else
    \expandafter#2\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% Some switches to control the randomization process, which comes into play
% with the \texttt{allowrandomize} option. These are set to \texttt{false} initially,
% The first one is set locally by the random option of \cs{bChoices}; the second
% one overrides the first so that all multiple choice questions can be randomized
% without having to edit every \cs{bChoices} command. The user has access to this
% switch through the \cs{turnOnRandomize} and \cs{obeyLocalRandomize} commands.
% The topic of randomizing the choices is taken up in \autoref{randomize}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifeq@randomizeChoices \eq@randomizeChoicesfalse
\newif\ifeq@randomizeallChoices \eq@randomizeallChoicesfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\turnOnRandomize}
%    \begin{macro}{\obeyLocalRandomize}
% When the \texttt{allowrandomize} option is in effect, the randomization can be
% turned on and off locally by the optional parameter in \cs{bChoices}. These
% two commands can be used to override \texttt{random=false}. Consequently,
% by saying \cs{turnOnRandomize} you can convert your old multiple choice
% questions so that are randomly arranged, without having to edit them and
% add the optional \texttt{random} key.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\turnOnRandomize{\eq@randomizeallChoicestrue}
\def\obeyLocalRandomize{\eq@randomizeallChoicesfalse}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\saveRandomSeed}
%    \begin{macro}{\inputRandomSeed}
% These two commands are used when the \texttt{allowrandomize} option is in effect,
% Until then, they do nothing. See the definition in the section \autoref{randomize}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\saveRandomSeed\relax
\let\inputRandomSeed\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\CorrectionsOn}
%    \begin{macro}{\CorrectionsOff}
%    Use these macros to locally turn on or off the inclusion
%    of the correction code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\CorrectionsOn{\global\nocorrectionsfalse}
\def\CorrectionsOff{\global\nocorrectionstrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \subsection{Process Options and Require Packages}
% The \texttt{quiz} environments use Acrobat forms and JavaScript
% so we need to load in the AcroForm Dictionary---unless the
% \texttt{dviwindo} (\cmd{\eq@noformstrue}) option is requested.
%\changes{v6.3y}{2011/04/23}{%
% As per Heiko's suggestion, I've change the \texttt{Form} environment
% no longer creates a grouping. This was causing problems with
% the \textsf{atveryend} package.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\ifeq@noforms\else\Form\fi}
\AtEndDocument{%
    \include@solutions
    \ifeq@noforms\else\include@quizsolutions\fi
    \clearpage
    \csname endForm\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% (04/12/07) I put a \cs{clearpage} for some good reason, can't remember, I think
% it had to do with templates, but dvipdfm has problems with this. The document
% level JavaScript are not inserted, they are cleared out by the \cs{clearpage}.
% So, we'll only to a \cs{clearpage} if the driver is not dvipdfm.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \if\eq@drivernum2\else\clearpage\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Load Configuration File: exerquiz.cfg}
% Look for configuration file, exerquiz.cfg.
%\begin{verbatim}
%    \ExecuteOptions{noquizsolutions,nocorrections}
%\end{verbatim}
% sets several options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\InputIfFileExists{exerquiz.cfg}{}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% If web is already loaded, we use its driver.
% \changes{v6.4t}{2012/06/18}{Testing for pdflatex and xetex}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifpackageloaded{web}{%
    \ExecuteOptions{\eq@driver@name}%
}{%
    \ifpdf\ExecuteOptions{pdftex}\else
    \ifxetex\ExecuteOptions{xetex}\fi\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProcessOptions
\RequirePackage{\eq@ColorPackage}
\RequirePackage{verbatim}
\RequirePackage{hyperref}
\RequirePackage{amssymb}% used for return symbols
\RequirePackage{eforms}[2012/06/20]
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{eq@drivernum}{%
    \PackageError{Exerquiz}%
        {You  have not specified dvips, dvipsone, pdftex dvipdfm,
        dvipdfmx, or xetex
        \MessageBreak in the option list of the exerquiz package}
        {Place one of the drivers dvips, dvipsone, pdftex,  dvipdfm,
        dvipdfmx, or xetex
        \MessageBreak in the option list of the exerquiz package.}
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{The Template \& Language dependent messages}\label{ss:ldm}
% The following define labels and messages for the exercise and
% various quiz environments. They are all redefined when a
% language option is used.  All of them can be redefined to
% customize a users document.
%
% In attempt to better manage the language localizations, I've placed the
% template for Web and Exerquiz in the Exerquiz.dtx file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<template>%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%<template>%% Web.sty                                            %%
%<template>%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%<template>% Language dependent definitions for Web.sty
%<*template>
\DeclareOption{newlanguage}{%
  \AtEndOfPackage{%
    \def\today{\ifcase\month\or January
            \or February \or March \or April
            \or May \or June  \or July  \or August
            \or September  \or October  \or November
            \or December \fi \the\day,  \the\year}
    \def\web@versionlabel{Version}
    \def\web@toc{Table of Contents}
    \def\web@continued{cont.}
    \def\web@article{Begin \hyperlink{section.1}{Article}}
    \def\web@directory{Directory}
    \def\web@revision{Last Revision Date:}
    \def\web@copyright{Copyright}
    \def\web@section{Section}
    % Label Navibar
    \def\web@back{Back}
    \def\web@doc{Doc}} % restricted to three characters
    \PassOptionsToPackage{newlanguage}{exerquiz}
}
%</template>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<template>%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%<template>%% Exerquiz.sty                                       %%
%<template>%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%<template>\DeclareOption{newlanguage}{%
%<template>   \def\LangRedefinitions{\InputIfFileExists{eqlang.def}%
%<template>   {\typeout{exerquiz: Inputting a New Language Option}}%
%<template>   {\typeout{exerquiz: Language Option: Cannot find the file
%<template>    eqpo.def, using the default, English.}}}}
%<template>
%<package>\def\eqretnSymb{$\blacksquare$}%{\rule{6bp}{6.8bp}}
% The exercise label
%<package>\newcommand\exlabel{Exercise}
%<package>\newcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}
%<template>% The exercise label
%<template>% Accents: \renewcommand\exlabel{\"Ubung} (German)
%<template>\renewcommand\exlabel{Exercise}
%<template>% The value of this macro is written to \jobname.sol,
%<template>% accented characters must be protected with a \protect
%<template>% E.g., \renewcommand\exlabelsol{\protect\"Ubung} (German)
%<template>\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Title of exercise solution section
%<package>\newcommand\exsectitle{Solutions to \exlabel s}
%<package>\newcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle} %% change to @ form
%<template>
%<template>% Title of exercise solution section
%<template>% E.g.: \renewcommand\exsectitle
%<template>%            {L\"osungen der \exlabel en} (German)
%<template>\renewcommand\exsectitle{Solutions to \exlabel s}
%<template>\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle} %% change to @ form
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\exsolafter}
% Solution label for \texttt{solutionafter} option for exercise, this is a command
% that may be redefined. Either by a \cs{recommand} or by the use of
% \cs{renameSolnAfterTo}.
%    \begin{macro}{\resetSolnAfterToDefault}
% This command resets \cs{exsolafter} to the default value.
%    \begin{macro}{\exsolafterDefault}
% Takes one argument, the argument is the default value of \cs{exsolafter}
%    \begin{macro}{\renameSolnAfterTo}
% This command takes one command, it redefines \cs{exsolafter}, but does
% not change the default value.
%\changes{v6.05g}{2007/01/28}
%{
% Added to commands for use in exerquiz or in \textsf{eqexam}. They are
% \cs{renameSolnAfterTo} for conveniently changing the solution
% after label, and \cs{resetSolnAfterToDefault} for resetting
% back to the default.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\exsolafter}{\eq@exsolafterDefault}
\newcommand{\resetSolnAfterToDefault}{%
    \def\exsolafter{\eq@exsolafterDefault}}
\newcommand{\exsolafterDefault}[1]{\def\eq@exsolafterDefault{#1}%
    \resetSolnAfterToDefault}
\exsolafterDefault{\textit{Solution}:}
\newcommand{\renameSolnAfterTo}[1]{\def\exsolafter{#1}}
\def\adjDisplayBelow{%
    \vskip-\lastskip\vskip-\baselineskip}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package|eqexam>
%<template>
%<template>% Solution label for solutionafter option for exercise
%<template>\renewcommand\exsolafter{\textit{Solution}:}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Title of quiz solution section
%<package>\newcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Solutions to Quizzes}
%<package>\newcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}
%<template>
%<template>% Title of short quiz solution section
%<template>% Example: \renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle
%<template>%               {L\"osungen der Aufgaben} (German)
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Solutions to Quizzes}
%<template>\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Running header/section title for solutions to short quizzes
%<package>\newcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Solutions to Quizzes}
% User access
%<package>\newcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}
%<template>
%<template>% Running header/section title for solutions to short quizzes
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Solutions to Quizzes}
%<template>% User access
%<template>\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Label for solutions to quizzes, appears in solutions sections
%<package>\newcommand\eq@sqsllabel{\protect\textbf{Solution to Quiz:}}
% User access
%<package>\newcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}
%<template>
%<template>% Label for solutions to short quizzes, appears
%<template>% in solutions sections
%<template>% Protect accents with \protect
%<template>% E.g.: \renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel
%<template>%       {\string\textbf{L\protect\"osung zu Aufgabe:}} (German)
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{\string\textbf{Solution to Quiz:}}
%<template>% User access
%<template>\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
%<package>\newcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Solution}:}
%<template>
%<template>% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
%<template>\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Solution}:}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Here is the default short quiz label.
%<package>\newcommand{\sqDefaultFmtTitle}[1]%
%<package>      {\def\eq@sqlabel{#1}\def\sqlabel{#1}}
% User access to shortquiz label
%<package>\newcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}
%<package>\sqDefaultFmtTitle{\textcolor{red}{Quiz}}
%<template>
%<template>% User access to shortquiz label
%<template>\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}
%<template>% Here is the default short quiz label.
%<template>\sqDefaultFmtTitle{\textcolor{red}{Quiz.}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Here is the default short quiz return label
% No formatting allowed
%<package>\newcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{\protect\eqretnSymb}
% User access to shortquiz label
%<package>\newcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}
%<template>
%<template>% Here is the default short quiz return label
%<template>% No formatting allowed
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{End Quiz}
%<template>% User access to shortquiz label
%<template>\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Short quiz feedback messages
%<package>\newcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Right!"}
%<package>\newcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Wrong!"}
%<template>
%<template>% Short quiz feedback messages
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@sqrtmsg{"Right!"}
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@sqwgmsg{"Wrong!"}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Here is the default quiz label.
%<package>\newcommand\eq@bqlabel{Begin Quiz}
% User access to quiz label
%<package>\newcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
% Used for writing JavaScript Messages on screen
%<package>\newcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
%<package>\newcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabelISO}
% Default title for a quiz used for \verb!\@currentlablename!
%<package|eqexam>\newcommand\setDefShortQuizLabelName[1]%
%<package|eqexam>    {\def\eq@defaultShortQuizLabelName{#1}}
%<package|eqexam>\setDefShortQuizLabelName{Quiz}
%<package>\newcommand\setDefQuizLabelName[1]
%<package>    {\def\eq@defaultQuizLabelName{#1}}
%<package>\setDefQuizLabelName{Quiz}
%<template>
%<template>% Here is the default quiz label.
%<template>% No formatting allowed
%<template>% For Example: \renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{D\'ebut}  (French)
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Begin Quiz}
%<template>% User access to shortquiz label
%<template>\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
%<template>% Used for writing JavaScript Messages on screen.
%<template>% Use PDFDocEncoding
%<template>% For Example:
%<template>% \renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{D\string\351but}  (French)
%<template>% Use \string not \protect, this helps out
%<template>% TeX4ht by Eitan Gurari.
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
%<template>\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
%<template>% Default title for a quiz used for \verb!\@currentlablename!
%<template>\defaultShortQuizLabelName{Quiz}
%<template>\setDefQuizLabelName{Quiz}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
%<package>\newcommand\eq@eqlabel{End Quiz}
% User access to quiz label
%<package>\newcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%<template>
%<template>% Here is the default quiz label.
%<template>% No formatting allowed
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{End Quiz}
%<template>% User access to shortquiz label
%<template>\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments
%<package>\newcommand\eq@Score{Score:}\newcommand\eq@OutOf{out of}
%<package>\newcommand\eqScore{\eq@Score}\newcommand\eqOutOf{\eq@OutOf}
%<template>
%<template>% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments. Use PDFDocEncoding
%<template>% Note: Use  \string rather than \protect for escape codes,
%<template>% i.e. \string\374
%<template>%
%<template>% In the Text Field showing the score, there is the default
%<template>% phrase in English
%<template>% Score: 2 out of 3, the word "Score" and "out of" needs
%<template>% translation.
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@Score{Score:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{out of}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<package>\newcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%
%<package>  "You must initialize the Quiz! Click on "+msg+"."}
%<template>
%<template>% If you are taking a quiz and click on an alternative without
%<template>% initializing the quiz
%<template>% first, this message appears.
%<template>% This string is placed in the DLJS, so the escape sequences
%<template>% need to be protected more. Instead of \string\340 we need
%<template>% \string\\340.
%<template>% Example: \renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%    (German)
%<template>%   "Sie m\string\\374ssen die Aufgaben initialisieren!
%<template>%    Bitte klicken Sie auf "+msg+"."}
%<template>\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%
%<template>  "You must initialize the Quiz! Click on "+msg+"."}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<package>\newcommand\eqQuizTotalMsg{%
%<package>  "\eqScore\space"+Score+" \eqOutOf\space"+nQuestions}
%<package>\newcommand\eqQuizPointsMsg{%
%<package>  "\eqScore\space"+ptScore+" \eqOutOf\space"+nPointTotal}
%<package>\newcommand\eqQuizPercentMsg{pcScore+"\%"}
%<package>\newcommand\eqQuizGradeMsg{quizGrade}
%<template>
%<template>% This macro doesn't usually need translation, it uses \eqScore
%<template>% and \eqOutOf. However, if the sentence "Score: 2 out of 3"
%<template>% does not translate conveniently into a particular language,
%<template>% this macro may have to be modified.  It's the one that puts
%<template>% the message in the message box.
%<template>\renewcommand\eqQuizTotalMsg
%<template>% {"\eqScore\space"+Score+" \eqOutOf\space"+nQuestions}
%<template>\renewcommand\eqQuizPointsMsg{%
%<template>  "\eqScore\space"+ptScore+" \eqOutOf\space"+nPointTotal}
%<template>\renewcommand\eqQuizPercentMsg{pcScore+"\%"}
%<template>\renewcommand\eqQuizGradeMsg{quizGrade}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<package>\newcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
%<package>  "You have already made a choice.
%<package>   Your choice was ("+Responses[probno]+").
%<package>   Do you want to change it?"}
%<template>
%<template>% In the link form of a quiz, of you change your choice,
%<template>% this message appears. This string is placed in the
%<template>% DLJS, so the escape sequences need to be protected more.
%<template>% Instead of \string\340 we need \string\\340.
%<template>% For Example: \renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
%<template>% "Vous avez d\string\\351j\string\\340 fait un choix,
%<template>%   ce choix est ("+Responses[probno]+").
%<template>%   Souhaitez vous le modifier ?"}  (French)
%<template>\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
%<template>  "You have already made a choice.
%<template>   Your choice was ("+Responses[probno]+").
%<template>   Do you want to change it?"}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Default language phrases used by \cmd{\eqButton}. These are overwritten by the
% language options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<package>\newcommand\eq@local@CA{Correct}
%<package>\newcommand\eq@local@RC{My Answers!}
%<package>\newcommand\eq@local@AC{Please!}
%<template>% Default button labels for \eqButton
%<template>% Accents are handled as above:
%<template>% A French Language Example
%<template>% \renewcommand\eq@local@CA{R\string\351ponses}
%<template>% \renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Correctes}
%<template>% \renewcommand\eq@local@AC{SVP !}
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Correct}
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{My Answers!}
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Please!}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Default language phrases used by \cmd{\CorrAnsButton}. These are overwritten by the
% language options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<package>\newcommand\eq@local@CorrAnsButton{Ans}
%<template>
%<template>% Default button label of \CorrAnsButton.
%<template>\renewcommand\eq@local@CorrAnsButton{Ans}
%<package>\newcommand{\eq@local@sqClearButton}{Clear}
%<template>% Default button label of \sqClearButton
%<template>\renewcommand{\eq@local@sqClearButton}{Clear}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following are (error) messages generated from the math fill-in questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
\newcommand\eqerrABS{"Absolute values not balanced. Please correct."}
\newcommand\eqerrBadMathFunc{"The expression `"+aF[i]+"' is neither a
    defined function, nor a valid math expression."}
\newcommand\eqParens{"Parentheses"}
\newcommand\eqBrackets{"Brackets"}
\newcommand\eqBraces{"Braces"}
\newcommand\eqerrDelimNotBal{aGroup[i][2] + " not balanced.
    Please correct."}
\newcommand\eqerrBadExp{"Invalid mathematical expression.
    A problem with one of the exponents.  Please correct."}
\newcommand\eqerrUnfinishQuiz{"There is an unfinished quiz,
    please finish before moving on to another."}
\newcommand\noPeekMsg{"Viewing Solutions to quizzes is not allowed
    until you take or finish this quiz!"}
\newcommand\highThresholdMsg{"You are required to respond to all
    questions before the quiz is evaluated."}
\newcommand\eqSyntaxErrorUndefVar{"Syntax Error: Possibly an undefined
    variable present, or an expression is not written in an expected
    format."}
\newcommand{\eqSyntaxErrorComma}{"Syntax Error: A comma was found
        in your response \""
    + UserAns + "\". Please remove the comma, or this answer
    will be marked as wrong."}
\newcommand{\limSelWarningMsg}{"For this question, you are allowed to
    make at most " + n + " selections."}
%</package>
%<template>
%<template>% These (error) messages are generated when the user enters an
%<template>% invalid math expression into a math fill-in response box.
%<template>% The messages come in the form of an app.alert() so
%<template>% PDFDocEncoding needs to be used.
%<*template>
\renewcommand\eqerrABS{"Absolute values not balanced. Please correct."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadMathFunc{"The expression `"+aF[i]+"' is neither
    a defined " +"function, nor a valid math expression."}
\renewcommand\eqParens{"Parentheses"}
\renewcommand\eqBrackets{"Brackets"}
\renewcommand\eqBraces{"Braces"}
\renewcommand\eqerrDelimNotBal{aGroup[i][2] + " not balanced.
    Please correct."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadExp{"Invalid mathematical expression.
    A problem with one of the exponents. Please correct."}
\renewcommand\eqerrUnfinishQuiz{"There is an unfinished quiz,
    please finish before moving on to another."}
\renewcommand\noPeekMsg{"Viewing Solutions to quizzes is not allowed
    until you take or finish this quiz!"}
\renewcommand\highThresholdMsg{"You are required to respond to all
    questions before the quiz is evaluated."}
\renewcommand\eqSyntaxErrorUndefVar{"Syntax Error: Possibly an
    undefined variable present."}
\newcommand{\limSelWarningMsg}{"For this questions, you are allowed to
    make at most " + n + " selections."}
%</template>
%<*template>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End Message Section %%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Some typeout messages                              %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% In exerquiz.sty
\typeout{Inputting French Option}
\typeout{French Option: Cannot find the file eqfr.def, using the
    default, English.}
\typeout{Solutions not allowed with this option}
\typeout{Check: `#1' is not an acceptable option, inserting
    default, `check'.}
%</template>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Announce driver option
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
\typeout{^^Jexerquiz: * Using \eq@driver\space option *^^J}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Handles, counters and such}
% Handles to write solutions to quizzes and exercises to a file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\ifsolutionsonly
\InputIfFileExists{\jobname_xdefs.cut}{%
    \typeout{^^JExerquiz|Eqexam: Reading \jobname_xdefs.cut^^J}}
    {\PackageWarningNoLine{exerquiz|eqexam}{%
    \jobname_xdefs.cut not found.\MessageBreak
     Recompile file under the vspacewithsolns\MessageBreak
     option, then compile with the solutionsonly\MessageBreak
     option}}
\else
\newwrite\ex@solns \immediate\openout \ex@solns \jobname.sol
\newcommand{\writeToExSolns}[1]{%
    \set@display@protect
    \immediate\write\ex@solns{#1}%
    \set@typeset@protect
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% If we are not in \cs{ifsolutionsonly} mode, we write some definitions to a .def
% file to be read back in at the beginning of the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newwrite\eq@xrefdefns \immediate\openout\eq@xrefdefns\jobname_xdefs.cut
\fi
\newwrite\quiz@solns \immediate\openout \quiz@solns \jobname.qsl
\newcommand{\writeToQzSolns}[1]{%
    \set@display@protect
    \immediate\write\quiz@solns{#1}%
    \set@typeset@protect
}
\def\eq@IWAuxOut#1{\immediate\write\@auxout{#1}}
\def\eq@IWDefs#1{\immediate\write\eq@xrefdefns{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Counters to keep track of exercise questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{eqexno} \setcounter{eqexno}{0}
\newcounter{@exno} \setcounter{@exno}{0}  % running exno
%    \end{macrocode}
% Counter to keep track of quiz questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{quizno} \setcounter{quizno}{0}
\renewcommand\thequizno{\alph{quizno}}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
\def\theHquizno{\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi.%
    \ifcase\@eqquestiondepth\or\or\arabic{eqquestionnoii}.%
    \or\arabic{eqquestionnoii}.\roman{eqquestionnoiii}.%
    \else\fi\alph{quizno}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2017/05/17) \cs{eqemargin} is used in \textsf{eqexam}, but some calculations use it for the list version of
% answers. We declare this length to be 0pt. The \textsf{eqexam} resets this value.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength\eqemargin \eqemargin=0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Keep track of point values of quizzes
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{eqpointvalue} \setcounter{eqpointvalue}{0}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Some scratch registers and boxes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength\eq@tmplength
\newlength\eqtmplength
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{eqquestionno}
% The counter that keeps track of the question number.
% Used by the \texttt{questions environment}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{questionno}
\newcounter{eqquestionnoi}
\newcounter{eqquestionnoii}
\newcounter{eqquestionnoiii}
\newcount\@eqquestiondepth \@eqquestiondepth=0
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
\newcounter{grpquestionno}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{partno}
%    This counter keeps track of the parts of an exercise, when the *-option
%    is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package|eqexam>
\newcounter{partno}
\renewcommand\thepartno{\alph{partno}}
\newtoks\eq@scratchtoks
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
\def\theHpartno{partno\the@exno\alph{partno}}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \subsection{Write to a file}
% We must have a way to write the solutions of our exercises and
% quizzes to a file.  The following \cmd{\verbatimwrite} was
% taken from the \texttt{moreverb} package, it uses the
% \texttt{verbatim} package.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatimwrite{\@bsphack
  \let\do\@makeother\dospecials
  \catcode`\^^M\active \catcode`\^^I=12
  \def\verbatim@processline{%
    \immediate\write\verbatim@out
      {\the\verbatim@line}}%
  \verbatim@start}
\def\endverbatimwrite{\@esphack}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \section{The \texttt{exercise} Environment}
%
% We use \cmd{\raggedright} within a \texttt{tabular} environment,
% so we must use a little trick, illustrated in the \textsl{\LaTeX\
% Companion} by M. Goossens et al. This macro is used with \texttt{exercise}
% with parts, \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{quiz} environments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand\PBS[1]{\let\temp=\\#1\let\\=\temp}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define some formatting commands.  These can all be redefined to
% customize the document.
%    \begin{macro}{\exlabelformat}
%    This is the formatted label for the exercise environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\exlabelformat{{\scshape\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\exlabelformatwp}
%    This is the formatted label for the exercise environment with parts.
%    When an exercises has parts, the word `Exercise' is not a link,
%    so we color this word for emphasis.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\newcommand\exlabelformatwp{{\scshape\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
\newcommand\exlabelformatwp{\exlabelformat}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\exsllabelformat}
%    This is the formatted solution label.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\exsllabelformat{\protect\textbf{\exlabelsol\ \theeqexno.}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\exsllabelformatwp}
%    This is the formatted solution when the *-options is use, that is,
%    when there are multiple parts to the question.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\exsllabelformatwp
     {\protect\textbf{\exlabelsol\ \theeqexno(\alph{partno})}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\exrtnlabelformat}
%    This is the formatted return label (return from the solution).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}
%\newcommand\exrtnlabelformat{\exlabelsol\ \theeqexno}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\exrtnlabelformat}
%    This is the formatted return label (return from the solution),
%    for an exercise with parts.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\exrtnlabelformatwp{$\square$}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\aboveexskip}
%    \begin{macro}{\belowexskip}
% Amount of skip before and after exercise environment
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\newcommand{\belowexskip}[1]{\def\eq@exerskip{\vspace{#1}}}
\let\eqexerskip\belowexskip
\belowexskip{\medskipamount}
\newcommand{\aboveexskip}[1]{\def\eq@priorexskip{\vspace{#1}}}
\let\priorexskip\aboveexskip
\aboveexskip{\medskipamount}
\let\eq@postexerciseHook\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\belowexsolnskip}
% Amount of skip after solutions, this one is written to a file, so
% we must protect it from early expansion.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\belowexsolnskip{\protect\medskip}
%\let\eqafterexersolnskip\belowexsolnskip
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\nolinkcolor}
% This is the color to paint the word 'Exercise' with parts;
% or it colors all the 'Exercise's when the nosolutions option
% has been used
% \changes{v6.05a}{2006/05/08}
% {
%   Changed \cs{nolinkcolor} into a text fill-in. Now, the command \cs{nolinkcolor}
%   fills in \cs{@nolinkcolor}, which holds the named color.
% }
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\nolinkcolor}[1]{\def\@nolinkcolor{#1}}
\nolinkcolor{blue}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \subsection{Define \texttt{exercise} Environment}
% Defines the \texttt{exercise} environment for writing exercises,
% and solutions.  The solutions are written to the file
% \cmd{\jobname.sol}, and input at the end of the file.  Hypertext
% links connect the statement of the exercise with its solution.
%
%\smallskip\noindent\textbf{Basic usage}
%\begin{verbatim}
%\begin{exercise}
%The exercise question is posed.
%\begin{solution}
%The solution to exercise goes here.
%\end{solution}
%\end{exercise}
%\end{verbatim}
% These environments should be nested as illustrated above.
%
% The \texttt{exercise} environment has three optional arguments. The syntax
% for an exercise without parts is\dots
%\begin{verbatim}
%   \begin{exercise}[<ctr>][h|H] ...\end{exercise}
%\end{verbatim}%
%
% (1) The value of this first optional argument, \texttt{<ctr>}, is a counter.
% You can use the \texttt{exercise}
% environment then to create other environments with their own
% counters.  A special value of zero (0) for this optional argument,
% means not to associate any counter with the environment.  These
% features can be used in combination with the \cs{SolutionsAfter}
% and \cs{SolutionsAtEnd} commands to obtain different effects,
% see the manual for examples
%
% (2) The second optional argument is an `\texttt{h}' or an \texttt{H}, this signals that the
% solution to the exercise should not be written to the \cmd{\jobname.sol}
% file.  See manual for examples.
%
% The \texttt{exercise} environment has three optional arguments. The syntax
% for an exercise with parts is\dots
%\begin{verbatim}
%   \begin{exercise}[<ctr>]* ...\end{exercise}
%   \begin{exercise*}[<ctr>] ...\end{exercise*}
%\end{verbatim}%
%
% (1) The value of this first optional argument, \texttt{<ctr>}, is a counter.
% You can use the \texttt{exercise}
% environment then to create other environments with their own
% counters.  A special value of zero (0) for this optional argument,
% means not to associate any counter with the environment.  These
% features can be used in combination with the \cs{SolutionsAfter}
% and \cs{SolutionsAtEnd} commands to obtain different effects,
% see the manual for examples
%
% (2) The second argument is a star \texttt{*}.  The presence of a * signals
% that this exercise has multiple parts.  See the manual for the proper
% syntax.
%
% Beginning with version 6.07, there is now a \texttt{exercise*}
% environment, this is what I should have done originally, but now its
% done.  The \texttt{exercise*} signals an exercise with parts. It takes
% one optional parameter, the name of a counter \texttt{<ctr>} that is to
% be used.
%    \begin{macro}{\exerSolnInExtFile}
% With the exercises, you have the option of including them in the main document, or putting them
% in an external document.  The \cs{exerSolnsInExtFile} command lets you specify an external file name.
% Just use the \textit{basename}, hyperref will add the extension.  If an external file is specified, all
% solution links are changed to links between documents. Usage:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\exerSolnsInExtFile{myExSonls}
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\exerSolnsInExtFile}[2][]
    {\let\exerSolns@ExtFile\eq@YES\gdef\eq@exerSolns@fileName{#2}%
     \gdef\exerSolns@ReturnPath{#1}}
\let\exerSolns@ExtFile\eq@NO
\def\exerSolns@ReturnPath{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\DescribeMacro{\marginparpriorhook}\DescribeMacro{\marginparafterhook}
%\DescribeMacro{\afterlabelhskip} Various hooks into an exercise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\marginparpriorhook\@empty % used to material before the exercise
\let\marginparafterhook\@empty % used to material after the exercise
\let\afterlabelhskip\space
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\exersolnheadhook}
% Inserted in the header of each exercise solution. May be used for inserting
% addition text or macros in the solution.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\exersolnheadhook\@empty
\let\exer@solnheadhook\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqexheader}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqexheader@wrapper}
% \cs{eqexheader} typesets `Exercise xx'. \cs{eqexheader@wrapper} creates a hypertarget
% at the heading. Portions of \cs{eqexheader} is also used by \textsf{eqExam}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\eqexheader}
{%
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \ifeq@nolink   % no link to solution
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
        \mbox{\color{\@nolinkcolor}\if\exerstar*\exlabelformatwp\else
        \exlabelformat\fi}%
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \else
        \if\exerSolns@ExtFile\eq@YES
            \mbox{\href{\eq@exerSolns@fileName\#ex.\the@exno}%
                {\exlabelformat}}%
        \else
            \mbox{\hyperlink{ex.\the@exno}{\exlabelformat}}%
        \fi
    \fi
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
}
\def\eqexheader@wrapper{\hypertarget{qex.\the@exno}{\eqexheader}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqexlisttabheader}
% \cs{eqexlisttabheader} typesets `(a)' when we have exercises with parts.
% Portions are also used by \textsf{eqExam}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\partsformat}[1]{\def\eq@partsformat{#1}}
\partsformat{(\hfil\alph{partno}\hfil)}
\newcommand{\defaultpartsformat}{%
    \partsformat{(\hfil\alph{partno}\hfil)}}
\let\exlisttabheaderpriorhook\@empty
\let\exlisttabheaderafterhook\@empty
\newcommand{\eqexlisttabheader}
{%
    \exlisttabheaderpriorhook
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \ifeq@nolink
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
      \color{\@nolinkcolor}\eq@partsformat
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \else
      \if\exerSolns@ExtFile\eq@YES
        \href{\eq@exerSolns@fileName\#ex.\the@exno\alph{partno}}%
            {\eq@partsformat}%
        \else
            \hyperlink{ex.\the@exno\alph{partno}}{\eq@partsformat}%
        \fi
    \fi
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{environment}{exercise}
% With some of the preliminaries out of the way, we begin the exercise `environment'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\eq@CommonCmd}[1]{\def\eq@@CommonCmd{#1}#1}
\let\eq@@CommonCmd\@empty
\let\endexerhook\@empty
\newenvironment{exercise}
{%
    \let\eqCommonCmd\eq@CommonCmd
    \par\eq@priorexskip\noindent%\begingroup % set defaults
    \def\eq@argi{eqexno}%  % use eqexno counter
    \if\eq@exerstarEnv*\def\exerstar{*}\else\def\exerstar{x}\fi
    \def\currhideopt{x}%
    \@ifnextchar[{\exercise@}%
        {\if\exerstar*\def\eq@next{\@exercise}\else
         \def\eq@next{\exercise@@}\fi\eq@next}%
}{\eq@postexerciseHook\endexerhook\par
    \global\eq@exerciseheadingtrue\eq@exerskip}
%    \end{macrocode}
% the exercise environment takes two sets of optional parameter,
% the first one is a counter (or 0) and second one is either \texttt{h} or \texttt{H}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\exercise@[#1]{\edef\eq@arg{#1}%
    \if\eq@arg h\def\currhideopt{h}%
        \eq@hidesolutiontrue\eq@nolinktrue%
        \ifeq@globalshowsolutions
            \eq@hidesolutionfalse\eq@nolinkfalse\fi
        \def\eq@next{\@exercise}%   h, no *, no counter
    \else
        \if\eq@arg H%
            \edef\currhideopt{\Hidesymbol}%
            \eq@hidesolutiontrue\eq@nolinktrue%
            \ifeq@globalshowsolutions
                \eq@hidesolutionfalse\eq@nolinkfalse
            \fi
            \def\eq@next{\@exercise}%   H, no *, no counter
        \else
            \def\currhideopt{x}%
            \ifx\eq@arg\@empty\else\def\eq@argi{#1}\fi
            \if\exerstar*\def\eq@next{\@exercise}\else
            \def\eq@next{\exercise@@}\fi
        \fi
    \fi
\eq@next}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specified counter, test for *
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\exercise@@{\@ifstar{\def\exerstar{*}\@exercise}{\exercise@@@}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% We have recorded the presence of a star, is there
% another optional argument, h
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\exercise@@@{\@ifnextchar[{\exercise@@@@}{\@exercise}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\exercise@@@@[#1]{\edef\eq@arg{#1}%
    \if\eq@arg h\def\currhideopt{h}%
        \eq@hidesolutiontrue\eq@nolinktrue
        \ifeq@globalshowsolutions
            \eq@hidesolutionfalse\eq@nolinkfalse\fi
        \def\eq@next{\@exercise}%   h, no *, no counter
    \else
        \if\eq@arg H\edef\currhideopt{\Hidesymbol}%
            \eq@hidesolutiontrue\eq@nolinktrue%
            \def\eq@next{\@exercise}%   h, no *, no counter
        \else
            \def\currhideopt{x}%
            \PackageWarning{exerquiz}{The option #1 is not recognized}
            \let\eq@next\relax
        \fi
    \fi
\eq@next}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\exerSolnHeader}
% When a solution is written to the .sol file, there is a header line that contains formatting information.
% This command can be redefined as desired.  We also introduce to markers, \cs{eqEXt} and \cs{endeqEXt} which
% can be used in any way your imaginations can conjure up. Basically, the mark the beginning and ending of the solution.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifeq@exerciseheading \eq@exerciseheadingtrue
\newcommand\exerSolnHeader[3]
{%
    \ifeqforpaper\else\webnewpage\fi\markright{#1}\par\noindent%
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \hypertarget{#2}{#3}\relax
%</package>
%<*eqexam>
    #3%
%</eqexam>
%<*package|eqexam>
    \solnhspace
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \DescribeMacro{\eqEXt}These two mark the beginning and end of solution to an exercise. \cs{eqEXt} is
% set up to have two required arguments, usually both empty. The arguments are
% used for filtering. The first might be a number, so we can filter out even numbered
% exercises from odd ones. The second one is a keyword, we can filter by keyword.
%\changes{v6.7}{2013/04/07}{Changing \cs{eqEXt} so that it has two
%required arguments}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\let\eqEXt\@gobble
\let\eqEXt\@gobbletwo
\let\endeqEXt\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\eqExtArg}\cs{eqExtArg} and \DescribeMacro{\eqFilterArg}\cs{eqFilterArg}
% are the arguments for \cs{eqEXt}. They are redefined at the creation of the
% exercise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eqExtArg\@empty
\let\eqFilterArg\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% The format of the solutions to exercises as they appear in the SOL file is,
%\begin{verbatim}
%\eqEXt{\eqExtArg}{\eqFilterArg}\exerSolnHeader
%   {\exsecrunhead}{ex.1}{\textbf{Exercise\ 1.}}\relax
%   ...
%   <solution content>
%   ...
%\ReturnTo{qex.1}{\hbox {$\square $}}\endeqEXt\par\medskip
%\end{verbatim}
% \changes{v6.7a}{2013/05/03}{Change name of \cs{eq@writeexheader} to \cs{eqExerSolnHeader}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eqExerSolnHeader\@empty
%\let\eq@writeexheader\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{solutionparshape} is a command that supports the \cs{leadinitem} command
% of \texttt{eqexam}. Its normal value is \cs{@empty}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\solutionparshape\@empty
\def\@exercise{%
    \global\let\solutionparshape\@empty
    \let\verbatim@out=\ex@solns
    \if\eq@argi0\else\refstepcounter{\eq@argi}\fi\stepcounter{@exno}%
    \if\exerstar*% if exercise with parts
        \eq@nolinktrue
    \else
        \if\currhideopt H%
        \else
            \ifeq@solutionsafter
                \eq@nolinktrue  % no link to solution
            \else
                \eq@ckglobalhide %
                \ifeq@hidesolution\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here's where we write the header to the .sol file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                   \global\let\eqExerSolnHeader\eq@@writeexheader
                \fi
            \fi
        \fi
    \fi
    \ifvmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@
        \vskip-\lastskip
    \fi\fi
    \if\exerstar*%
        \let\solution\solnexer@woparts
        \let\endsolution\endsolnexer@woparts
        \let\parts\exercise@parts
        \let\endparts\endexercise@parts
    \else
        \let\solution\solnexer@woparts
        \let\endsolution\endsolnexer@woparts
        \let\parts\relax
        \let\endparts\relax
        \if\Hidesymbol h\eq@nolinkfalse\ifeq@solutionsafter
            \eq@nolinktrue\fi\fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here is where `Exercise' is typeset; the commands \cs{marginparpriorhook} and \cs{marginpartafterhook}
% can be used to insert content in before and after the `Exercise'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifeq@exerciseheading
    \prior@questionsHook\marginparpriorhook\noindent\eqexheader@wrapper
    \afterlabelhskip\marginparafterhook\ignorespaces\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
% \changes{v6.4z}{2012/11/28}{Extracted code to make it available elsewhere.}
% (2012/11/28) Extracted the code below from the macro above so it can be used
% elsewhere as well.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@@writeexheader{\set@display@protect
    \immediate\write\verbatim@out{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.7}{2013/04/07}{Inserted another argument into \cs{eqEXt}}
% Added another argument into \cs{eqEXt}, used for filtering.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protect\eqEXt{\eqExtArg}{\eqFilterArg}\protect
    \exerSolnHeader{\exsecrunhead}{ex.\the@exno}%
    {\exsllabelformat}\exer@solnheadhook
    \exersolnheadhook\protect\relax}%\space
    \set@typeset@protect
}
\def\eq@@writeexheaderlist{\set@display@protect
    \immediate\write\verbatim@out{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.7}{2013/04/07}{Inserted another argument into \cs{eqEXt}}
% Added another argument into \cs{eqEXt}, used for filtering.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protect\eqEXt{\eqExtArg}{\eqFilterArg}\protect
    \exerSolnHeader{\exsecrunhead}%
    {ex.\the@exno\alph{partno}}{\exsllabelformatwp}%
    \exer@solnheadhook\exersolnheadhook\relax}%
    \set@typeset@protect
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Define \texttt{solution} Environment for \texttt{exercise}}
%    \begin{macro}{solution}
%    This is the \texttt{solution} environment for
%    \texttt{exercise}; either start \cmd{\verbatim} or,
%    \cmd{\eq@solutionsaftertrue} write the label \cmd{\exsolafter}.
%
% The solution macro for the \texttt{exercise} environment now takes an optional
% argument. This argument must be a vertical skip ( i.e., \texttt{[1in]} ).  When the solution
% does not correspond to a tabular multi-part question, a vertical skip
% |\vspace{#1}| is introduced when the \texttt{nosolutions} is in effect and when
% \texttt{solutionsafter} is not.  This feature may be useful for constructing
% tests in this space is left for the student to write in the answer; yet, later
% when \texttt{solutionsafter} is true, the solutions appear instead of the vertical
% white space.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\setsolnspace#1{\def\newsolnspace{#1}%
    \let\solnspace\newsolnspace}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\ckSolnOpt}
%    \begin{macro}{\noSolnOpt}
%    \cs{noSolnOpt} turns off the check for the option argument
%    of the \texttt{solution} environment for the \texttt{exercise}
%    environment. Designed for use with \textsf{eqexam}.
% \changes{v6.4v}{2012/07/27}{Added \cs{ckSolnOpt} and \cs{noSolnOpt}
% to switch on and off checking for the optional vertical space in the
% \texttt{solution} environment.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifeq@ckSolnVspace \eq@ckSolnVspacetrue
\def\ckSolnOpt{\global\eq@ckSolnVspacetrue}
\def\noSolnOpt{\global\eq@ckSolnVspacefalse}
\let\solnhspace\space
\let\solnspace\space
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% This macro is the beginning of the \texttt{solution} environment for
% exercises.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\solnexer@woparts{\def\bLeaveVspace{x}% = no vertical space added
    \ifeq@ckSolnVspace
        \def\eq@next{\@ifnextchar[{\solnexer@@woparts}%
        {\solnexer@@woparts[\null]}}\else
        \def\eq@next{\solnexer@@woparts[\null]}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% The code below, now removed, used to deny the use of the optional parameter
% in the parts-tabular environment. (2013/03/26)
%\begin{verbatim}
%    \ifx\endparts\endexercise@parts@tabular
%        \def\eq@next{\solnexer@@@woparts}\fi
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \eq@next
}
\let\eqPriorVspace\@gobble
\newcommand{\vspaceFiller}[1]{\vfill}
\newcommand{\vspaceFillerDefault}[1]{\vfill}
\newcommand{\vspaceFmt}[1]{%
    \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% This must be part of the solution for a \cs{leadinitem} question.
% We need to make an adjustment to the \cs{linewidth}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \advance\linewidth-\leadinIndentPrtSep\fi %%dps
    \ifdim\sameVspace>0pt
        \let\bLeaveVspace\@empty
        \def\leavevspace{%
            \ifx\eq@insertverticalspace\eq@YES\par\eqPriorVspace{#1}%
                {\nobreak\noindent
                 \parbox[b][#1][t]{\linewidth}{\vspaceFiller{#1}}}%
            \fi
        }%
    \fi
}
\def\solnexer@@woparts[#1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \verb!\changes{v6.3z}{2011/04/28}! Added definition of \cs{sameVspace} for the cases
% where there is no vertical space specified.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\eq@argi{#1}\def\eq@null{\null}%
    \ifx\eq@argi\eq@null\gdef\sameVspace{0pt}%
    \else
        \xdef\sameVspace{#1}%
        \ifx\sameVspace\@empty\gdef\sameVspace{0pt}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% (03/04/11) Try to insert a new option: if there are \cs{ifvspacewithsolns} option
% then eqexam should leave space for writing an answer, and put solutions at the end
% of the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifvspacewithsolns\vspaceFmt{#1}\fi
        \ifeq@nosolutions\ifeq@solutionsafter\else
            \vspaceFmt{#1}\fi\fi
    \fi
    \solnexer@@@woparts
}
\def\solutionsafterSkip{\vskip\smallskipamount}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The next two definitions are used for debugging the
% \cs{ifkeepdeclaredvspacing} feature (\textsf{eqexam} only).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eqe@debugVertSkip#1{}
\def\eqe@showEndHere#1{#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Used to set the starting point of the solution
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eqe@setStartSolns{%
    \xdef\eq@startSoln{\the\pagetotal}%
    \eqe@debugVertSkip{\marginpar{\smash{b[\sameVspace]}}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.4b}{2011/06/30}{%
% Save the definitions of \cs{comment} and \cs{endcomment}. For some reason,
% yet to be determined, there are problems when using the \texttt{fortextbook}
% option when hiding solutions.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eqSavedComment\comment
\let\eqSavedEndCommet\endcomment
\def\solnexer@@@woparts
{%
    \def\exerwparts@cols{0}%
    \let\verbatim@out\ex@solns
    \if\currhideopt H%
        \let\procsoln\eqSavedComment
        \let\endprocsoln\eqSavedEndCommet
        \def\eq@next{\procsoln}%
    \else
        \eq@ckglobalhide
        \ifeq@hidesolution
            \let\procsoln\eqSavedComment
            \let\endprocsoln\eqSavedEndCommet
        \else
            \ifx\bLeaveVspace\@empty\leavevspace\fi
            \ifeq@solutionsafter\else
                \ifx\eq@@CommonCmd\@empty\else
                    \set@display@protect
                    \immediate\write\verbatim@out{\eq@@CommonCmd}%
                    \set@typeset@protect
                \fi
            \fi
            \let\procsoln\verbatimwrite
            \let\endprocsoln\endverbatimwrite
        \fi
        \def\eq@next{%
            \ifeq@solutionsafter%\par
                \ifx\exsolafter\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%    If we have solutions after and there is no label and no vertical
%    skip specified, we do nothing other than to execute \cs{eqe@setStartSolns},
%    which marks the beginning of the ``solution.''
%    \begin{macrocode}
                    \ifdim\sameVspace=0pt\eqe@setStartSolns
                    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%    If there is vertical space specified, we do a standard skip, and mark the beginning
%    of the solution with \cs{eqe@setStartSolns}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                        \solutionsafterSkip
                        \eqe@setStartSolns
                    \fi
                \else\par\kern0pt
                    \solutionsafterSkip
                    \noindent\strut\eqe@setStartSolns
                    \ifx\endparts\endexercise@parts@tabular
                    \hangindent=\partshangamount\relax
                        \hangafter=0\relax\fi
                        \exsolafter\space\ignorespaces
                \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% We set the shape of the solutionafter.
% This is empty if \cs{leadinitem} is not used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                \solutionparshape
            \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Write the solution header 11/03/05
%    \begin{macrocode}
                \eqExerSolnHeader
                \global\let\eqExerSolnHeader\@empty
                \global\therearesolutionstrue\expandafter\procsoln
            \fi
        }%
    \fi
\eq@next}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\endsolnexerhook\@empty
\let\endsolnexerhookaux\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% This macro attempts to insert the return link at the end of the
% last paragraph of the solutions, this makes the return label
% look nice, and saves a little space.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\def\eq@fititin#1{\noindent\unskip\nobreak\hfill\penalty50
%    \hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak\hfill#1}
\def\eq@fititin#1{\noindent\unskip\nobreak\hfill\penalty100
    \hskip1em\hbox{}\nobreak\hfill#1}%
\let\eqfititin\eq@fititin
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
\def\ReturnTo#1#2{\eq@fititin{\hyperlink{#1}{#2}}}
\def\xReturnTo#1#2{\eq@fititin{\href{#1}{#2}}}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqExerSolnTrailer}
% The material that follows the solution in the .sol file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package|eqexam>
\newcommand\eqExerSolnTrailer
{%
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \if\exerSolns@ExtFile\eq@YES\protect\xReturnTo
        {\exerSolns@ReturnPath\jobname\#qex.\the@exno}%
    \else\protect\ReturnTo{qex.\the@exno}\fi
    {\protect\mbox{\if\exerstar*\exrtnlabelformatwp\else
        \exrtnlabelformat\fi}}%
    \protect\endeqEXt\ifeqforpaper\protect\par{\belowexsolnskip}\fi%^^J%
%</package>
%<*eqexam>
    \protect\ReturnTo{page.\the\c@page}%
    {\protect\mbox{\if\exerstar*\exrtnlabelformatwp\else
        \exrtnlabelformat\fi}}%
    \protect\endeqEXt\ifeqforpaper\protect\par{\belowexsolnskip}\fi%^^J%
%</eqexam>
%<*package|eqexam>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\endsolnexer@woparts}
%    Unless \cmd{\eq@solutionsaftertrue}, then \cmd{\endverbitim},
%    and write return labels.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endsolnexer@woparts{%
    \if\currhideopt H%
        \ifkeepdeclaredvspacing\vskip\sameVspace\fi
        \csname endprocsoln\endcsname
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% If solutions after, we start a new paragraph, then add some kerning glue,
% this gives a better gauge for calculating the \cs{pagetotal}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifeq@solutionsafter
            \if\exerstar*%
            \eq@fititin{\hbox{\exrtnlabelformatwp}}\else
            \eq@fititin{\hbox{\exrtnlabelformat}}\fi\par\kern0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
% \verb!\changes{v6.3z}{2011/04/28}!, if \cs{ifkeepdeclaredvspacing} is true, we attempt
% to preserve the vertical space declared by the \textsf{solution} environment when
% \cs{ifeq@solutionsafter} is true.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \ifkeepdeclaredvspacing
%    \end{macrocode}
% We get the current \cs{pagetotal}, and subtract off the page total as recorded
% by \cs{eq@startSoln}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                \@tempdima\pagetotal
                \advance\@tempdima-\eq@startSoln
%\typeout{\theeqquestionnoi: \sameVspace,
%   \the\pagetotal - \eq@startSoln = \the\@tempdima }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v6.4w}{2012/26/27}{Added \cs{relax} following the assignment.}
% {\TeX} was looking ahead looking for the rest of the dimension, this caused
% problems because later code was expanded when it should not have been. Inserted
% \cs{relax}, \verb~\@tempdimb\sameVspace\relax~.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                \@tempdimb\sameVspace\relax
                \ifdim\@tempdimb>0pt\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% If there is a positive value for \cs{sameVspace}, we calculate
% the difference between\cs{@tempdimab} and \cs{@tempdima}, that is, we calculate
%\begin{verbatim}
%   \sameVspace-(\pagetotal-\eq@startSoln)
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
                    \advance\@tempdimb-\@tempdima
%    \end{macrocode}
% If this difference is positive, we will skip this amount.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                    \ifdim\@tempdimb>0pt\vglue\@tempdimb\kern0pt
                        \let\eqe@showEndHere\@gobble
                        \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand\marginpar{%
                        \noexpand\smash{e: adj \the\@tempdimb}}}%
                        \eqe@debugVertSkip{\tmp@exp}%
                    \fi
                \fi
            \fi
            \eqe@showEndHere{\eqe@debugVertSkip{\marginpar{\smash{e}}}}%
        \else
            \endprocsoln
            \eq@ckglobalhide
            \ifeq@hidesolution\else
                \endsolnexerhookaux
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here's were we write the trailer for the solution
%    \begin{macrocode}
                \set@display@protect
                \immediate\write\verbatim@out{\eqExerSolnTrailer}%
                \set@typeset@protect
            \fi
        \fi
    \fi
\endsolnexerhook}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \subsection{The \texttt{exercise*} Environment: Exercises with Parts}
% Exercises with parts are enclosed within a \texttt{parts} environment. There are two types
% of parts listing: list-type and tabular-type.
%    \begin{environment}{exercise*}
% For the exercise* environment, we set a flag to indicate that the \cs{exerstar}
% has been set in the star environment, the begin the \cs{exercise} and finished with
% \cs{endexercise}.
%\changes{v6.07}{2007/05/05}
%{
%   Created the \texttt{exercise*} environment, this is equivalent to the \texttt{*} option of the
%   \texttt{exercise} environment. You can use either version, but now, \texttt{exercise*} is preferred.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eq@exerstarEnv\relax
\newenvironment{exercise*}{\def\eq@exerstarEnv{*}\exercise}
{\endexercise}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
%    \begin{environment}{parts}
%    Initially, we see if there is an optional argument, if yes, the
%    tabular environment is used, the argument is the number of columns
%    requested.  Otherwise, we use a list environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\exerwparts@cols{0}
\def\exercise@parts{\@@par\ifdim\parskip>\z@\vskip-\parskip\fi
  \def\exerwparts@cols{0}\@ifnextchar[%
  {\let\endparts\endexercise@parts@tabular\exercise@parts@tabular@}%
  {\let\endparts\endexercise@parts@list\exercise@parts@list}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsubsection{List-type Parts Question}
%    This is a redesigned \texttt{list} environment.  Meant to be used with the
%    \texttt{exercise} environment with the *-option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@extralabelsep{0pt}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\setPartsWidth}
% Convenience macro to set \cs{part@indent}.
%\changes{v6.4h}{2011/07/28}{%
%   Added \cs{setPartsWidth} to set \cs{part@indent}. Also
%   defined \cs{eqe@prtsepPrb}.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setPartsWidth}[1]{\def\parts@indent{\normalfont#1}}
\setPartsWidth{(d)}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \DescribeMacro{\eqe@prtsepPrb} is used to set \cs{labelsep}.
% I've also added the two hooks \DescribeMacro{\prior@parts@hook}\cs{prior@parts@hook} and
% \DescribeMacro{\post@parts@hook}\cs{post@parts@hook} as well; these are used
% by \textsf{eqexam} for hanging the solutions with parts correctly.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eqe@prtsepPrb{\ }
\providecommand{\prbPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@prtsepPrb{#1}}
\providecommand{\exPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@prtsepPrb{#1}}
\let\prior@parts@hook\@empty
\let\post@parts@hook\@empty
\let\abovepartshook\@empty
\let\belowpartshook\@empty
\let\eqp@rtc@lcm@rk\relax
\let\eq@insertContAnnot\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2012/02/04) Common code to the definition of \cs{item}
% both list and tabular versions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@item@common{\eq@insertContAnnot\eqp@rtc@lcm@rk
    \def\currhideopt{x}\eq@hidesolutionfalse\eq@nolinkfalse
    \@ifnextchar[{\@ckhide}{\eq@item}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\eqpartsitemsep}(2012/02/03) Fine tune the control over space between
% parts.
%\changes{v6.4o}{2012/02/04} {Fine tune the control over space between parts.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\partsitemsep}[1]{\def\eqparts@itemsep{#1}}
\let\eqpartsitemsep\partsitemsep
\partsitemsep{0pt}
% 2012/11/27
\def\eqpartstabrowsep#1{\def\eqparts@tabrowsep{#1}}
\eqpartstabrowsep{0pt}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The next two commands are in support of the \cs{leadinitem} definition
% of \textsf{eqexam}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\leadinitem@external}{\PackageError{exerquiz/eqexam}
    {The \string\leadinitem\space command is designed to be\MessageBreak
     the first item in the problem*\MessageBreak
     environment above the parts environment}
     {Use \string\leadinitem\space in the problem* environment.}%
}
\let\leadinitem\leadinitem@external
\newcommand{\eq@leadinitemparts}{\item\relax
    \PackageError{exerquiz/eqexam}{The \string\leadinitem\space
        command is not allowed in the\MessageBreak
        parts environment}
     {Use \string\leadinitem\space in the problem* environment.}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Begin the list version of the parts environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{exercise@parts@list}
{\settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\parts@indent}%
\eq@initializeContAnnot\eq@nolinkfalse\prior@parts@hook\abovepartshook
\list{\normalfont
    \if\Hidesymbol h\eq@nolinkfalse\ifeq@solutionsafter
        \eq@nolinktrue\fi\fi
    \if\currhideopt H%
    \else
        \ifeq@solutionsafter
            \eq@nolinktrue  % no link to solution
        \else
            \ifeq@nosolutions
                \eq@nolinktrue  % no link to solution
            \else
                \eq@ckglobalhide
                \ifeq@hidesolution\eq@nolinktrue\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write the solution header to .sol for list type question.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                    \global\let\eqExerSolnHeader\eq@@writeexheaderlist
                \fi
            \fi
        \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2013/04/28) Inserted \texttt{[r]}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \makebox[\eq@tmplength][r]{\eqexlisttabheader}%
}{%
    \usecounter{partno}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2012/11/30) If \cs{solutionparshape} is nonempty, the user has used
% \cs{leadinitem}, so we increment \texttt{partno}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty\else
        \setcounter{partno}{1}\fi
    \let\leadinitem\eq@leadinitemparts
    \global\let\solutionparshape\@empty %%dps
%    \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
    \setlength{\topsep}{3pt}%
    \ifdim\parskip>\z@
        \addtolength{\topsep}{-\parskip}\fi
    \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}%
    \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}\setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
    \setlength{\listparindent}{\parindent}%
    \setlength{\itemsep}{\eqparts@itemsep}%
    \settowidth{\labelsep}{\normalfont\eqe@prtsepPrb}%
    \addtolength{\labelsep}{\eq@extralabelsep}%
    \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\parts@indent}%
    \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
    \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% When a \texttt{trivlist} appear with the parts environment, it executes
% \cs{item}\cs{relax}, which causes problems because \cs{item} has been
% redefined. We try to correct this.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\eq@item@latex\item
    \def\eq@item{\eq@item@latex\exlisttabheaderafterhook}%
    \def\eqthisenv{parts}%
    \def\item{\ifx\@currenvir\eqthisenv
        \def\eq@next{\eq@item@common}\else
        \def\eq@next{\eq@item}\fi
    \eq@next}%
}}{\endlist\global\let\leadinitem\leadinitem@external
    \post@parts@hook\belowpartshook}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following command is inserted at the beginning of the parts environment
% and defines the current problem number and the page the \texttt{problem*} environment
% starts. The command is used by the \textsf{eqexam} package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@initializeContAnnot{\@ifundefined{eqequestions}
    {\global\let\eqeCurrProb\relax}
    {\xdef\eqeCurrProb{\theeqquestionnoi}}%
    \xdef\eq@currProbStartPage{\arabic{page}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsubsection{Tabular-type Parts Question}
% Now for the tabular style of multi-part exercise, the argument
% \#1 is the number of columns requested.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\exercise@parts@tabular@[#1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{inittabMark} initializes the auto-tab feature. (2013/03/26)
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \inittabMark
%    \end{macrocode}
% locally, turn off continued annotations. Not allowed in tabular parts.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\eq@insertContAnnot\relax
  \def\exerwparts@cols{#1}%
  \@tempcnta\exerwparts@cols\relax
  \ifnum\@tempcnta<2
        \PackageError{exerquiz}{%
        The number of columns for parts\MessageBreak
        needs to be an integer greater than 1}
        {Enter an integer, 2 or larger}\fi
  \exercise@parts@tabular}
%    \end{macrocode}
% For the tabular environment for the \texttt{exercise*} environment, we try
% to automatically insert the column delimiter (\texttt{\&}) and the end of line.
% \cs{eq@extabColCnt} keeps track of the column number for the auto-tab feature.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\eq@extabColCnt
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\autotabOn} turns on the auto-tab feature for the \texttt{parts} environment,
% while \cs{autotabOff}\DescribeMacro{\autotabOff} turns it off. The off setting is the default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\autotabOn{\let\eq@tabMarkChk\relax%
    \PackageInfo{exerquiz/eqexam}{Executing \string\autotabOn}}
\def\autotabOff{\let\eq@tabMarkChk\@gobble
    \PackageInfo{exerquiz/eqexam}{Executing \string\autotabOff}}
\autotabOff
\def\inittabMark{\global\eq@extabColCnt=0 }
\def\resettabMark{\global\eq@extabColCnt=1 }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\autotabnewline} is the new line command for the auto-tab feature.
% It does a |\\| and resets the column counter \cs{eq@extabColCnt}. The user can use
% \texttt{[vspace]}, the default is \cs{@rowsep}. We use \cs{noalign} so that the space
% is added to the bottom of the whole row.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\autotabnewline[1][\@rowskip]{%
    \ifx\eq@tabMarkChk\@gobble
        \def\eq@atnext{\expandafter\\\expandafter[#1]}\else
        \def\eq@atnext{\resettabMark\\\noalign{\expandafter\kern#1}}\fi
    \eq@atnext}
\def\eq@tabMark{%
    \ifnum\eq@extabColCnt=0
        \global\advance\eq@extabColCnt1
        \let\eq@next\relax
    \else
        \ifnum\eq@extabColCnt=1
            \let\eq@next\relax
        \else
            \ifnum\eq@extabColCnt>\exerwparts@cols
                \let\eq@next\autotabnewline
            \else\def\eq@next{&}\fi
        \fi
    \fi
    \eq@next
    \global\advance\eq@extabColCnt1
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Set up the tabular environment, after making a lot of decisions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\partstabcolsep{1.5pt}
\newenvironment{exercise@parts@tabular}
{%
    \ifx\eq@tabMarkChk\@gobble
        \eqpartstabrowsep{\@rowskip}\fi % detecting autotab off or on
    \setcounter{partno}{0}%
    \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\parts@indent\eqe@prtsepPrb}%
    \sbox{\eq@tmpbox}{\parts@indent}%
    \let\eq@item@latex\item
    \let\eq@item\item@part@tabular
    \def\eqthisenv{parts}%
    \def\item{\ifx\@currenvir\eqthisenv
        \def\eq@next{\eq@tabMarkChk\eq@tabMark\eq@item@common}\else
        \def\eq@next{\eq@item@latex}\fi
    \eq@next}\eq@nolinkfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{2012/11/27}{v6.4x}{Added control over row spacing in parts environment}
% Added control over row spacing in parts environment. The spacing
% is controlled by \cs{eqpartstabrowsep}, default value of \texttt{0pt}. The macro
% \cs{@xtabularcr} is from the {\LaTeX} core. Definition \cs{eq@xtabularcr} is found
% after the current definition block.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@ifundefined{@xtabularcr}{\let\@xarraycr\eq@xtabularcr}
    {\let\@xtabularcr\eq@xtabularcr}
%    \end{macrocode}
% We reduce the width of the \cs{parbox}es (p|{width}|) by \cs{exertabsep} to leave
% room for \cs{tabcolsep=}\cs{exertabsep} between columns.
%\begin{verbatim}
%   n=\exerwparts@cols
%   width=(\linewidth-2*(n-1)*\tabcolsep)/n
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \eq@tmpdima=\linewidth %\divide\eq@tmpdima by\exerwparts@cols
    \@tempcnta\exerwparts@cols\relax
    \advance\@tempcnta-1\relax
    \multiply\@tempcnta by2
    \@tempdima\partstabcolsep\relax
    \multiply\@tempdima\@tempcnta
    \advance\eq@tmpdima-\@tempdima
    \divide\eq@tmpdima by\exerwparts@cols
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \vskip\partopsep\noindent\normalbaselines
    \tabcolsep\partstabcolsep\relax
    \abovepartshook
    \tabular{@{}*{\exerwparts@cols}{p{\eq@tmpdima}}@{}}%
}{\endtabular\belowpartshook}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Redefine \verb+\item+, could be risky
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\item@part@tabular{\leavevmode\refstepcounter{partno}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% As of 2013/03/25, I am allowing solutions after for tabular parts. I'm commenting
% out the following line.\\
% |%\eq@solutionsafterfalse % no solutionsafter are allowed|
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \global\let\eqExerSolnHeader\@empty
  \ifeq@solutionsafter
    \eq@nolinktrue  % no link to solution
  \else\ifeq@nosolutions
    \eq@nolinktrue  % no link to solution
  \else
      \eq@ckglobalhide
      \ifeq@hidesolution\eq@nolinktrue\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write the solution header to \texttt{.sol} for tabular type question.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \gdef\eqExerSolnHeader{%
        \set@display@protect
        \immediate\write\verbatim@out{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.7}{2013/04/07}{Inserted another argument into \cs{eqEXt}}
% Added another argument into \cs{eqEXt}, used for filtering.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \protect\eqEXt{\eqExtArg}{\eqFilterArg}\protect
            \exerSolnHeader{\exsecrunhead}%
            {ex.\the@exno\alph{partno}}{\exsllabelformatwp}\relax}%
        \set@typeset@protect
      }%
  \fi\fi\fi
  \PBS\raggedright
  \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\parts@indent\eqe@prtsepPrb}%
  \sbox{\eq@tmpbox}{\parts@indent}%
  \eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox
  \addtolength\eq@tmplength{\eq@extralabelsep}%
  \xdef\partshangamount{\the\eq@tmplength}%
%  \parskip\medskipamount
  \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2013/04/28) Inserted \texttt{[r]}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \makebox[\eq@tmpdima][r]{\eqexlisttabheader}\eqe@prtsepPrb
    \exlisttabheaderafterhook\ignorespaces
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ckhide[#1]{\edef\eq@arg{#1}%
    \def\currhideopt{x}%
    \ifx\eq@arg\@empty\else
    \if\eq@arg H%
        \eq@hidesolutiontrue\eq@nolinktrue%
        \edef\currhideopt{\Hidesymbol}%
    \else
        \ifeq@globalshowsolutions\else
            \if\eq@arg h%
                \eq@hidesolutiontrue\eq@nolinktrue%
                \def\currhideopt{h}%
            \fi
        \fi
    \fi\fi
    \eq@item
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% In the above tabular parts environment, \cs{@xtabularcr} is \cs{let} to
% equal to \cs{eq@xtabularcr}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eqSetTabControl{\@ifundefined{@xtabularcr}
    {\let\save@@xtabularcr\@xarraycr}
    {\let\save@@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr}}
\AtBeginDocument{\eqSetTabControl}
\def\eq@xtabularcr{\@ifnextchar[{\save@@xtabularcr}
    {\eqe@tab@parts@rowsep}}%
\def\eqe@tab@parts@rowsep{\save@@xtabularcr[\eqparts@tabrowsep]}%
\def\eqe@tab@parts@rowsep{\save@@xtabularcr
    \noalign{\expandafter\kern\eqparts@tabrowsep}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% End of the \texttt{parts} environment.
%    \end{environment}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Enumerating exercises}
% Here we provide the \texttt{exEnumerate} environment for enumerating exercises.
% We provide several key-values for adjusting the spacing of the environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{exEnum}{labelwidthTo}[\normalsize\normalfont\bfseries00.\ ]%
    {\def\exE@labelwidthTo{#1}}
\define@key{exEnum}{labelwidth}[\@empty]{\def\exE@labelwidth{#1}}
\let\exE@labelwidth\@empty
\define@key{exEnum}{topsep}[3pt]{\def\exE@topsep{#1}}
\define@key{exEnum}{parsep}[3pt]{\def\exE@parsep{#1}}
\define@key{exEnum}{itemsep}[0pt]{\def\exE@itemsep{#1}}
\define@key{exEnum}{labelsep}[\normalsize\normalfont\ ]%
    {\settowidth{\@tempdima}{#1}\edef\exE@labelsep{\the\@tempdima}}
\setkeys{exEnum}{labelwidthTo,topsep,parsep,itemsep,labelsep}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{environment}{exEnumerate}
% The environment for enumerating exercises. The companion definitions for
% these exercises follow. The argument is expanded first before being passed
% to \cs{setkeys}; therefore you can pass a command of key-value options through
% the optional argument:
% |\def\myOpts{topsep=0pt}|, |\begin{exEnumerate}[\myOpts]|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{exEnumerate}[1][]{%
    \toks@=\expandafter{#1}%
    \edef\tempexp{\noexpand\setkeys{exEnum}{\the\toks@}}\tempexp
    \let\afterlabelhskip\@empty
    \let\solnhspace\@empty
    \aboveexskip{0pt}\belowexskip{\exE@parsep}%\belowexskip{0pt}%
    \def\eqexheader@wrapper{\makebox[0pt][r]{%
        \hypertarget{qex.\the@exno}{\eqexheader}\hspace{\labelsep}}}%
%        \hypertarget{qex.\the@exno}{\eqexheader}\ }}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The definition of \cmd{\setEnum} supports the \texttt{contsolns} option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\setENum{\Elabel\if\exerstar*\thequestionno(\alph{partno})\else
        \thequestionno\fi}%
    \writeToExSolns{\protect\begin{exEnumerate}}
    \list{}{%
        \ifx\exE@labelwidth\@empty
        \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\exE@labelwidthTo}\else
        \setlength{\labelwidth}{\exE@labelwidth}\fi
        \setlength{\topsep}{\exE@topsep}%
        \ifdim\parskip>\z@\addtolength{\topsep}{-\parskip}\fi
        \setlength{\parsep}{\exE@parsep}%
        \setlength{\itemsep}{\exE@itemsep}%
        \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
        \setlength{\listparindent}{0pt}%
        \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
%        \setlength{\labelsep}{0pt}%
        \settowidth{\labelsep}{\normalfont\ }%
        \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
    }\item\relax}{\writeToExSolns{\protect\end{exEnumerate}}%
\endlist}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
%    \begin{environment}{enumex}
%    \begin{environment}{enumex*}
% Prototype environments for enumerating exercises. These can be redefined as desired.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{enumex}{%
    \renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\thequestionno.}}%
    \renewcommand\exsllabelformat
        {\protect\makebox[0pt][r]{\protect\textbf{\thequestionno.\ }}}%
\begin{exercise}[questionno]}{\end{exercise}}
\newenvironment{enumex*}{\everypar{}%
    \renewcommand\exlabelformatwp{\textbf{\thequestionno.}}%
    \renewcommand\exsllabelformatwp
        {\protect\makebox[0pt][r]{\protect\textbf{\thequestionno.}\ }%
            \protect\textbf{(\thepartno)}\ }%
\begin{exercise*}[questionno]}{\end{exercise*}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
%    \end{environment}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Including the \texttt{exercise} Solutions}
% Include solutions to the exercises back into the file.  This
% section also handles solutions to quizzes as well. This macro
% was taken from the \TeX book.
%    \begin{macro}{\includeexersolutions}
% This macro inserts the solutions to the exercises, if there are
% any solutions.  If a user uses this macro to insert the solutions
% elsewhere, \cmd{\include@solutions} is called, then put is to
% \cmd{\relax}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\def\includeexersolutions{%
\def\includeexersolutions{\@ifstar
    {\let\resetEXsolns\relax\includeexersolutionsi}
    {\def\resetEXsolns{\global\let\include@solutions\relax}%
     \includeexersolutionsi}%
}
\newcommand{\includeexersolutionsi}[1][]{%
    \filterFor{#1}\includeexersolutionsii
}
\def\includeexersolutionsii{%
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
   \if\exerSolns@ExtFile\eq@NO
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cmd{\include@solutions} is the internal command that insert solutions.  This command
% appears at the end of document, where it will insert the
% solutions, unless it has been redefined to \cmd{\relax} by
% \cmd{\includesolutions}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \include@solutions
        \resetEXsolns
        \let\eqFilterArg\@empty
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
   \fi
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Filtering solutions to exercises}
%
% The \cs{eqEXt} command has two arguments designed to be used to filter
% solutions to exercises. The demo document is \texttt{filter\_exercises.tex},
% but basically, we can include the solutions several times, once for each set filtered set.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\gobbleToEndEXt#1\endeqEXt{%
    \ifeqforpaper\expandafter\@gobbletwo\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro\filterFor is used to mark a exercise with a name
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\filterFor[1]{\def\eqFilterArg{#1}}
\newcommand\inclEXtFilter[2]{\def\eqargii{#2}\ifx\eqargii\eqFilterArg
    \else\expandafter\gobbleToEndEXt\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \DescribeMacro\useEXtFilter is used to \cs{let} \cs{eqEXt} to \cs{EXtFilter}, which does the
% filtering based on the value of \cs{eqFilterArg}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\useEXtFilter{\let\eqEXt\inclEXtFilter}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The basic methodology is as follows: We use \cs{filterFor} to mark an exercise, or block
% of exercises by a name, for example, \verb!\filterFor{Problems}!. Now, at the end of the document, we can
% say
%\begin{verbatim}
%\useEXtFilter
%\renewcommand\exsectitle{Solutions to Exercises}
%\includeexersolutions*[Exercises]
%\renewcommand\exsectitle{Solutions to Examples}
%\includeexersolutions*[Examples]
%\renewcommand\exsectitle{Solutions to Problems}
%\includeexersolutions[Problems]
%\end{verbatim}
% \DescribeMacro{\eqsolutionshook}\DescribeMacro{\priorexsectitle}
% \DescribeMacro{\priorexslinput} These are commands that can be
% redefined by the user, their location can be found below.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eqsolutionshook\@empty
\let\priorexsectitle\@empty
\let\priorexslinput\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%\DescribeMacro{\exerSolnsHeadnToc} sets the section title for the solutions
% to the exercises. May be redefined, I suppose.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\exerSolnsHeadnToc{\section*{\exsectitle}%
    \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{%
    \@ifundefined{web@latextoc}{}{%
    \ifx\web@latextoc y\else
    \protect\numberline{}\fi}\exsectitle}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.4q}{2012/03/23}{define \cs{eq@defaultlheader}}
% Determine whether \textsf{web} package is loaded, and define \cs{eq@normallheader}
% and \cs{eq@defaultlheader}. These are designed to fix a problem of disappearing
% headers in the solutions section of the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifpackageloaded{web}{\def\eq@normallheader{\lheader{\rightmark}}}
    {\let\eq@normallheader\relax}
\@ifpackageloaded{web}{\def\eq@defaultlheader{\lheader{\aeb@setmarks}}}
    {\let\eq@defaultlheader\relax}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\exerSolnInput} is the macro that formats the opening page
% of the solutions page and inputs \cmd{\jobname.sol}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\exerSolnInput}
{%
    \let\webnewpage\relax
    \ifsolutionsonly\else\immediate\closeout\ex@solns\fi
    \ifeq@nosolutions\else
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.3w}{2011/03/15}{%
%   Moved \cs{eqsolutionshook} from below to a higher position
%   in the macro \cs{exerSolnInput} so the running header for
%   the solution page appears on the first page of the solutions.
%}%
% Moved the following line to two location below.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%       \eqsolutionshook % moved 2012/02/24
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v6.4p}{2012/02/24}{Moved location of \cs{eqsolutionshook} again}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \iftherearesolutions
            \ifsolutionsonly\eqsolutionshook
        \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% If there are solutions and this is not the \texttt{solutionsonly} option,
% we start a new page, clear the right mark and start a normal header.
% \changes{v6.4q}{2012/03/23}{Inserted \cs{eq@normalheader} after \cs{newpage}
% to get running headers to appear on each page of solutions}%
% Inserted |\markright{}| and \cs{eq@normalheader} to fix a problem with
% disappearing running headers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \newpage\eqsolutionshook\markright{}\eq@normallheader
        \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% We are still under the assumption that there are solutions to be input.
% We set the mark of \cs{exsectitle}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \markright{\exsectitle}%
            \ifx\webnewpage\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{webnewpage} is a mechanism to initially do nothing, then
% to be redefined to \cs{newpage}. It is used in \cs{exerSolnHeader}.
% The reasons for this definition are lost in time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                \def\webnewpage{\let\webnewpage\newpage}%
            \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% We have a prior command, followed by the section title
% \cs{exerSolnsHeadnToc}, followed by a post command. The prior and
% post commands may be defined as the document author wishes.
% Both of these are used in the \textsf{APB} pacakge.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \priorexsectitle\exerSolnsHeadnToc\priorexslinput
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, we input the solutions file, \cs{jobname.sol}, if one exists.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.sol}{}{\PackageWarning{exerquiz}
            {!!! Solutions to exercises not found}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Convert back to \cs{eq@defaultlheader} cleanly by first executing \cs{newpage}
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \newpage\eq@defaultlheader
        \fi
    \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{include@solutions} is a wrapper command for \cs{exerSolnInput}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\include@solutions{%
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \if\exerSolns@ExtFile\eq@NO
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
        \exerSolnInput
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \fi
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Bookmarking Exercises}
%
% Someone asked how to bookmark the exercises, it was an interesting
% little exercise for a Saturday morning. So, here it is.
% \par\medskip\noindent
% \cs{eqexpdfentry} marks first entry into an exercise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eqexpdfentry=0
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{eq@postexerciseHook}: Restores the \cs{Hy@currentbookmarklevel} bookmark level to what it was when
% we first entered the exercise. This is executed at the end of the exercise
% environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eq@postexerciseHook\relax
\def\eq@postexerciseHook@BM{%
    \xdef\Hy@currentbookmarklevel{\eq@currentbookmarklevel}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\exbookmarkfmt}
%    \begin{macro}{\partbookmarkfmt}
%    \begin{macro}{\expdfbookmark}
% ``Intelligent'' bookmarking for \textsf{Exerquiz} exercises. Detects the correct bookmark level
% determines if this is a part of an exercise, or the entry into an exercise and
% automatically sets a unique destination.
%
% \cs{expdfbookmark} is the main interface to bookmarking an exercise. The single argument
% is the text that is to appear in the bookmark panel. \cs{exbookmarkfmt} and
% \cs{partbookmarkfmt} formats the exercise number and part letter. These can be redefined.
%
%\changes{v6.2a}{2007/11/10 }
%{
%   Added \cs{expdfbookmark} to bookmark exercises.
%}
% We have to increase the \texttt{tocdepth} so hyperref will create the bookmark at the
% subsection level.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{5}
\newcommand{\exbookmarkfmt}{\exlabel\space\theeqexno.\space}
\newcommand{\partbookmarkfmt}{(\alph{partno})\space}
\newcommand{\expdfbookmark}[1]{\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% The default definition of \cs{eq@postexerciseHook} is \cs{relax}. We'll
% check if someone is using \cs{eq@postexerciseHook}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\eq@postexerciseHook\relax
        \let\eq@postexerciseHook\eq@postexerciseHook@BM
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Yes, \cs{eq@postexerciseHook} is in use, we'll add our stuff onto the end of it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \let\eq@postexerciseHook@save\eq@postexerciseHook
        \def\eq@postexerciseHook@BM@plus{\eq@postexerciseHook@save
            \eq@postexerciseHook@BM}%
        \let\eq@postexerciseHook\eq@postexerciseHook@BM@plus
    \fi
    \if\exerstar*%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If entering an exercise with parts for the first time, we also capture current bookmark level,
% and mark, using \cs{eqexpdfentry} that we have entered an exercises with parts.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifx\eqexpdfentry0\let\eqexpdfentry=1
            \xdef\eq@currentbookmarklevel{\Hy@currentbookmarklevel}%
            \def\eqex@next{\subpdfbookmark{\exbookmarkfmt#1}%
                {qex.\the@exno}}%
        \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Already in an exercise with parts, need to reduce bookmark level again
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \def\eqex@next{\belowpdfbookmark{\partbookmarkfmt#1}%
                {qex.\the@exno.\alph{partno}}}%
        \fi
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% A regular exercise, no parts, we also capture current bookmark level
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \xdef\eq@currentbookmarklevel{\Hy@currentbookmarklevel}%
        \def\eqex@next{\subpdfbookmark{\exbookmarkfmt#1}%
            {qex.\the@exno}}%
    \fi
    \eqex@next\ignorespaces
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%
%    \section{Early end of input}
%
% There is no support for the Acrobat Forms features with the
% \texttt{dviwindo} option by \textsf{hyperref}; therefore there is
% none here as well.  \textsf{dviwindo} can use the
% \texttt{exercise} environment, but not the quizzes, so end here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifeq@noforms\endinput\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \section{Common code for quizzes.}
% Here, we include a few commands common to both
% quiz environments.
%
% Colors used by \textsf{exerquiz}: \texttt{webgreen} normally defined in \textsf{web}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\definecolor{webgreen}{rgb}{0,.6,0}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\proofingsymbol}
%    \begin{macro}{\proofingsymbolColor}
% Proofing symbol and accompanying color (little green bullet)
% \changes{v6.05b}{2006/05/12}
% {
% added a command to change the color of the proofing symbol
% changed the definition of \cs{proofingsymbol} to a text fillin. This creates the command
% \cs{@proofingsymbol}. Can now control the symbol and the color (through \cs{proofingsymbolColor}
% }
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\proofingsymbolColor}[1]{\def\@proofingsymbolColor{#1}}
\proofingsymbolColor{red}
%\newcommand{\proofingsymbol}[1]{%
%    \def\@proofingsymbol{\textcolor{\@proofingsymbolColor}{#1}}}
%\proofingsymbol{$\bullet$}
%\proofingsymbol{\ding{52}}
\let\@proofsymbolredefined=0
\newcommand{\proofingsymbol}[1]{\let\@proofsymbolredefined=1%
    \def\@proofingsymbol{\textcolor{\@proofingsymbolColor}{#1}}}
\def\@proofingsymbol{\textcolor{\@proofingsymbolColor}{\ding{52}}}
\def\setproofingsymbol{%
    \if\@proofsymbolredefined1\else
    \@ifpackageloaded{pifont}{\proofingsymbol{\ding{52}}}
    {\proofingsymbol{$\bullet$}}\fi
}
\AtBeginDocument{\setproofingsymbol}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{The \texttt{questions} Environment}
% The \texttt{questions} environment is used inside the
% \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{quiz} environments, though it can
% also be used a stand alone list. Beginning with version 5.5, the \texttt{questions}
% environment can be nested three deep.
%    \begin{macro}{questions}
%    This is a redesigned \texttt{list} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\prior@questionsHook}{}
\let\qMark@Hook\@empty
\let\aebtitleQuiz\@empty
\newcommand{\post@questionsHook}{}
\newcommand{\quesNumColor}[1]{\def\eq@quesNumCol{#1}}
\quesNumColor{blue}
\renewcommand{\theeqquestionnoi}{\arabic{eqquestionnoi}}
\newcommand{\labeleqquestionnoi}{%
    \color{\eq@quesNumCol}\bfseries\theeqquestionnoi.}
\renewcommand\theeqquestionnoii{(\alph{eqquestionnoii})}
\newcommand{\labeleqquestionnoii}{%
    \color{\eq@quesNumCol}\bfseries\theeqquestionnoii}
\renewcommand\theeqquestionnoiii{(\roman{eqquestionnoiii})}
\newcommand{\labeleqquestionnoiii}{%
    \color{\eq@quesNumCol}\bfseries\theeqquestionnoiii}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    (2013/07/10) Properties of the questions environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{props@ques}{labelwidthTo}%
    [\normalsize\normalfont\bfseries00.]%
    {\def\propQ@labelwidthTo{#1}}
\define@key{props@ques}{labelwidth}[\@empty]{\def\propQ@labelwidth{#1}}
\let\propQ@labelwidth\@empty
\define@key{props@ques}{topsep}[\the\topsep]{\edef\propQ@topsep{#1}}
\define@key{props@ques}{partopsep}[\the\partopsep]%
    {\edef\propQ@partopsep{#1}}
\define@key{props@ques}{parsep}[\the\parsep]{\edef\propQ@parsep{#1}}
\define@key{props@ques}{itemsep}[\the\itemsep]{\edef\propQ@itemsep{#1}}
\define@key{props@ques}{labelsepTo}[\normalsize\normalfont\ ]%
    {\def\propQ@labelsepTo{#1}}
\define@key{props@ques}{labelsep}[\@empty]{\def\propQ@labelsep{#1}}
\let\propQ@labelsep\@empty
\define@key{props@ques}{color}[blue]{\quesNumColor{#1}}
\setkeys{props@ques}{labelwidthTo,topsep,partopsep,parsep,%
    itemsep,labelsepTo,color}%
\newenvironment{questions}[1][]
{%
    \ifnum\@eqquestiondepth>\tw@\@toodeep\else
    \advance\@eqquestiondepth\@ne\fi
    \def\@quesctr{eqquestionno\romannumeral\the\@eqquestiondepth}%
    \toks@=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{#1}\expandafter
    \xdef\csname quesOpts\@quesctr\endcsname{\the\toks@}%
    \edef\tempexp{\noexpand\setkeys{props@ques}{\the\toks@}}\tempexp
    \list{\qMark@Hook\prior@questionsHook\gdef\eqPTs{1}%
    \global\let\eqQT\eq@na%
%    \end{macrocode}
% (06/06/10) We create a macro \cs{@currentQues} that holds the current
% problem number 2(a)(i), for example.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    {\@tempcnta=0 \let\@thispr@b\@empty
     \@whilenum\@tempcnta<\@eqquestiondepth\do{\advance\@tempcnta\@ne
     \ifx\@thispr@b\@empty\edef\@thispr@b{%
     \csname theeqquestionno\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname}\else
     \edef\@thispr@b{\@thispr@b%
     (\csname theeqquestionno\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname)}\fi
    }\xdef\@currentQues{\@thispr@b}}%
    \makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont\@nameuse{label\@quesctr}}%
    \xdef\eq@pageThisQ{\the\c@page}%
    \post@questionsHook}{\usecounter{\@quesctr}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We set the list parameter for the \texttt{questions} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\propQ@labelsep\@empty
        \settowidth{\labelsep}{\propQ@labelsepTo}\else
        \setlength{\labelsep}{\propQ@labelsep}\fi
    \ifx\propQ@labelwidth\@empty
        \settowidth{\labelwidth}%
            {\propQ@labelwidthTo\hspace{\labelsep}}\else
        \setlength{\labelwidth}{\propQ@labelwidth\hspace{\labelsep}}\fi
    \setlength{\topsep}{\propQ@topsep}%
    \setlength{\partopsep}{\propQ@partopsep}%
    \ifdim\parskip>\z@\addtolength{\topsep}{-\parskip}\fi
    \setlength{\parsep}{\propQ@parsep}%
    \setlength{\itemsep}{\propQ@itemsep}%
    \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
    \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
    }%
%    \setlength{\labelsep}{\propQ@labelsep}}%
}{\endlist}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\pushquestions}
%    \begin{macro}{\popquestions}
% Between \cs{item}s within a question environment, you can execute
% \cs{pushquestions}, this save the question counter, you are then free
% to make comments between problem, when finished, executed a \cs{popquestions}
% to return to questioning where you left off.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pushquestions{\expandafter\xdef\csname save\@quesctr\endcsname
    {\expandafter\the\csname c@\@quesctr\endcsname}\end{questions}}
\def\popquestions{%
    \begin{questions}[\csname quesOpts\@quesctr\endcsname]%
    \setcounter{\@quesctr}{\csname save\@quesctr\endcsname}%
    \@ifnextchar\popquestions{\item[]}{\@ifnextchar\begin{\item[]}{}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%
%    \section{The \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{shortquiz*} Environments}
%
% This \texttt{shortquiz} environment sets up multiple choice
% questions, with immediate feedback whether the user clicked on the
% right or wrong answer.  Solutions to the \texttt{shortquiz} may,
% or may not be included.
%    \begin{environment}{shortquiz}
% The \texttt{shortquiz} environment, really just a shell to define the
% \cmd{\Ans} macro and the \texttt{solution} environment that go with
% the \texttt{shortquiz}
%\par\medskip\noindent
% After all the parsing is done, the parameters for this environment are
%\begin{verbatim}
% \begin{shortquiz}*[<basename>]
%\end{verbatim}
%The `\texttt{*}' is optional and signals that forms should be used instead
%of links. This option is regressed. The user should use the \texttt{shortquiz*}
% environment. The \verb![<basename>]! is the basename of any form fields
% generated. If not present, an base fieldname is generated based on the
% \cs{@shortquizCnt} macro (not a counter). The actual name is given in \cs{@sqGenBaseName}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\priorsqhook}[1]{\def\sq@priorhook{#1}}
\priorsqhook{}
\newcommand{\abovesqskip}[1]{\def\sq@aboveskip{#1}}
\abovesqskip{\par\medskip}
%\priorsqhook{\medskip\noindent}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.4a}{2011/05/11}{%
% Added \cs{sq@afterhook} for use by \textsf{eqexam}, but may be useful elsewhere.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\endsqhook#1{\def\sq@afterhook{#1}}
\endsqhook{}
%\def\sq@afterhook{}
\def\@shortquizCnt{0}
\def\@sqGenBaseName{eqSqBn\@shortquizCnt}
\let\sqhspace\space
\newenvironment{shortquiz}
{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% (06/08/10) The next two lines initialize the macros for registering the
% question label, i.e., \texttt{2(a)(ii)}. These two lines are repeated for
% the \texttt{oQuestion} and \texttt{quiz} environments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    \let\@eqListExp\relax
    \xdef\eq@pageThisQ{\the\c@page}%
    \let\@currentQues\@empty
    {\count0=\@shortquizCnt \advance\count0by1\relax
        \xdef\@shortquizCnt{\the\count0}}%
    \goodbreak\@ifstar{\sqForms\@shortquiz}%
        {\sqLinks\@shortquiz}%
}{\aeb@endshortquiz}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
%    \begin{environment}{shortquiz*}
% The \texttt{shortquiz*} is a short quiz that uses forms.
%\par\medskip\noindent
% The parameter for this environment is
%\begin{verbatim}
% \begin{shortquiz}[<basename>]
%\end{verbatim}
% The \verb![<basename>]! is the basename of any form fields
% generated. If not present, an base fieldname is generated based on the
% \cs{@shortquizCnt} macro (not a counter). The actual name is given in \cs{@sqGenBaseName}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{shortquiz*}
{%
    \xdef\eq@pageThisQ{\the\c@page}%
    {\count0=\@shortquizCnt\advance\count0by1\relax
        \xdef\@shortquizCnt{\the\count0 }}%
    \sqForms\@shortquiz
}{\aeb@endshortquiz}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determines if the next argument is optional, if yes, we pass to
% \cs{@@shortquiz}, else, we supply a automated form name, then
% continue to \cs{@@shortquiz}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@shortquiz{\@ifnextchar[%
    {\@@shortquiz}{\@@shortquiz[\@sqGenBaseName]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
% \cs{@@shortquiz} continues the parsing of \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{shortquiz*}.
% Here we take in the basename for any fields generated. The basename is passed
% as a delimited parameter \texttt{\#1}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sq@setCLN#1{\ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty
    \protected@edef\@currentlabelname{#1}\else
    \protected@edef\@currentlabelname{\@currentlabelname}\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2013/09/29) Added \cs{isQZ} and \cs{isSQZ}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\isQZ=q \let\isSQZ=s
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
\def\sq@IDTxtField{\makebox[0pt][l]{\textField[\autoCenter{n}\BC{}\BG{}
    \S{S}\textSize{0}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}
    \AA{\AAFormat{%
        var \oField = new Object;\r
        \oField.Grp = {};
        \ifx\defaultColorJSLoc\@empty\else\r
        \oField.DefaultColorJSLoc=\defaultColorJSLoc;\fi
        \ifx\rghtColorJSLoc\@empty\else\r
        \oField.RightColorJSLoc=\rghtColorJSLoc;\fi
        \ifx\wrngColorJSLoc\@empty\else\r
        \oField.WrongColorJSLoc=\wrngColorJSLoc;\fi
        \ifx\rghtAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty\else\r
        \oField.RightAnsSymbJSLoc=\rghtAnsSymbJSLoc;\fi
        \ifx\wrngAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty\else\r
        \oField.WrongAnsSymbJSLoc=\wrngAnsSymbJSLoc;\fi
    }}]{ID\oField}{0bp}{0bp}}%
}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\def\@@shortquiz[#1]{%\begingroup
  \gdef\oField{#1}\gdef\curr@quiz{#1}\gdef\currQuiz{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We try to support {\LaTeX}'s cross-referencing system by defining
% \cs{@currentlabel}, \cs{@currentHlabel}, and \cs{@currentlabelname}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \global\let\eqQzQuesList\@empty
    \let\eq@AddProbToQzQuesList\relax
    \edef\@currentlabel{\@shortquizCnt}%
    \edef\@currentHref{shortquiz.\@shortquizCnt}%
  \global\let\eqQuizType\isSQZ\let\@qzsolndest\@empty
  \if\sqstar*\relax
    \let\@Ans\Ans@sq@f
    \ifx\oField\@empty
        \typeout{^^JExerquiz: Base field name required when using
                shortquiz with '*' option}%
        \typeout{Exerquiz: Assuming link style^^J}%
        \let\@Ans\Ans@sq@l
    \fi
  \else
     \let\@Ans\Ans@sq@l
  \fi
  \setcounter{questionno}{0}%
  \let\answers\answers@sq
  \let\endanswers\endanswers@sq
  \let\manswers\manswers@sq
  \let\endmanswers\endmanswers@sq
  \let\solution\solution@sq
  \let\endsolution\endsolution@sq
%    \end{macrocode}
% Lay down the question header. \cs{sqlabel} defaults to a red ``Quiz''.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
% The next segment is for \textsf{exerquiz} only, and not for eqexam.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
  \let\ifstaroption\eq@ifstaroption
  \if\eq@tq@star*%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The next code lines supports the \cs{titleQuiz*} option.
% If its the star option, we define \cs{sqlabel}, and finished up with
% a \cs{@gobbletwo}, this eats up the next two tokens that immediately
% follow \cs{sqlabel} in the beginning of the \texttt{shortquiz} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \def\sqlabel{\aebtitleQuiz\@gobbletwo}%
   \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% When the online (or email) options are used in eqexam, the \cs{hypertarget}
% command is adding vertical space. Normally \cs{sqlabel} is empty, so we don't
% need \cs{hypertarget} in this case here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \@ifundefined{PointsOnLeft}{\sq@aboveskip
   \sq@priorhook\sq@setCLN{\eq@defaultShortQuizLabelName}%
   \ifx\sqlabel\@empty\else\noindent\fi
   \hypertarget{\@currentHref}{}\sq@IDTxtField\ifx\sqlabel\@empty\else
        \expandafter\sqlabel\expandafter\sqhspace\fi
   {\set@typeset@protect\aebtitleQuiz}%
   \ignorespaces}{}%
%</package>
%<*eqexam>
%\noindent\sq@priorhook\sqlabel\ifx\sqLabel\@empty\else
%    \space\fi\ignorespaces
%</eqexam>
%<*package|eqexam>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\aeb@endshortquiz}
%    \begin{macro}{\aftershortquizskip}
% We reset the labels to the default in case the author
% of the document has redefined them temporarily. The author can
% avoid this reset, by redefining the global variables.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\belowsqskip[1]{\def\aftershortquizskip{#1}}
\belowsqskip{\medskip}
\def\aeb@endshortquiz{\setcounter{quizno}{0}%
    \sq@afterhook
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \global\let\aebtitleQuiz\@empty
    \global\let\aebTitleQuiz\@empty
    \global\let\eq@tq@star\relax
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
    \global\let\sqlabel\eq@sqlabel
    \global\let\sqslrtnlabel\eq@sqslrtnlabel
    \global\let\sqsllabel\eq@sqsllabel
    \par\aftershortquizskip
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\sqLinks}
%    \begin{macro}{\sqForms}
% (01/01/05) Use these two commands to locally change the style of multiple choice
% questions: link or form.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sqLinks{\def\sqstar{}}\sqLinks
\def\sqForms{\def\sqstar{*}}
\let\eq@tq@star\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \texttt{shortquiz} contains two other environments, each nested inside
% the next: The \texttt{answers} environment and the \texttt{solution}
% environment. The latter environment is optional.
%
% \smallskip\noindent\textbf{Basic Usage for the \texttt{shortquiz} environment}
%\begin{verbatim}
%No solutions included             With Solutions
%\begin{shortquiz}                 \begin{shortquiz}
%The question                      The question
%\begin{answers}                   \begin{answers}[qz:mysoln]
%\Ans1 ... &\Ans0 &... &\Ans0 ...  \Ans1 ... &\Ans0 &... &\Ans0 ...
%\end{answers}                     \begin{solution}
%\end{shortquiz}                   .....
%                                  \end{solution}
%                                  \end{answers}
%                                  \end{shortquiz}
%\end{verbatim}
% To further complicate matters, the \texttt{shortquiz} can be
% used with the \texttt{questions} environment to create a series of
% numbered short question quizzes. See the manual for examples.
% \texttt{solution} environment is defined next.
%    \begin{macro}{solution}
% The \texttt{solution} environment does double duty, it is used by both
% the \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{quiz} environments.
% The macro \cmd{\solution@sq} is the one that actually does the work
% of \cmd{\solution}: It  writes the solutions to the file
% \cmd{\jobname.qsl}.  This macro obeys the \texttt{forpaper}
% option. In this case, solutions are separated by a
% \cmd{\medskip} rather then put on a separate page.  It also
% obeys the \texttt{solutionsafter} option
% \changes{v6.4s}{2012/06/03}{Added hooks \cmd{\sqPostHeaderHook} and
% \cmd{\qPostHeaderHook}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\def\qzPriorSolutionAfterHook{\smallskip}
\let\sqPostHeaderHook\@empty
\let\qPostHeaderHook\@empty
\def\sqsolafterhspace{\space}
\def\solution@sq{\let\eq@next\relax
  \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty
    \PackageWarning{exerquiz}%
    {* Solutions unexpected here, will *\MessageBreak
     * assume solutionsafter option *}%
    \eq@solutionsaftertrue
  \fi
  \ifeq@solutionsafter
    \par\qzPriorSolutionAfterHook\noindent
    \if!\sqsolafter!\else
    \sqsolafter\sqsolafterhspace\fi\ignorespaces
  \else
    \global\therearequizsolutionstrue\let\verbatim@out=\quiz@solns
    \set@display@protect
    \immediate\write\verbatim@out{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Mark in the solutions files whether this is a quiz or a shortquiz solution.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \if\eqQuizType\isQZ
            \protect\eqQt{\eqFilterArg}\else
            \protect\eqSQt{\eqFilterArg}\fi
      \protect\quizSolnHeader\if\eqQuizType\isQZ\ifx\allow@peek\eq@NO
        [{\curr@quiz}{\currQuizStartPage}]\fi\fi
        {\@qzsolndest}{\sqsllabel}\protect\relax
        \if\eqQuizType\isQZ\expandafter\qPostHeaderHook\else
        \expandafter\sqPostHeaderHook\fi}%
    \set@typeset@protect
    \expandafter\verbatimwrite\fi
}
\let\qzSolutionsAfterHook\@empty
\def\endsolution@sq
{%
    \ifeq@solutionsafter
        \eq@fititin{\mbox{\sqslrtnlabel}}\par\qzSolutionsAfterHook
        \aftergroup\ignorespaces
    \else
        \endverbatimwrite
        \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else\set@display@protect
            \immediate\write\verbatim@out{\eqSqSolnTrailer}%
         \set@typeset@protect
        \fi
    \fi
    \global\let\@qzsolndest\@empty
}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\promoteNewPageHere}\cmd{\promoteNewPageHere} promotes
% a new page. The argument is a vertical skip. If there is \texttt{\#1}
% or more space remaining on the page, the command does nothing, otherwise
% it issues a \cs{newpage}.
% \changes{v6.4s}{2012/06/03}{Added \cs{promoteNewPageHere}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\promoteNewPageHere}[1]{\par
    \bgroup\@nobreakfalse\addpenalty{-500}%
    \setlength{\@tempdimb}{#1}%
    \@tempdima \pagegoal \advance \@tempdima -\pagetotal
    \ifdim \@tempdima<\@tempdimb\ifnum\col@number>\@ne\columnbreak
        \else\newpage\penalty1\fi\fi\egroup
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\saveDest}
%    \begin{macro}{\useDest}
% These two macros are used, as needed to save the destination name of a solution, then
% re-emitting it later, just prior to the solution. Useful for grouped questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\saveDest}[1][]{%
    \def\sd@arg{#1}\ifx\sd@arg\@empty
    \xdef\holdDest{\@qzsolndest}\else
    \xdef\@qzsolndest{#1}\xdef\holdDest{#1}\fi}
\def\useDest{\def\@qzsolndest{\holdDest}}
\let\holdDest\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\def\fpAfterSolutionsSkip{\par\medskip}
\let\eqSqSolnTrailerHook\@empty
\let\eqQzSolnTrailerHook\@empty
\newcommand\eqSqSolnTrailer{%
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ
        \eqQzSolnTrailerHook
        \protect\ReturnTo{page.\eq@pageThisQ}%
            {\protect\mbox{\sqslrtnlabel}}\string\endeqQt
    \else
        \eqSqSolnTrailerHook
        \protect\ReturnTo{page.\eq@pageThisQ}%
            {\protect\mbox{\sqslrtnlabel}}\string\endeqSQt%
    \fi
    \ifeqforpaper\protect\fpAfterSolutionsSkip\fi^^J%
}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqQt}
%    \begin{macro}{\endeqQt}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqSQt}
%    \begin{macro}{\endeqSQt}
% The \cmd{\eqQt} and \cmd{\eqSQt} are markers at the beginning of each
% quiz (short quiz, respectively) solution. These markers, along with
% ``end'' versions, \cmd{\endeqQt} and \cmd{\endeqSQt}, respectively, can be used to filter out the quiz solutions or the
% short quiz solutions. The following example removes all short quizzes.
%\begin{verbatim}
%\long\def\eqSQt#1\endeqSQt{}
%\begin{document}
%\input{mydoc.qsl}
%\end{document}
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\let\eqSQt\@gobble
\let\endeqSQt\relax
\let\eqQt\@gobble
\let\endeqQt\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\quizSolnHeader}
%  Each solution begins with \cmd{\quizSolnHeader}. This can be redefined
%  for whatever reason. It takes three arguments, one of which is optional.
%  \#1 is the \cmd{\noPeek} parameters; \#2 is the named destination to this
%  solution; \#3 is the \cmd{\sqsllabel}.
%
% If you want to typeset solutions separately, you can redefine
% \cmd{\quizSolnHeader} as desired, and used in conjunction with
% \cmd{eqQt}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\quizSolnHeader[3][]{%
    \ifeqforpaper\else\webnewpage\fi\noindent
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
    \def\eq@argi{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@argi\@empty\else\noPeek#1\fi
    \hypertarget{#2}{#3}\relax
%</package>
%<*eqexam>
    #2%
%</eqexam>
%<*package|eqexam>
    \solnspace
}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\NoPeeking}
%    \begin{macro}{\AllowPeeking}
% A \texttt{quiz} solution has an additional (optional) feature. If
% \cmd{\NoPeeking} is executed, then an open action is placed on the opening
% page of each solution. This open action simply changes the page back to
% the page of the quiz. This is an attempt at keeping students from ``peeking''
% at the solutions before, or while they are taking a quiz. \cmd{\AllowPeeking}
% is the default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\AllowPeeking{\global\let\allow@peek\eq@YES}\AllowPeeking
\def\NoPeeking{\global\let\allow@peek\eq@NO}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\noPeekAction}
% The default definition of \cmd{quizSolnHeader} contains a macro called
% \cmd{\noPeek}. This is the action that \cmd{\noPeek} performs. The actual
% definition of \cmd{\noPeek} is driver dependent, and is listed elsewhere.
% An open page action will be created with a JavaScript action, which calls
% a DLJS function \texttt{noPeek("\#1",\#2)}. The first parameter is the base
% name of the quiz; the second parameter is the page number the quiz starts from
% (so that we can return to that page when the student tries to view the solution
% when he is not authorized to).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\noPeekAction#1#2{%
    /AA <</O<</S/JavaScript/JS(noPeek("#1",#2))>> >>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \subsection{The \texttt{shortquiz} Solutions}
% When the first solution is written, \cmd{\therearequizsolutions} is
% made true.  When the solutions are input back into the file, and
% this switch is still false, then no quiz header is typeset;
% this avoids an empty quiz solutions section with only the header.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\newif\iftherearequizsolutions \therearequizsolutionsfalse
\let\aeb@FLOverride\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\includequizsolutions}
% This macro inserts the solutions to the short quizzes, if there are
% any solutions.  If a user uses this macro to insert the solutions
% elsewhere, \cmd{\include@quizsolutions} is called, then put is to
% \cmd{\relax}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\includequizsolutions{\@ifstar
    {\let\resetQZtsolns\relax\includequizsolutionsi}
    {\def\resetQZtsolns{\global\let\include@quizsolutions\relax}%
     \includequizsolutionsi}%
}
\newcommand{\includequizsolutionsi}[1][]{%
    \filterFor{#1}\includequizsolutionsii
}
\def\includequizsolutionsii{%
    \include@quizsolutions
    \resetQZtsolns
    \let\eqFilterArg\@empty
}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \DescribeMacro{\eqqzsolutionshook}\DescribeMacro{\priorsqslsectitle}
% \DescribeMacro{\priorsqslinput} are commands executed at the beginning of the page of quiz solutions.
% These may be defined by the document author.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eqqzsolutionshook\@empty
\let\priorsqslsectitle\@empty
\let\priorsqslinput\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\quizSolnsHeadnToc} sets up the quiz solution title.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\quizSolnsHeadnToc{\section*{\sqslsectitle}%
    \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{%
    \@ifundefined{web@latextoc}{}{%
    \ifx\web@latextoc y\else
    \protect\numberline{}\fi}\sqslsectitle}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\quizSolnInput} is the command that actually inputs
% the solutions file \cmd{\jobname.qsl}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\quizSolnInput}
{%
    \let\webnewpage\relax
    \immediate\closeout\quiz@solns
    \ifeq@noquizsolutions\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% If there are quiz solutions, we start a new page, and clear the right mark.
% We execute \cmd{\eq@normallheader} which sets the running left header,
% except on the page with a section head. We set the right mark as
% \cmd{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}. (2013/09/23) replaced \cmd{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}
% with \cmd{\sqslsecrunhead}, makes it easier to define running headers
% when solutions are filtered.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \iftherearequizsolutions\newpage\markright{}%
            \eq@normallheader\markright{\sqslsecrunhead}%
            \ifx\webnewpage\relax
                \def\webnewpage{\let\webnewpage\newpage}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here we have various prior commands, and the setting of the
% section title.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \priorsqslsectitle\quizSolnsHeadnToc\priorsqslinput
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now input the solution file \cmd{\jobname.qsl}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.qsl}{}%
            {!!! Solutions to quizzes not found}
%    \end{macrocode}
% A hook for hanging things
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \eqqzsolutionshook
%    \end{macrocode}
% Reset the running header cleanly
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \newpage\eq@defaultlheader
        \fi
    \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The internal command that insert solutions.  This command
% appears at the end of document, where it will insert the
% solutions, unless it has been redefined to \cmd{\relax} by
% \cmd{\includequizsolutions}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\include@quizsolutions{\quizSolnInput}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \section{The \texttt{quiz} and \texttt{quiz*} Environments}
%
% In this section we introduce the \texttt{quiz} environment, and all its
% supporting elements.
%
%    \subsection{Define the \texttt{quiz} Environment}
% \DescribeMacro{\priorqhook}\DescribeMacro{\aboveqskip}
% \DescribeMacro{\endqhook}\DescribeMacro{\belowqskip} These are hooks and skip
% before and after the \texttt{quiz} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\priorqhook}[1]{\def\q@priorhook{#1}}
\priorqhook{}
\newcommand{\aboveqskip}[1]{\def\q@aboveskip{#1}}
\aboveqskip{\par\medskip}
\newcommand{\qhspace}{\space}
\def\endqhook#1{\def\eq@prior@endQuiz{#1}}
\endqhook{}
\newcommand{\belowqHooknSkip}[1]{\def\eq@belowqskip{#1}}
\belowqHooknSkip{\medskip}
\def\belowqskip{\belowqHooknSkip}
%\belowqskip{\medskip}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eq@initializeServerSubmit\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\quiztype}
%    \begin{macro}{\defaultquiztype}
% The command \cs{quiztype} can be used to force subsequent quizzes to be link
% style or form style, independent of the environment. Recognized values are
% \texttt{f} and \texttt{l}.  Once the override \cs{quiztype} has been used,
% you can recover the default behavior of the quizzes by expanding
% \cs{defaultquiztype}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\quiztype}[1]{%
    \def\@quiztype{#1}\def\aeb@FLOverride{#1}}
\let\@quiztype\@empty
\newcommand{\defaultquiztype}{%
    \let\@quiztype\@empty\let\aeb@FLOverride\relax}
\let\aeb@FLOverride\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% begin dps 12/20/03
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@setFormLinkType{%
    \if\qstar*
        \ifx\aeb@FLOverride\relax
            \def\@@quiztype{f}%
        \else
            \if\aeb@FLOverride l\def\@@quiztype{l}\else
            \def\@@quiztype{f}\fi
        \fi
    \else
        \ifx\aeb@FLOverride\relax
            \def\@@quiztype{l}%
        \else
            \if\aeb@FLOverride f\def\@@quiztype{f}\else
            \def\@@quiztype{l}\fi
        \fi
    \fi
}
\def\setdefault@Ans{\@setFormLinkType
    \expandafter\global\expandafter
    \let\expandafter\@Ans\expandafter=\csname Ans@\@@quiztype\endcsname
}
% end dps 12/20/03
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\useForms}
%    \begin{macro}{\useLinks}
%    \begin{macro}{\restoreFLTypeDefault}
% For multiple choice questions, here we give the option of using a mixture of links
% and forms.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% dps 12/20/03
\newcommand\useForms{\def\aeb@FLOverride{f}}
\newcommand\useLinks{\def\aeb@FLOverride{l}}
%\newcommand\useForms{\let\@Ans\Ans@f}
%\newcommand\useLinks{\let\@Ans\Ans@l}
\newcommand\restoreFLTypeDefault{\global\let\aeb@FLOverride\relax}
\let\aeb@FLOverride\relax
%\aeb@answerType
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{environment}{quiz}
% The \texttt{quiz} environment takes an optional `\texttt*'
% and one required argument.  There are two styles of quizzes:
% links or checkboxes. Beginning with v6.08, the use of the \texttt*-option
% is discouraged, use the quiz* environment instead.
%\begin{verbatim}
%\begin{quiz}[*]{<base_name>}
% ...
%\end{quiz}
%\end{verbatim}
% \begin{itemize}
% \item optional \texttt{*} $=$ use checkboxes, otherwise use links
% \item \texttt{<base\_name>}: required argument $=$ base name of quiz.
% \end{itemize}
%
% Note that I set \verb!\tabcolsep=0pt! in preparation for a tabular environment.
% If authors wants to use a tabular environment within a question, he/she must
% reset this value to its default, \verb!\setlength{\tabcolsep}{6pt}!.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quiz}
{\goodbreak\@ifstar{\gdef\qstar{*}\@quiz*f}{\gdef\qstar{x}\@quiz*l}}
    {\aeb@endquiz}
\def\@quizCnt{0}
\def\@quiz*#1#2%
{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% (06/08/10) The next two lines initialize the macros for registering the
% question label, i.e., \texttt{2(a)(ii)}. These two lines are repeated for
% the \texttt{oQuestion} and \texttt{shortquiz} environments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \xdef\eq@pageThisQ{\the\c@page}%
    \let\@currentQues\@empty
    \global\let\eqQzQuesList\@empty
    {\count0=\@quizCnt\advance\count0by1\relax
        \xdef\@quizCnt{\the\count0 }}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We try to support {\LaTeX}'s cross-referencing system by defining
% \cs{@currentlabel}, \cs{@currentHlabel}, and \cs{@currentlabelname}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\@currentlabel{\@quizCnt}%
    \edef\@currentHref{quiz.\@quizCnt}%
    \sq@setCLN{\eq@defaultQuizLabelName}%
    \setcounter{eqpointvalue}{0}\setcounter{questionno}{0}%
    \eq@initializeServerSubmit
    \global\let\eqQuizType\isQZ %\tabcolsep=0pt
    \gdef\eqPTs{1}\global\let\eqQT\eq@na
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v6.3u}{2010/11/04}{%
%    Added \cs{xdef}\cs{oField}\texttt{\{\#2\}}, this is
%    needed for \textsf{apb.dtx}.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \gdef\quiz@total{#2}\xdef\curr@quiz{#2}\xdef\oField{#2}%
    \xdef\currQuiz{#2}\xdef\currQuizStartPage{\thepage}%
    \xdef\aPointType{0}%
    \ifx\@quiztype\@empty\gdef\@@quiztype{#1}\else
        \xdef\@@quiztype{\@quiztype}\fi
    \let\@qzsolndest\@empty
    \let\answers\answers@q\let\endanswers\endanswers@q
    \let\manswers\manswers@q\let\endmanswers\endanswers@q %dps 11/07/07
    \let\solution\solution@sq\let\endsolution\endsolution@sq
    \expandafter%
        \xdef\csname titleOf\currQuiz\endcsname{\aebTitleQuiz}%
    \q@aboveskip\q@priorhook\noindent\hypertarget{\@currentHref}{}%
    \eq@beginQuiz\qhspace{\set@typeset@protect\aebtitleQuiz}%
    \ignorespaces
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here is the end for the \texttt{quiz} and \texttt{quiz*} environments. The
% \cs{eq@prior@endQuiz} can be used for whatever purposes a
% developer wants.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\aeb@endquiz
{%
    \eq@prior@endQuiz
    \eq@endQuiz
    \global\let\eqQuizType\relax
    \global\let\aebtitleQuiz\@empty
    \global\let\aebTitleQuiz\@empty
    \global\let\bqlabel\eq@bqlabel % reset beginning label to default
    \global\let\eqlabel\eq@eqlabel % reset ending label to default
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2013/10/18) Added \cs{sqsllabel} to list of commands that are reset.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \global\let\sqsllabel\eq@sqsllabel
    \global\let\sqslrtnlabel\eq@sqslrtnlabel
    \global\let\bqlabelISO\eq@bqlabelISO
    \eq@belowqskip
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
%
%    \subsection{Define the \texttt{quiz*} Environment}
%
%    \begin{environment}{quiz*}
% This environment is more latexy, \texttt{quiz*} environment is for quizzes with forms. Equivalent
% to \verb!\begin{quiz}*...\end{quiz}!/
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quiz*}{\goodbreak\gdef\qstar{*}\@quiz*f}{\aeb@endquiz}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
%
%    \subsection{Begin/End Quiz with Link or Buttons}
%
% Redefine this macro to \cmd{\eq@BeginQuizButton} to get a form button
% for the \texttt{quiz} environment. Pressing on the link or button
% initializes the quiz. The default is `link': \cmd{\eq@BeginQuizLink}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\eq@beginQuiz{\eq@BeginQuizLink}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Redefine this macro to |\eq@EndQuizButton| to get a form button
% for the \texttt{quiz} environment. Pressing on the link or button
% will score the quiz. The default is `link': |\eq@EndQuizLink|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\eq@endQuiz{\eq@EndQuizLink}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\useBeginQuizButton}
% Use a button instead of a link for begin quiz
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\useBeginQuizButton[1][]
    {\renewcommand\eq@beginQuiz{\eq@BeginQuizButton[#1]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\useEndQuizButton}
% Use a button instead of a link for end quiz
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\useEndQuizButton[1][]
    {\renewcommand\eq@endQuiz{\eq@EndQuizButton[#1]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\useBeginQuizLink}
% Use a link begin quiz (the default)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\useBeginQuizLink
    {\renewcommand\eq@beginQuiz{\eq@BeginQuizLink}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\useEndQuizLink}
% Use a link end quiz (the default)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\useEndQuizLink
    {\renewcommand\eq@endQuiz{\eq@EndQuizLink}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\@initQuiz}
%    \begin{macro}{\priorInitQuiz}
%    \begin{macro}{\postInitQuiz}
% \cs{@initQuiz} is executed when you click on `Begin Quiz'. Included here are some
% macro hooks for insert code prior to, and after the quiz initialization. This
% command appears in the commands \cs{eq@@BeginQuizLinkActions} and \cs{eq@@BeginQuizButtonActions} below.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\@initQuiz{%
    var \curr@quiz = new Object();\jsR
    \curr@quiz.oAlertCheck = { bAfterValue: false };\jsR
    \curr@quiz.Grp = {};
    \ifx\defaultColorJSLoc\@empty\else\jsR
    \oField.DefaultColorJSLoc=\defaultColorJSLoc;\fi
    \ifx\rghtColorJSLoc\@empty\else\jsR
    \oField.RightColorJSLoc=\rghtColorJSLoc;\fi
    \ifx\wrngColorJSLoc\@empty\else\jsR
    \oField.WrongColorJSLoc=\wrngColorJSLoc;\fi
    \ifx\rghtAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty\else\jsR
    \oField.RightAnsSymbJSLoc=\rghtAnsSymbJSLoc;\fi
    \ifx\wrngAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty\else\jsR
    \oField.WrongAnsSymbJSLoc=\wrngAnsSymbJSLoc;\fi
    \ifx\corrAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty\else\jsR
    \oField.CorrAnsSymbJSLoc=\corrAnsSymbJSLoc;\fi\jsR
    InitializeQuiz("\curr@quiz",\ifnocorrections0\else1\fi);%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{priorInitQuiz} and \cs{postInitQuiz} are hooks that allow a document author to
% execute JavaScript just prior to initializing the quiz and just after. These appear in
% \cs{eq@@BeginQuizLinkActions} and \cs{eq@@BeginQuizButtonActions} below.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\priorInitQuiz}{}
\newcommand{\postInitQuiz}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% Here are a couple of macros used with `End Quiz', and are used for
% submitting quiz results to a web server.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\eq@submitURL\@empty
\let\eq@insertHiddenFields\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{With Links}
%
%    \begin{macro}{\eq@BeginQuizLink}
% Begin quiz with links
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@@BeginQuizLinkActions
{%
    \A{\JS{%
        \ifx\priorInitQuiz\@empty\else\priorInitQuiz\jsR\fi
        \@initQuiz
        \ifx\postInitQuiz\@empty\else\jsR\postInitQuiz\fi
    }}%
}
\def\eq@BeginQuizLinkDefaults{\Border{0 0 0}}
\let\bqlabelFmt\@empty
\def\eq@BeginQuizLink
{%
    \set@@Link{}{}{}{\color{\@linkcolor}\bqlabelFmt\bqlabel}{}%
    {\eq@setWidgetProps\setLink@driver}%
    {\eq@BeginQuizLinkDefaults\eq@@BeginQuizLinkActions\every@Link}%
    \space\ignorespaces
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\eq@EndQuizLink}
% Code the the link version of `End Quiz'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\priorSubmitQuiz{}
\newcommand\postSubmitQuiz{}
\def\eq@@EndQuizLinkActions
{%
    \A{\JS{%
        if (!isQuizInitialized("\curr@quiz"))\jsR\jsT
            app.alert(InitMsg("\bqlabelISO"),3);\jsR
        else {\jsR\jsT
            if (\minQuizResp(\thequestionno)) {\jsR\jsT\jsT
                DisplayQuizResults("\curr@quiz",\theeqpointvalue,%
\thequestionno);\jsR\jsT\jsT
                \eq@submitURL
                \postSubmitQuiz
                resetQuiz("\curr@quiz");\jsR\jsT
            }\jsR
            }}}%
}
\def\eq@EndQuizLinkDefaults{\Border{0 0 0}}
\let\eqlabelFmt\@empty
\def\eq@EndQuizLink
{%
    \ifx\eq@CGI\@empty
        \let\eq@submitURL\@empty
        \let\eq@insertHiddenFields\@empty
    \fi
    \set@@Link{}{}{}{\color{\@linkcolor}\eqlabelFmt\eqlabel}{}%
    {\eq@setWidgetProps\setLink@driver}%
    {\eq@EndQuizLinkDefaults\eq@@EndQuizLinkActions\every@Link}%
    \makebox[0pt][r]{\eq@insertHiddenFields}\gdef\eq@CGI{}%
    \ignorespaces
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{With Buttons}
%
%    \begin{macro}{\eq@BeginQuizButton}
% This is the button when the user wants button rather than link for the
% \texttt{quiz} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\BeginQuizButtonDefaults
{%
    \CA{\bqlabel}\H{P}\F{\FPrint}
    \BC{1 0 0}\BG{.7529 .7529 .7529}\W{1}\S{B}
}
\def\eq@@BeginQuizButtonActions
{%
    \A{\JS{%
        \ifx\priorInitQuiz\@empty\else\priorInitQuiz\r\fi
        \@initQuiz
        \ifx\postInitQuiz\@empty\else\r\postInitQuiz\fi
    }}%
}
\newcommand\eq@BeginQuizButton[1][]
{%
    \push@@Button{#1}{beginQuiz.\curr@quiz}{}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
    {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setButtonProps\eq@Button@driver}%
    {\BeginQuizButtonDefaults\eq@@BeginQuizButtonActions
     \every@ButtonField\every@BeginQuizButton}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\eq@EndQuizButton}
% The `End Quiz' code for Links
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\EndQuizButtonDefaults
{%
    \CA{\eqlabel}\F{\FPrint}\BC{1 0 0}
    \BG{.7529 .7529 .7529}\W{1}\S{B}\H{P}
}
\def\eq@@EndQuizButtonActions
{%
    \A{\JS
        {if (!isQuizInitialized("\curr@quiz"))\jsR\jsT
            app.alert(InitMsg("\bqlabelISO"),3);\jsR
        else {\jsR\jsT
            if (\minQuizResp(\thequestionno)) {\jsR\jsT\jsT
                DisplayQuizResults("\curr@quiz",\theeqpointvalue,%
\thequestionno);\jsR\jsT\jsT
                \eq@submitURL
                \postSubmitQuiz
                resetQuiz("\curr@quiz");\jsR\jsT
            }\jsR
            }}%
    }
}
\newcommand\eq@EndQuizButton[1][]
{%
    \ifx\eq@CGI\@empty
        \let\eq@submitURL\@empty
        \let\eq@insertHiddenFields\@empty
    \fi
    \push@@Button{#1}{endQuiz.\curr@quiz}{}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setButtonProps\eq@Button@driver}%
        {\EndQuizButtonDefaults\eq@@EndQuizButtonActions
         \every@ButtonField\every@EndQuizButton}%
    \makebox[0pt][r]{\eq@insertHiddenFields}\gdef\eq@CGI{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\databaseName}
%    \begin{macro}{\tableName}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqCGI}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqSubmit}
% These four commands give general support for submitting quiz data
% to a web server for storage in a database.  Use in my \textsf{eq2db} Package
% which I have not completed yet.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\databaseName[1]{\def\db@Name{#1}}\def\db@Name{}
\newcommand\tableName[1]{\def\db@Table{#1}}\def\db@Table{}
\newcommand\eqCGI[1]{\def\eq@CGI{#1}}\def\eq@CGI{}
\newcommand\eqSubmit[3]{\eqCGI{"#1"}\databaseName{#2}\tableName{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% The next two commands are used in the \textsf{eq2db} package. We make the
% definitions here so that they can be used even if the package is not loaded.
% In this way, a self-contained quiz can be submitted just by loading the
% package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\addHiddenTextField[3][]{}
\newcommand\populateHiddenField[2]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Correcting the Quiz}
%
%    \begin{macro}{\eqButton}
% Use this button to correct the quiz. Can be customize with
% optional arguments.
% section.
%\begin{verbatim}
% #1 = optional attributes of button
% #2 = title of textfield that contains the score.
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eqButtonDefaults
{%
    \CA{\eq@local@CA}\AC{}\H{P}\W{1}\S{B}
    \BC{1 0 0}\BG{.7529 .7529 .7529}
}
\def\@@eqButtonActions
{%
    \A{\JS{if (isEndQuizPushed("\eqBaseName"))\jsR\jsT%
            correctQuiz("\eqBaseName",\thequestionno);\jsR\jsT%
%    \end{macrocode}
% (06/13/10) Added the quiz summary table, and the function
% \texttt{correctSumryTbl}. If a summary table is not present
% the function does nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        if (typeof correctSumryTbl == "function")\jsR\jsT\jsT
            correctSumryTbl("\eqBaseName",\thequestionno);}%
    }%
}
\newcommand\eqButton[2][]
{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If nocorrections is true, then this button does not appear.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnocorrections\else
        \def\eqBaseName{#2}%
        \push@@Button{#1}{correct.#2}{}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setButtonProps\eq@Button@driver}%
        {\eqButtonDefaults\@@eqButtonActions\every@ButtonField
        \every@eqButton}%
    \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\CorrButton} is a name better suited for the task of this button
% than the \cs{eqButton} name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\CorrButton{\eqButton}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\rbMarkup}
% An optional element for quizzes. Place just after a response box (perhaps, before the
% \cs{CorrAnsButton}. When the correct button is pressed, this check box will show a
% green check or a red cross (by default).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rbMarkup@Defaults
{%
    \BC{}\F{\FHidden}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}\textSize{12}
    \textColor{0 g}\symbolchoice{check}
}
\newcommand\rbMarkup[1][]{%
    \ifx\grpquestions\eq@One
        \def\Fld@name{%
            \oField.\thequestionno.\thegrpquestionno}\else
        \def\Fld@name{\oField.\thequestionno}\fi
    \check@@Box{#1\V{Yes}\DV{Yes}}%
    {rbmarkup.\Fld@name}%
%    {rbmarkup.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}%
    {\RadioFieldSize}{\RadioFieldSize}{Yes}{}%
    {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RadioCheck@driver}%
    {\rbMarkup@Defaults\every@CheckBox\every@rbMarkup}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
%    \subsection{Measuring Quiz Results}
%
%    \begin{macro}{\minQuizResp}
% Define the threshold level. The two permissible values are \texttt{lowTreshold}
% and \texttt{highThreshold}. These are names of DLJS. New threshold functions
% can be defined and specified.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\minQuizResp{lowThreshold}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\PTs}
% Use this macro to assign weights to the quiz questions. Use only within
% the \texttt{questions} environment, just after an \cmd{\item}. If
% \cmd{\PTs} does not appear, then a weight of $1$ is assumed.
%\par\noindent|#1 = number of points for the current question.|
% The star-form records the points but does not display the points.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\PTs{\@ifstar{\def\eq@star{*}\@PTs}{\def\eq@star{x}\@PTs}}
\def\@PTs#1{\gdef\eq@PTs{#1}\ifx\eq@PTs\@empty\gdef\eq@PTs{1}\fi
    \global\let\eqPTs\eq@PTs\global\let\eq@PTs\@empty
    \if\eq@star*\else\PTs@Hook\fi}
\def\eq@PTs{0} % initialize this variable
% begin dps 12/20/03
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\QT}
% \cs{QT} is used for entering the ``question type'' for the question (optional).
% This question type is entered into the ``\texttt{tagged}'' data, and is meant to be
% used for classifying and in tracking the problem types. Example: \verb+\QT{limits}+.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\QT[1]
{%
    \gdef\eq@qT{#1}\ifx\eq@qT\@empty\global\let\eq@qT\eq@na\fi
    \global\let\eqQT\eq@qT\global\let\eq@qT\eq@na
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@na{na} % not applicable
\let\eq@qT=\eq@na
% end dps 12/20/03
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\PTsHook}
% Used to typeset the number of points.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\PTsHook[1]{\def\PTs@Hook{#1}}
\let\PTs@Hook\@empty
\let\eq@PTs\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqGradeScale}
% This is an array of letter grades and grade ranges. This macro is use as the argument
% of the JS function \texttt{GetGrade}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\eqGradeScale{%
    "A",[90, 100],"B",[80,90],"C",[70,80],"D",[60,70],"F",[0,60]}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}
%    \begin{macro}{\RBW}
%    \begin{macro}{\SFW}
%    \begin{macro}{\GFW}
%    \begin{macro}{\PtW}
%    \begin{macro}{\PcW}
% \cmd{\DefaultHeightOfWidget} is the default height of all form
% fields (except radio fields and checkboxes). \cmd{\RBW} is the
% default width of the \cmd{\RespBox}; and \cmd{\SFW} is the
% default width of the \cmd{\ScoreField}. \cs{GFW} is the default
% width of a grade field button; \cs{PtFW} is the default width
% of a points field button; and \cs{PcFW} is the default width
% of the percent field button.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tallywidth#1{\def\TBW{#1}}
\def\TBW{15bp}
\def\DefaultHeightOfWidget{11bp}
\def\RadioFieldSize{11bp}
\def\RBW{2in}       % Response Box width (math,txt, txtpc, answer field)
\def\SFW{1.5in}     % Score Field Width
\def\GFW{20pt}      % Grade Field Width
\def\PtFW{1.5in}    % Point Field Width
\def\PcFW{1.5in}    % Percent Field Width
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\ScoreField}
%     This text field will receive the scores
%     of a quiz.  The command \cmd{\eqScore} was defined
%     in Section~\ref{ss:ldm}.  This command takes an optional
%     argument and a required argument.
%\begin{verbatim}
%#1 = one or more commands that will customize the design of the
%     field.  See the manual for examples.
%#2 = Base name of the quiz
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ScoreFieldDefaults
{%
    \Ff{\FfReadOnly}\BC{1 0 0}\BG{}\S{S}
    \DV{\eqScore}\V{\eqScore}
}
\newcommand\ScoreField[2][]
{%
    \text@@Field{#1}{ScoreField.#2}{\SFW}%
        {\DefaultHeightOfWidget}{}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@TextField}%
        {\ScoreFieldDefaults\every@eqTextField\every@ScoreField}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\GradeField}
% This command creates a text field that shows the letter grade of the user's
% effort on the current quiz.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\GradeFieldDefaults
{%
    \textColor{0 0 1 rg}\BC{1 0 0}\BG{1 1 1}\S{S}
    \Ff{\FfReadOnly}\Q{1}
}
\newcommand\GradeField[2][]
{%
    \text@@Field{#1}{GradeField.#2}{\GFW}%
        {\DefaultHeightOfWidget}{}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@TextField}%
        {\GradeFieldDefaults\every@eqTextField\every@GradeField}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\AnswerField}
%    \begin{macro}{\resetAnsFieldOnClose}
%    \begin{macro}{\noResetAnsFieldOnClose}
% This command creates a text field to receive the answers to the
% fill-in questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\AnswerFieldDefaults
{%
   \BC{0 0 0}\S{S}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
   \presets{\eq@resetAnsFieldOnClose}%
}
\let\eq@resetAnsFieldOnClose\@empty
\newcommand{\noResetAnsFieldOnClose}{%
    \global\let\eq@resetAnsFieldOnClose\@empty}
\newcommand{\resetAnsFieldOnClose}{%
    \gdef\eq@resetAnsFieldOnClose{%
        \AApageclose{this.resetForm(["\Fld@name"]);}}}
\newcommand\AnswerField[2][]
{%
    \text@@Field{#1}{Ans.#2}{\RBW}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
        {}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@TextField}%
        {\AnswerFieldDefaults\every@eqTextField\every@AnswerField}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% Now let's define some additional text fields for the quiz environment.
%    \begin{macro}{\PointsField}
% This command creates a text field which displays the number of points in the
% quiz scored by the user of the \texttt{quiz}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\PointsFieldDefaults
{%
   \rawPDF{}\BC{1 0 0}\BG{}\S{S}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}
 }
\newcommand\PointsField[2][]
{%
    \text@@Field{#1}{PointsField.#2}{\PtFW}%
        {\DefaultHeightOfWidget}{}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@TextField}%
        {\PointsFieldDefaults\every@eqTextField\every@PointsField}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\PercentField}
% This command creates a text field which displays user's score in percent
% form.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\PercentFieldDefaults
{%
    \rawPDF{}\BC{1 0 0}\BG{}\S{S}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
}
\newcommand\PercentField[2][]
{%
    \text@@Field{#1}{PercentField.#2}{\PcFW}%
        {\DefaultHeightOfWidget}{}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@TextField}%
        {\PercentFieldDefaults\every@eqTextField\every@PercentField}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\RestoreScoreField}
% Reset the score field to its default, in case some author
% changed things.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\RestoreScoreField
{%
    \global\let\eqScore\eq@Score
    \global\let\eqOutOf\eq@OutOf
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \subsection{Floating and Docking a Quiz}
%
%    \begin{macro}{\DeclareQuiz}
%   A convenience macro for setting the name of the quiz. This command defines the
%   text macro \cs{currQuiz} which contains the quiz name. Can be used in conjunction
%   with \cs{floatQuiz} and \cs{startQuizHere}.
% \changes{v6.05c}{2006/05/19}
% {
%   Added a convenience macro for setting the name of the quiz. This command defines the
%   text macro \cs{currQuiz} which contains the quiz name. Can be used in conjunction
%   with \cs{floatQuiz} and \cs{startQuizHere}.
% }
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\DeclareQuiz#1{%
    \edef\thisQuiz{#1}%
    \edef\curr@quiz{#1}%
    \edef\currQuiz{#1}%
}
\let\Quiz\DeclareQuiz
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\floatQuiz}
%    \begin{macro}{\dockQuiz}
% Use \cs{floatQuiz} to create commands \cs{startQuizHere} and \cs{endQuizHere}. These commands expand to the
% `Begin Quiz' button or link (`End Quiz' button or link).  But these commands can be placed anywhere before the
% \texttt{quiz} environment (after the \texttt{quiz} environment). Use \cs{dockQuiz} to return to the default behavior of the
% \texttt{quiz} environment.
% \changes{v6.05c}{2006/05/19}
% {
%   Added \cs{floatQuiz}, \cs{dockQuiz} and \cs{startQuizHere} to start a quiz in an
%   arbitrary place prior to the beginning of the quiz.
% }
%\par\medskip\noindent Usage:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\Quiz{myQuiz}
%\floatQuiz
%........
%\begin{center}
%\startQuizHere
%\end{center}
%....
%\begin{quiz*}{\thisQuiz}
%....
%\end{quiz*}
%....
%\endQuizHere
% ...
%\docQuiz
%\begin{quiz}{anotherQuiz}
%....
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\aeb@noindgobble{\noindent\@gobbletwo}
\let\startQuizHere\relax
\let\endQuizHere\relax
\let\dockQuiz\relax
\newcommand\floatQuiz{%
    \global\let\eq@beginQuiz@saved\eq@beginQuiz
    \global\let\eq@endQuiz@saved\eq@endQuiz
    \global\let\startQuizHere\eq@beginQuiz
    \global\let\endQuizHere\eq@endQuiz
    \global\let\eq@beginQuiz\aeb@noindgobble
    \global\let\eq@endQuiz\@empty
    \global\let\dockQuiz\eq@dockQuiz
}
\newcommand\eq@dockQuiz{%
    \global\let\eq@beginQuiz\eq@beginQuiz@saved
    \global\let\eq@endQuiz\eq@endQuiz@saved
    \global\let\startQuizHere\relax
    \global\let\endQuizHere\relax
    \global\let\eq@beginQuiz@saved\relax
    \global\let\eq@endQuiz@saved
    \global\let\dockQuiz\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz} and \protect\cs{fancyQuizHeaders}}
%   {\textbackslash{titleQuiz} and \textbackslash{fancyQuizHeaders}}}
%
%    \begin{macro}{\fancyQuizHeaders}
%    \begin{macro}{\restoreDefaultQuizHeaders}
%    \begin{macro}{\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt}
%    \begin{macro}{\eq@fancyShrtQuizHeadersfmt}
% The commands for \cs{fancyQuizHeaders}: \cs{restoreDefaultQuizHeaders} restores
% solution headers to the old style; \cs{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt} determines the
% formatting for quizzes; and \cs{eq@fancyShrtQuizHeadersfmt} does the same for
% short quizzes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\fancyQuizHeaders{%
    \global\let\eq@sqsllabel@fancy@save\eq@sqsllabel
    \gdef\eq@sqsllabel{\eq@fancyQuizHeaders}}
\def\eq@fancyQuizHeaders{%
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ\expandafter\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt\else
    \expandafter\eq@fancyShrtQuizHeadersfmt\fi
}
\let\eq@sqsllabel@fancy@save\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% We set \cs{eq@sqsllabel} back to its value when \cs{fancyQuizHeaders} was last
% invoked.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\restoreDefaultQuizHeaders{%
    \global\let\eq@sqsllabel\eq@sqsllabel@fancy@save}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here is the definition of the format for quizzes. This can be redefined, a few
% suggestions are made in the documentation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt{%
    {\protect\color{blue}\protect\textbf{%
        \ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty
        \ifnum\@eqquestiondepth>0Solution to Quiz:\fi
        \else\aebTitleQuiz:\ifnum\@eqquestiondepth=0\else\protect\ %
        Question\fi\fi\ifcase\@eqquestiondepth
        \ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty Solution to Quiz:\fi
        \or\space\arabic{eqquestionnoi}.%
        \or\space\arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})%
        \or\space\arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})%
            (\roman{eqquestionnoiii})\fi
    }}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% For short quizzes, we make the formatting the same as that for quizzes. This can be
% re-defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@fancyShrtQuizHeadersfmt{\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\titleQuiz}
%    \begin{macro}{\titleQuizfmt}
%    \begin{macro}{\ifQuizType}
%    \begin{macro}{\ifstaroption}
%    \begin{macro}{\eq@ifstaroption}
% The \cs{titleQuiz} command adds a title to the quiz or short quiz, using
% a format, as defined in \cs{titleQuizfmt}. The switches \cs{ifQuizType}
% and \cs{eq@ifstaroption} allows you to distinguish between quizzes and
% short quizzes, a \texttt{*} option or non-\texttt{*} option.
%
%\cs{titleQuiz} takes two parameters: an optional \texttt{*} and the
%text for the title of the quiz. When \texttt{*} is used---for short
%quizzes only---the title of the quiz is used for the definition of
%\cs{sqlabel}. Note that \cs{makeatletter} is invoked before the
% parameters are read.
% \changes{v6.7o}{2013/11/25}{Changed \cs{aeb@@titleQuzi} to \cs{aebTitleQuiz}}
% \changes{v6.7p}{2013/12/11}{Added optional parameter to \cs{titleQuiz}
%   to execute a command, such as incrementing a counter.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\tqhspace\space
\newcommand\titleQuiz[1][]{#1\@titleQuizi}
\def\@titleQuizi{\makeatletter
    \@ifstar{\def\eq@tq@star{*}\eq@titleQuiz}%
{\def\eq@tq@star{x}\eq@titleQuiz}}
\def\eq@titleQuiz#1{%
    \gdef\aebTitleQuiz{#1}\def\@currentlabelname{#1}%
    \gdef\aeb@@titleQuiz{#1}%
    \gdef\aebtitleQuiz{\mbox{\titleQuizfmt{#1}}\tqhspace}%
\makeatother}
%</package>
%<package|eqexam>\let\aebtitleQuiz\@empty
%<package|eqexam>\let\aebTitleQuiz\@empty
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% The command to format the \cs{titleQuiz}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\titleQuizfmt{\bfseries}
%    \end{macrocode}
% A user interface to distinguish between quizzes and short quizzes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ifQuizType#1#2{\if\eqQuizType\isQZ\def\qt@next{#1}%
    \else\def\qt@next{#2}\fi\qt@next}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Used to distinguish between whether \cs{titleQuiz} was invoked with
% the \texttt{*} option. In the short quiz environment, this command
% is let equal to \cs{ifstaroption}, which is the user-access to this command.
% Outside the \texttt{shortquiz} environment, \cs{ifstaroption} is \cs{@gobbletwo}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@ifstaroption#1#2{\if\eq@tq@star*\def\sq@next{#1}%
    \else\def\sq@next{#2}\fi\sq@next}
\let\eq@tq@star\relax
\def\ifstaroption{\PackageWarning{exerquiz}
    {\protect\ifstaroption\space is only defined within the\MessageBreak
    shortquiz environment. Gobbling up its two\MessageBreak
    arguments, sorry. This occurred}%
    \@gobbletwo
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Showing Partial Credit Markup}
%
%    \begin{macro}{\aeb@creditmarkup}
%    \begin{macro}{\aeb@creditmarkupfmt}
%    \begin{macro}{\ptsLabel}
%    \begin{macro}{\ptLabel}
%    \begin{macro}{\multipartquestion}
%    \begin{macro}{\hideCreditMarkup}
%    \begin{macro}{\showCreditMarkup}
% \cs{showCreditMarkup} will show points assigned to individual questions in a quiz.
% \cs{showCreditMarkup} turns off this feature. Should be placed before the next quiz,
% not within a quiz. The command \cs{multipartquestion} is placed just prior to a question
% that introduces a problem with sub-parts. See the demo file \texttt{pc\_test.tex} for examples.
% The other two commands \cs{aeb@creditmarkup} and \cs{aeb@creditmarkupfmt} can be redefined
% to suite your tastes.
%
%\changes{v6.2c}{2007/11/14}
%{
%  Added the commands \cs{showCreditMarkup} and \cs{hideCreditMarkup} to show partial credit markup
%}
%\changes{v6.3k}{2008/01/09}
%{
%  Added \cs{ptsLabel} and \cs{ptLabel} to localize the markup in the margin of a quiz
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{qMarkCnt}
\def\multipartquestion{\global\let\aeb@multipart=1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The labeling for the partial credit markup. These two commands are
% are defined (identically) in the \textsf{eqexam} package, hence the
% use of \cs{providecommand}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\ptsLabel}[1]{\def\eqptsLabel{#1}}\ptsLabel{pts}
\providecommand{\ptLabel}[1]{\def\eqptLabel{#1}}\ptLabel{pt}
\let\aeb@multipart=0
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\pcMarkupColor} is the named color in RGB color space to
% use for the color of the partial credit markup. (2013/09/14).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\pcMarkupColor{red}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{aeb@creditmarkup} creates a small text fields that holds the partial
% credit markup. The command may be redefined, perhaps to changes the dimensions
% of the rectangular bounding box, set at \texttt{12bp} by \texttt{8bp}.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\aeb@creditmarkup}{%
    \textField[\Ff\FfReadOnly\BC{}\F\FHidden
    \textColor{\pcMarkupColor}\textSize{0}\autoCenter{n}%
    \DV{0 \eqptsLabel}\V{0 \eqptsLabel}]%
    {qMark.\currQuiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{qMarkCnt}}{12bp}{8bp}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{showCreditMarkup} command defines \cs{qMark} and \cs{qMark@Hook}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\showCreditMarkup{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{qMark} makes the decision whether to place a mark or not. If
% the command \cs{multipartquestion} has been expanded, \cs{aeb@multipart} is one, otherwise
% it is zero. If zero we do place the markup, otherwise, no.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\qMark{\ifx\aeb@multipart0\aeb@creditmarkup
    \stepcounter{qMarkCnt}\else\global\let\aeb@multipart=0\fi}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{qMark@Hook} is a hook that is normally \cs{@empty}. The hook is strategically
% placed at the beginning of each question \cs{item}. Here we define it to be
% \cs{aeb@creditmarkupfmt}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\qMark@Hook{\aeb@creditmarkupfmt}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Turn off partial credit markup by putting \cs{qMark@Hook} back to its default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\hideCreditMarkup{\global\let\qMark@Hook\@empty}
%    \end{macrocode}
% A simple command to place the \cs{qMark} in a \cs{makebox[0pt][r]}, with
% a little adjustment to please the eye.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\aeb@creditmarkupfmt}{\makebox[0pt][r]{\qMark\hspace{-2bp}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%\subsection{Filtering solutions to quizzes}
% The \cs{eqQt} and \cs{eqSQt} commands have one argument designed to be used to filter
% solutions to quizzes. The demo document is \texttt{filter\_quizzes.tex},
% but basically, we can include the solutions several times, once for each set filtered set.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\gobbleToEndQt#1\endeqQt{\ifeqforpaper\expandafter\@gobble\fi}
\long\def\gobbleToEndSQt#1\endeqSQt{%
    \ifeqforpaper\expandafter\@gobble\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \DescribeMacro{\inclQtFilter}\cmd{\inclQtFilter} operates on the quizzes. If the argument \texttt{\#1}
% matches the optional argument of \cs{filterFor}, we include, otherwise, we gobble
% up everything to the end of the quiz, including the token that follows
% \cmd{\gobbleToEndQt}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\inclQtFilter[1]{\def\eqarg{#1}\ifx\eqarg\eqFilterArg
    \else\expandafter\gobbleToEndQt\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \DescribeMacro{\exclQt}\cmd{\exclQt} command exclude all quiz solutions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\exclQt}[1]{\gobbleToEndQt}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \DescribeMacro{\useQtFilter}\cmd{\useQtFilter} command \cs{let}s \cs{eqQt} to
% \cs{inclQtFilter}, and it also \cs{let}s \cs{eqSQt} to
% \cs{exclSQt}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\useQtFilter}{\let\eqQt\inclQtFilter\let\eqSQt\exclSQt}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now we repeat the same sequence of construct for short quizzes.
%  The command \DescribeMacro{\inclSQtFilter}\cmd{\inclSQtFilter} includes a short quiz
% solution if it meets the filter criteria.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\inclSQtFilter[1]{\def\eqarg{#1}\ifx\eqarg\eqFilterArg
    \else\expandafter\gobbleToEndSQt\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \DescribeMacro{\exclSQt}\cmd{\exclSQt} command excludes all short quiz solutions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\exclSQt}[1]{\gobbleToEndSQt}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \DescribeMacro{\useSQtFilter}\cmd{\useSQtFilter} \cs{let}s \cs{eqSQt} to
% \cs{inclSQtFilter}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\useSQtFilter}{\let\eqSQt\inclSQtFilter\let\eqQt\exclQt}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\section{Bookmarking the Quizzes}
%
%    \begin{macro}{\sqbookmarkfmt}
%    \begin{macro}{\qzbookmarkfmt}
%    \begin{macro}{\quizpdfbookmark}
% Support for bookmarking the quizzes and shortquizzes. Unlike the bookmarking
% of the exercises, there is  no support for bookmarking individual questions
% within a quiz.
%\changes{v6.2a}{2007/11/10}
%{
%   Added \cs{quizpdfbookmark} to bookmark quizzes.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sqbookmarkfmt}{Short Quiz \@shortquizCnt.\space}
\newcommand{\qzbookmarkfmt}{Quiz \@quizCnt.\space}
\newcommand{\quizpdfbookmark}[1]{\relax\def\argi{#1}%
    \if\eqQuizType\isSQZ\edef\aeb@bmmrkdest{sqbm.\@shortquizCnt}%
    \def\aeb@thisbkmrkfmt{\sqbookmarkfmt}\else
    \edef\aeb@bmmrkdest{qzbm.\@quizCnt}%
    \def\aeb@thisbkmrkfmt{\qzbookmarkfmt}\fi
    \def\eqex@next{\belowpdfbookmark{\aeb@thisbkmrkfmt#1}%
        {\aeb@bmmrkdest}}%
    \ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty\else\ifx\argi\@empty
        \def\eqex@next{\belowpdfbookmark{\aebTitleQuiz}%
        {\aeb@bmmrkdest}}%
    \fi\fi
    \eqex@next\ignorespaces
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% \section{Multiple Choice Alternatives}
% \subsection{For \texttt{shortquiz}}
% \subsubsection{The \texttt{answers} Environment}
%    \begin{macro}{answers}
% The alternatives of a multiple choice question are enclosed in
% the \texttt{answers} environment.
% This environment takes an optional argument, and one
% required argument.  The required parameter is the number of
% columns to  construct in the underlying \texttt{tabular}
% environment; the presence of the optional argument means the author
% wants to include the solution to this quiz question.  The value of
% the optional parameter is the named destination of the solution.
% The optional parameter for the named destination can also be a
% `\texttt*', in which case a name of \texttt{\string\curr@quiz.\string\thequestionno}
% is assigned.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\def\pushEnvir{\xdef\eq@currenvir{\@currenvir}\endgroup}
\def\popEnvir{\begingroup\@endpefalse
    \edef\@currenvir{\eq@currenvir}%
    \edef\@currenvline{\on@line}%
}
\def\answers@sq{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \texttt{answers} environment needs to go into horizontal mode for the
% \cs{linelength} to be correct when using \cs{leadinitem}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty\else
% ?? remove the \par, why there to begin with?
        \pushEnvir\par\noindent\expandafter\popEnvir\fi
%        \pushEnvir\par\noindent\expandafter\popEnvir\fi
    \stepcounter{questionno}%
    \if\sqstar*\relax
        \if\aeb@FLOverride l%
            \let\@Ans\Ans@sq@l\else
            \let\@Ans\Ans@sq@f\fi
    \else
        \if\aeb@FLOverride f%
            \let\@Ans\Ans@sq@f\else
            \let\@Ans\Ans@sq@l\fi
    \fi
    \def\aeb@answerType{r}\@ifnextchar[{\answers@@sq}%
    {\@ifstar{\answers@@sq[\curr@quiz.\thequestionno]}{\answers@@sq[]}}}
% dps 4/16/05
\def\manswers@sq{%
    \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty\else
        \pushEnvir\par\noindent\expandafter\popEnvir\fi
    \stepcounter{questionno}%
    \if\sqstar*\relax
        \if\aeb@FLOverride l%
        \let\@Ans\Ans@ck@sq@l\else
        \let\@Ans\Ans@ck@sq@f\fi
%        \if\aeb@FLOverride l\let\@Ans\Ans@ck@sq@f\fi
    \else
        \if\aeb@FLOverride f
            \let\@Ans\Ans@ck@sq@f\else
            \let\@Ans\Ans@ck@sq@l\fi
    \fi
    \def\aeb@answerType{c}\@ifnextchar[{\answers@@sq}%
    {\@ifstar{\answers@@sq[\curr@quiz.\thequestionno]}{\answers@@sq[]}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%\begin{verbatim}
% #1 = named destination to be associated with solution
% #2 = number of columns in the tabular environment
%\end{verbatim}
% If the number of columns specified, then we use a list environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\sq@hwdest\@empty % hard-wired destination
\def\answers@@sq[#1]#2{%
    \xdef\aeb@numCols{#2}%
    \ifx\sq@hwdest\@empty
        \xdef\@qzsolndest{#1}\else
        \gdef\@qzsolndest{\sq@hwdest}\fi
    \if\aeb@numCols1\gdef\eq@listType{1}\expandafter\answers@sq@list
    \else
        \gdef\eq@listType{0}\expandafter\answers@@sq@tabular
    \fi{\aeb@numCols}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\setMClabelsep}
% \changes{v6.05e}{2006/18/06 v6.05e}
% {
%   Added control over the separation between the MC label and subsequent text:
%   \cs{setMClabelsep} and \cs{resetMClabelsep}.
% }
%    \begin{macro}{\resetMClabelsep}
%    \begin{macro}{\eq@hspanner}
%    \begin{macro}{\eq@hspanner@default}
% Some convenience macros for computing the width of labels. The command \cs{setMClabelsep}
% can be used to set the separation between the MC label and the beginning of text.  The
% argument for this command is anything that takes up horizontal space. The command sets
% the value of \cs{eq@hspanner}. The default value % of the separation is given by \cs{eq@hspanner@default}.
% The default value can be restored by executing \cs{resetMClabelsep}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\setMClabelsepDefault#1{\def\eq@hspanner@default{#1}}
\def\setMClabelsep#1{\def\eq@hspanner{#1}}
\setMClabelsep{\ }\setMClabelsepDefault{\ }
\def\resetMClabelsep{\expandafter\setMClabelsep\expandafter
    {\eq@hspanner@default}}
\def\eq@lw@l{\eq@l@l\eq@hspanner}
%    \end{macrocode}
% For the link-style MC question, the default width, \cs{eq@l@l}, of the label is the normalsize width of
% `(d)'. For a form checkbox or radiobutton bux, the default width, cs{eq@lw@f}, is \cs{RadioFieldSize},
% normally defined as \texttt{11bp}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@l@l{\normalsize\normalfont(d)}
\def\eq@lw@f{\kern\RadioFieldSize\eq@hspanner}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% This macro will pick up the arguments of the \cs{Ans} command.
%\begin{verbatim}
% [#1] = points to be awarded if problem is false (partial credit)
%  #2  = 1 (for true) or 0 (for false)
%\end{verbatim}
% In a list, each time the \cs{item} is executed, \cs{@Ans}
% is executed as the default label.
%
% These parameters are saved in the commands \cs{eq@pPTs} and
% \cs{Ans@choice}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\Ans@list[2][0]{\gdef\eq@pPTs{#1}%
    \xdef\Ans@choice{#2}\item\relax\if\eq@listType1%
    \addtocounter{quizno}{-1}\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Answers environment for a list environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{answers@sq@list}[1]
{%
    \if\aeb@answerType r
        \let\endanswers\endanswers@sq@list\else
        \let\endmanswers\endanswers@sq@list\fi
    \list{\strut\@Ans}%
    {%
        \if\sqstar*\relax
            \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\eq@lw@f}\else
            \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\eq@lw@l}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    (2013/05/17) Incorporated \cs{aboveanswersSkip} into \cs{topsep}
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \setlength{\topsep}{-\parskip+\aboveanswersSkip}%
        \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}\setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
        \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}%
        \setlength{\listparindent}{\parindent}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    (2013/05/17) When inside the parts environment in tabular-mode,
%    we need to add in \cs{eqemargin}. For \textsf{exerquiz} defaults
%    to 0pt; when \textsf{eqexam} is used, it has a nonzero value.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifnum\exerwparts@cols>1
            \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth+\eqemargin}\else
%    \end{macrocode}
%    (2013/05/17) Some adjustments depending on whether \cs{solutionparshape}
%    is empty or not. If empty, \cs{leftmargin} is its usual value; otherwise
%    we add in \cs{eqemargin} (0pt in \textsf{exerquiz}, nonzero in \textsf{eqexam}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty
            \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}\else
            \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth+\eqemargin}\fi\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2013/10/10) I'm changing the \cs{labelsep}, one definition for \texttt{eqexam}
% another for \texttt{exerquiz}.
% to the following.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package|eqexam>
%<package>        \settowidth{\labelsep}{\eq@hspanner}%
%<eqexam>        \setlength{\labelsep}{0pt}%
%<*package|eqexam>
        \def\Ans{\Ans@list}%
    }%
}%
{\endlist\setcounter{quizno}{0}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Answers environment for a tabular environment. This command picks
% up the arguments of \cs{Ans}, then passes on the \cs{@Ans}
%\begin{verbatim}
% [#1] = points to be awarded if problem is false (partial credit)
%  #2  = 1 (for true) or 0 (for false)
%\end{verbatim}
% These parameters are saved in the commands \cs{eq@pPTs} and
% \cs{Ans@choice}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\Ans@tabular[2][0]{\gdef\eq@pPTs{#1}%
    \xdef\Ans@choice{#2}\leavevmode\@Ans
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    (2013/05/17) \DescribeMacro{\sqtabsep} sets the \cs{tabsep} between columns.
%    \DescribeMacro{\sqTabPos} \cs{sqTabPos} allows you to set the positioning
%    optional parameter (t,c,b) on the tabular env. The default is no optional parameter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\sqtabsep{1.5pt}
\def\sqTabPos#1{\def\sq@TabPos{[#1]}}\sqTabPos{}
\def\answers@@sq@tabular#1{%
    \ifinner\else\par\vskip-\parskip\vspace{\aboveanswersSkip}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    (2013/05/17) If within a parts environment in tabular mode, the tab env
%    needs to be shifted over by an amount of \cs{eqemargin}, for
%    \textsf{exerquiz} this is 0pt, nonzero for \textsf{eqexam}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \noindent\ifnum\exerwparts@cols>1\relax
        \hspace*{\eqemargin}\fi
    \tabcolsep=0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{verbatim}
%   n=#1
%   width=(\linewidth-2*(n-1)*\tabcolsep)/n
%\end{verbatim}
% In the next line, we adjust \cs{linewidth}, \cs{eqemargin} is \texttt{0pt}
% in \textsf{exerquiz} and nonzero otherwise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \setlength{\linewidth}{\linewidth-\eqemargin}%
    \eq@tmpdima=\linewidth
    \@tempcnta#1\relax
% n-1
    \advance\@tempcnta-1\relax
% 2(n-1)
    \multiply\@tempcnta by2
    \@tempdima\sqtabsep\relax
% 2*(n-1)*\partstabcolsep
    \multiply\@tempdima\@tempcnta
% \linewidth-(n-1)*\sqtabsep
    \advance\eq@tmpdima-\@tempdima
% (\linewidth-(n-1)*\sqtabsep)/n
    \divide\eq@tmpdima by#1
    \def\Ans{\Ans@tabular}%
    \tabcolsep\sqtabsep\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    (2013/05/17) We allow the position argument (t,b,c). It changed
%    through \cs{sqTabPos} defined above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\tabular\sq@TabPos{@{}*{#1}{p{\eq@tmpdima}}@{}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\endanswers}
%    Close off \texttt{tabular} environment, and reinitialize the
%    \texttt{quizno} counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endanswers@sq{\endtabular\setcounter{quizno}{0}}%
\def\endmanswers@sq{\endtabular\setcounter{quizno}{0}}%
\def\popiiictm{\special{CTM: pop pop pop}}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \subsubsection{Link Style}
%    \begin{macro}{\Ans@sq@l}
% For the link multiple choice type question. The driver independent stuff starts
% here, then goes to |\Ans@sq@l@driver| the rest of the code that depends on the
% driver.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sqWrongRespJS{OnBlurRespBox( false, "\oField" );}
\def\sqRightRespJS{OnBlurRespBox( true, "\oField" );}
\def\Ans@sq@l@Actions
{%
    \A{\if\Ans@choice1
        \JS{\sqRightRespJS}
        \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else
            \ifeq@solutionsafter\else
                /Next <</S/GoTo/D(\@qzsolndest)>>
            \fi
        \fi
    \else
        \JS{\sqWrongRespJS\jsR
        \ifx\oField\@empty\else
            updateTally("\oField.\thequestionno");
        \fi}%
    \fi
    }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\linkContentFormat{\alph{quizno}}
\def\aebChoiceAltFmt{\noexpand\ifaebshowgrayletters
    \Alph{quizno}\noexpand\else\alph{quizno}\noexpand\fi}
%</package>
%<*eqexam>
%\def\linkContentFormat{%
%    \if\probstar*\arabic{quizno}\else\alph{quizno}\fi}
\def\aebChoiceAltFmt{\noexpand\ifaebshowgrayletters
    \Alph{quizno}\noexpand\else\alph{quizno}\noexpand\fi}
\def\linkContentFormat{%
    \if\probstar*\Alph{quizno}\else\alph{quizno}\fi}
%</eqexam>
%<*package|eqexam>
%\def\linkContentFormat{\alph{quizno}}
\def\linkContentWrapper{(\hfil\linkContentFormat\hfil)}%
\def\Ans@sq@l{%
    \leavevmode\if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}%
    \else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\PBS\raggedright
    \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@l}\sbox{\eq@tmpbox}{\eq@l@l}%
    \eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox
    \def\link@@Content{\linkContentWrapper}%
    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
%</package|eqexam>
%<*eqexam>
    \Ans@sq@l@driver
%</eqexam>
%<*package>
    \set@@Link{}{}{}%
        {\makebox[\eq@tmpdima]{\color{\@linkcolor}\link@@Content}}
        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setWidgetProps\setLink@driver}%
        {\set@LinkTextDefaults\Ans@sq@l@Actions\every@Link}%
    \Ans@proofing{\eq@tmpdima}%
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\eq@hspanner\ignorespaces}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\Ans@ck@sq@l}
% Created in support of eqExam to give multiple selection for the
% online and email options.  Otherwise, it defaults to a radio button field.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Ans@ck@sq@l{\Ans@ck@sq@f}
%</package>
%<*eqexam>
% dps 4/16/05
\let\Ans@ck@sq@l\Ans@sq@l
%</eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \subsubsection{Form Style}
%    \begin{macro}{\Ans@sq@f}
% For the link multiple choice type question. The driver independent stuff starts
% here, then goes to |\Ans@sq@f@driver| the rest of the code that depends on the
% driver.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@Ans@sq@f@Defaults
{%
    \BC{0 0 0}\Ff{\FfNoToggleToOff}
    \textSize{12}\textColor{0 g}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% For short quizzes, refine the type of responses: turn off the alert
% message (the default is on); or have a (red) `\texttt{x}' make an
% incorrect answer, and a (green) check mark a correct answer.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sqTurnOffAlerts{\let\@sqTurnOffAlerts=0}
\def\sqTurnOnAlerts{\let\@sqTurnOffAlerts=1}
\sqTurnOnAlerts
%    \end{macrocode}
% This feature was discontinued sometime between version 5.x and 6.x.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sqNoCorrections{\let\@sqAlertsOnly=1}
\def\sqCorrections{\let\@sqAlertsOnly=0}
\sqNoCorrections
%    \end{macrocode}
% The actions for the form version of a multiple choice question of a \texttt{shortquiz}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Ans@sq@f@Actions
{%
    \A{\if\Ans@choice1%
        \JS{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.7d}{2013/05/27}{removed JS control of checks and color, they
% are hardwired instead.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1OnBlurRespBox(true,"\oField");\jsR\fi
        \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else
            \ifeq@solutionsafter\else
                jmpToNamedDest("\oField","\@qzsolndest",%
\if\@sqTurnOffAlerts00\else1\fi);\fi
        \fi}%
    \else
        \JS{%
            \if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1OnBlurRespBox( false, %
"\oField" );\jsR\fi
        \ifx\oField\@empty\else
            updateTally("\oField.\thequestionno");
        \fi}%
    \fi%
    }%
    \AA{\AAMouseDown{\JS{%
        updateTally.downState=!!event.target.isBoxChecked%
(\arabic{quizno}-1);}}}
}
\def\Ans@proofing
#1{%
    \ifeq@proofing\if\Ans@choice1\relax
        \llap{\@proofingsymbol\,\hskip#1\relax}%
    \fi\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\DescribeMacro{\sqRghtSymbChoice}\DescribeMacro{\sqRghtSymbColor} for the \texttt{shortquiz}
% environment, these first two commands assign the right symbol (default check) and
% color (default webgreen). The second two\DescribeMacro{\sqWrngSymbChoice}\DescribeMacro{\sqWrngSymbColor}
% does the same thing for the wrong answer.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sqRghtSymbChoice#1{\chooseJSsymbol*{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@retnStyle\@empty
    \edef\sq@corrsymch{\sqRghtSymbChoiceDef}\else
    \edef\sq@corrsymch{#1}\fi}
\def\sqRghtSymbColor#1{\edef\eq@arg{#1}\ifx\eq@arg\@empty
    \edef\sq@corrsymcol{\sqRghtSymbColorDef}\else
    \edef\sq@corrsymcol{#1}\fi}
\def\sqWrngSymbChoice#1{\chooseJSsymbol*{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@retnStyle\@empty
    \edef\sq@wrgsymch{\sqWrngSymbChoiceDef}\else
    \edef\sq@wrgsymch{#1}\fi}
\def\sqWrngSymbColor#1{\edef\eq@arg{#1}\ifx\eq@arg\@empty
    \edef\sq@wrgsymcol{\sqWrngSymbColorDef}\else
    \edef\sq@wrgsymcol{#1}\fi}
\def\sqRghtSymbChoiceDef{check}
\def\sqRghtSymbColorDef{0 .6 0 rg}
\def\sqWrngSymbChoiceDef{cross}
\def\sqWrngSymbColorDef{1 0 0 rg}
\edef\sq@corrsymch{\sqRghtSymbChoiceDef}
\edef\sq@corrsymcol{\sqRghtSymbColorDef}
\edef\sq@wrgsymch{\sqWrngSymbChoiceDef}
\edef\sq@wrgsymcol{\sqWrngSymbColorDef}
\def\sqResetSymbToDef{%
    \sqRghtSymbChoice{}\sqRghtSymbColor{}%
    \sqWrngSymbChoice{}\sqWrngSymbColor{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\DescribeMacro{\qChoiceSymb}\DescribeMacro{\qChoiceColor} for the \texttt{quiz}
% environment, these two commands assign the selection symbol (default check) and the
% color (default webgreen).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\qChoiceSymb#1{\chooseJSsymbol*{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@retnStyle\@empty
    \edef\qz@chksymb{\qChoiceSymbDef}\else
    \edef\qz@chksymb{#1}\fi}
\def\qChoiceColor#1{\edef\eq@arg{#1}\ifx\eq@arg\@empty
    \edef\qz@chksymbcol{\qChoiceColorDef}\else
    \edef\qz@chksymbcol{#1}\fi}
\def\qChoiceSymbDef{check}
\def\qChoiceColorDef{0 0 0 rg}
\edef\qz@chksymb{\qChoiceSymbDef}
\edef\qz@chksymbcol{\qChoiceColorDef}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\let\rbf@Opts\@empty
\def\Ans@sq@f{%
    \if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}%
    \else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\PBS\raggedright
%</package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.7d}{2013/05/27}{added \cs{rbf@Opts} to hardwire choices.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
    \if\Ans@choice1%
        \def\rbf@Opts{\symbolchoice{\sq@corrsymch}%
            \textColor{\sq@corrsymcol}}\else
        \def\rbf@Opts{\symbolchoice{\sq@wrgsymch}%
            \textColor{\sq@wrgsymcol}}\fi
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
    \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@f}%
    \eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox%
    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
    \insertGrayLetters % 6.3d
%</package|eqexam>
%<*eqexam>
    \Ans@sq@f@driver
%</eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.7d}{2013/05/27}{new \cs{rbf@Opts} option.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\radio@@Button\expandafter{\rbf@Opts}%
        {mc.\oField.\thequestionno}%
        {\RadioFieldSize}%dps11/16/05 changed from \oField to mc.\oField
        {\RadioFieldSize}{\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}{\eq@protect\A}%
        {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RadioCheck@driver}%
        {\@@Ans@sq@f@Defaults\Ans@sq@f@Actions\every@RadioButton
         \every@sqRadioButton}%
    \Ans@proofing{\RadioFieldSize}%
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\eq@hspanner\ignorespaces}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\Ans@ck@sq@f}
% Created in support of \textsf{eqExam} to give multiple selection for the
% online and email options.  Otherwise, it defaults to a radio button field.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*eqexam>
% dps 4/16/05
\let\Ans@ck@sq@f\Ans@sq@f
%</eqexam>
%<*package>
\def\@@Ans@ck@sq@f@Defaults
{%
    \BC{0 0 0}\Ff{\FfNoToggleToOff}
    \textSize{12}\textColor{0 g}
}
\begingroup
\catcode`\&=12
\gdef\eq@AND{&&}
\endgroup
\def\Ans@ck@sq@f@Actions
{%
    \A{\if\Ans@choice1%
        \JS{%
var fName=event.target.name;\jsR
var g=this.getField("mc.\oField.\thequestionno");\jsR
var a=g.getArray();\jsR
for (var i=0; i<a.length; i++)\jsR\jsT
	if ( a[i].isBoxChecked(0) \eq@AND\space
a[i].value.charAt(0)==0)\jsR\jsT\jsT
		a[i].checkThisBox(0,false);\jsR
            \if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1OnBlurRespBox( %
                true, "\oField" );\jsR\fi
        \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else
            \ifeq@solutionsafter\else
% if all correct answers are check, jump to solution
for (var i=0; i<a.length; i++){\jsR\jsT
    if ( a[i].exportValues[0].charAt(0)==1 \eq@AND\space
!a[i].isBoxChecked(0) )\jsR\jsT\jsT
        break;\jsR
}\jsR
    if (i>=a.length) jmpToNamedDest("\oField","\@qzsolndest",%
        \if\@sqTurnOffAlerts00\else1\fi);
            \fi
        \fi}%
    \else%
        \JS{%
var fName=event.target.name;\jsR
var g=this.getField("mc.\oField.\thequestionno");\jsR
var a=g.getArray();\jsR
for (var i=0; i<a.length; i++)\jsR
{\jsR\jsT
	if (a[i].value.charAt(0)==0) {\jsR\jsT\jsT
		if ( fName != a[i].name )\jsR\jsT\jsT\jsT
			a[i].checkThisBox(0,false);\jsR\jsT
	}\jsR
}\jsR
            \if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1OnBlurRespBox( false, "\oField" );\fi%
        \ifx\oField\@empty\else%
            updateTally("\oField.\thequestionno");
        \fi}%
    \fi%
    }%
    \AA{\AAMouseDown{%
\JS{updateTally.downState=!!event.target.isBoxChecked(0);}}}
}
\def\Ans@ck@sq@f{%
    \if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}%
    \else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\PBS\raggedright
    \if\Ans@choice1%
        \def\rbf@Opts{\symbolchoice{\sq@corrsymch}%
            \textColor{\sq@corrsymcol}}\else
        \def\rbf@Opts{\symbolchoice{\sq@wrgsymch}%
            \textColor{\sq@wrgsymcol}}\fi
    \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@f}%
    \eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox%
    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
    \insertGrayLetters % 6.3d
    \expandafter\check@@Box\expandafter{\rbf@Opts}%
        {mc.\oField.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}}%
        {\RadioFieldSize}{\RadioFieldSize}
        {\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}{\eq@protect\A}%
        {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RadioCheck@driver}%
        {\@@Ans@ck@sq@f@Defaults\Ans@ck@sq@f@Actions\every@CheckBox
         \every@sqCheckBox}%
    \Ans@proofing{\RadioFieldSize}%
\eq@hspanner\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \subsection{For \texttt{quiz}}
% \subsubsection{The \texttt{answers} and \texttt{manswers} Environment}
%    \begin{macro}{answers}
% This is the answers environment for the \texttt{quiz}
% environment.  The \texttt{quiz} environment states
% \verb+\let\answers=\answers@q+.  This is to avoid a conflict
% with \texttt{shortquiz}, which also as an \texttt{answers}
% environment.
%
% The following parameters are recognized:
%\begin{verbatim}
% [#1]|* = named destination to be associated with solution;
%          with *, the destination is automatically generated
%  #2    = number of columns in the tabular environment
%\end{verbatim}
% If the number of columns is $1$, then we use a list environment,
% else, we use a tabular environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\newskip\aboveanswersSkip
\setlength\aboveanswersSkip{3pt}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
\let\q@hwdest\@empty % hard-wired destination
\newcommand\answers@q
{%
    \eq@AddProbToQzQuesList
    \def\aeb@answerType{r}\setdefault@Ans
    \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\eqPTs}\stepcounter{questionno}%
    \def\aeb@thisType{"mc"}\@ifnextchar[{\answers@@q}%
    {\@ifstar{\answers@@q[\curr@quiz.\thequestionno]}{\answers@@q[]}}%
}
\def\answers@@q[#1]#2%
{%
    \xdef\aeb@numCols{#2}%
    \edef\eqtmp{\aPointType}%
    \xdef\aPointType{\eqtmp,[\eqPTs,\aeb@thisType]}%
    \ifx\q@hwdest\@empty
        \xdef\@qzsolndest{#1}\else
        \gdef\@qzsolndest{\q@hwdest}\fi
    \ifnum\aeb@numCols=1
        \gdef\eq@listType{1}\expandafter\answers@q@list
    \else
        \gdef\eq@listType{0}\expandafter\answers@q@tabular
    \fi{\aeb@numCols}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{manswers}
% The \texttt{manswers} environment is used for multiple selection questions for the quiz
% environment only. Within this environment, the \cs{Ans} command (\cs{@Ans} actually) is let equal to
% \cs{Ans@ck@f} or \cs{Ans@ck@l} for forms or links respectively. These commands are defined
% in the sections that follow.
% \changes{v6.2}{2007/11/08 }
%{
%   Added the \texttt{manswers} environment, and supporting elements, both {\LaTeX}
%   and JavaScript. This \texttt{manswers} environment is for the \texttt{quiz} environment
%   only. There is a \texttt{manswers} environment for the \texttt{shortquiz} environment, but
%   this is used by \textsf{eqExam} only.
%}
%
% The following parameters are recognized
%\begin{verbatim}
% [#1]|* = named destination to be associated with solution;
%          with *, the destination is automatically generated
%  #2    = number of columns in the tabular environment
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\manswers@q
{%
    \eq@AddProbToQzQuesList
    \def\aeb@answerType{c}\@setFormLinkType
    \global\expandafter\let\expandafter\@Ans
    \expandafter=\csname Ans@ck@\@@quiztype\endcsname
    \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\eqPTs}\stepcounter{questionno}%
    \def\aeb@thisType{"ms"}\@ifnextchar[{\answers@@q}%
    {\@ifstar{\answers@@q[\curr@quiz.\thequestionno]}{\answers@@q[]}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{answers@q@list}[1]
{%
    \let\endanswers\endanswers@q@list
    \let\endmanswers\endanswers@q@list %dps
%    \vskip\aboveanswersSkip
    \list{\strut\@Ans}%\
    {%
%        \usecounter{list@partno}%
        \if\qstar*\relax
            \if\aeb@FLOverride l
                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\eq@lw@l}%
            \else
                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\eq@lw@f}%
            \fi
        \else
            \if\aeb@FLOverride f
                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\eq@lw@f}%
            \else
                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\eq@lw@l}%
            \fi
        \fi
        \setlength{\topsep}{-\parskip+\aboveanswersSkip}
        \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}\setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
        \setlength{\listparindent}{\parindent}
        \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
        \setlength{\labelsep}{0pt}
        \def\Ans{\Ans@list}%
        %\def\Ans{\item\relax\eq@Ans}%
    }%
}{\endlist\setcounter{quizno}{0}%
% dps 12/20/03
    \setdefault@Ans
    \global\let\eqlimselTo\@empty
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\qztabsep{1.5pt}
\def\answers@q@tabular#1{%
    \vskip\aboveanswersSkip\noindent%\tabcolsep=0pt
%    \eq@tmpdima=\linewidth \advance\eq@tmpdima-\leftskip
%        \divide\eq@tmpdima by#1
    \eq@tmpdima=\linewidth
    \@tempcnta#1\relax
% n-1
    \advance\@tempcnta-1\relax
% 2(n-1)
    \multiply\@tempcnta by2
    \@tempdima\qztabsep\relax
% 2*(n-1)*\qztabsep
    \multiply\@tempdima\@tempcnta
% \linewidth-(n-1)*\qztabsep
    \advance\eq@tmpdima-\@tempdima
% (\linewidth-(n-1)*\qztabsep)/n
    \divide\eq@tmpdima by#1
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \tabcolsep\qztabsep\relax
    \def\Ans{\Ans@tabular}%
    \let\endanswers\endanswers@q@tabular
    \let\endmanswers\endanswers@q@tabular      %dps
    \tabular{@{}*{#1}{p{\eq@tmpdima}}@{}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\endanswers}
% Again, we put \verb+\let\endanswers=\endanswers@q+.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endanswers@q@tabular
{%
    \endtabular\setcounter{quizno}{0}%
% dps 12/20/03
    \setdefault@Ans
    \global\let\eqlimselTo\@empty
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \subsubsection{Link Style}
%    \begin{macro}{\Ans@l}
% For the forms version of the \texttt{quiz} environment.
% dps 12/19/03 removed the notify because we are not embedding a radio button field
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Ans@@l@Actions
{%
    \A{\JS{%
       this.getField("mc.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno").value
            = "\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}";\jsR
       RecordPointValue([0,\eqPTs,\eq@pPTs],\thequestionno);\jsR
       RecordProblemType("\eqQT",\thequestionno);\jsR
       ProcessQuestion(\Ans@choice,"\alph{quizno}",\thequestionno,%
\arabic{quizno},"\curr@quiz",0,\ifnocorrections0\else1\fi,%
"\bqlabelISO"\if\eqQuizType\isQZ\ifx\eq@online\eq@YES
\ifeq@noquizsolutions\else,1\fi\fi\fi)}%
    }%
}
\def\Ans@r@l@Defaults
{%
    \BC{}\S{S}\W{1}\Ff{\FfNoToggleToOff}
    \textSize{12}\textColor{0 g}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}
}
\def\Ans@l{\leavevmode\if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}%
    \else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\PBS\raggedright
    \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@l}\sbox{\eq@tmpbox}{\eq@l@l}%
    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
    \eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox
    \def\link@@Content{(\hfil\linkContentFormat\hfil)}%
% begin dps changes 12/19/03
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2013/10/24) Imperative that radio button has no boundary line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\late@options{\BC{}}%
    \makebox[0pt][l]{\radio@@Button{}{mc.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}%
        {\eq@tmpdima}{\RadioFieldSize}{\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}%
        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@l@check@driver}%
        {\Ans@r@l@Defaults\every@RadioButton
        \every@qRadioButton\late@options}}%
% end dps changes 12/19/03
    \set@@Link{}{}{}%
    {\makebox[\eq@tmpdima]{\color{\@linkcolor}\link@@Content}}%
    {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setWidgetProps\setLink@driver}%
    {\set@LinkTextDefaults\Ans@@l@Actions\every@Link}%
    \ifnocorrections\else
        \if\Ans@choice1\relax
            \edef\Ans@c@l@Choice{\noexpand\DV{Yes}%
                \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty
                    \noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
                \else % there is a solution
                    \ifeq@noquizsolutions
                        \noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
                    \else
                        \noexpand\A{\noexpand\quiz@SolutionActionHook}%
                    \fi
                \fi
            }%
        \else
            \def\Ans@c@l@Choice{\Ff{\FfReadOnly}\BC{}}%
        \fi
        \def\late@options{\BC{}}%
        \if\Ans@choice1\relax
            \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else
                \ifeq@noquizsolutions\else
                    \edef\late@options{\noexpand\BC{\solution@Color}}%
                \fi
            \fi
        \fi
        \makebox[0pt][r]{\check@@Box{}%
            {mcq.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}}%
            {\eq@tmpdima}{0pt}{Yes}{}% \@tempdimb
            {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@l@check@driver}%
            {\Ans@c@f@Defaults\Ans@c@l@Choice\every@RadioButton
             \every@qRadioButton\late@options}}%
    \fi
    \Ans@proofing{\eq@tmpdima}%
\eq@hspanner\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% Now for the code to support the \texttt{manswers} environment for link style.
%    \begin{macro}{\Ans@ck@l}
% Below is \cs{Ans@ck@l} and its supporting default appearances and actions. The command \cs{Ans@ck@l} defines
% a checkbox, on top of that a link (that the user interacts with) and on top another check box.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Ans@ck@@l@Actions
{%
    \A{\JS{%
       var ckfName="mck.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}";\jsR
       var ckf = this.getField(ckfName);\jsR
       ckf.checkThisBox(0,!ckf.isBoxChecked(0));\jsR
    var _bOK=true;\jsR
\ifx\eqlimselTo\@empty\else _bOK = LimitSelection(\eqlimselTo,%
"mck.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno","\arabic{quizno}");\jsR\fi
if (_bOK) {\jsR\jsT
       var aPMSretn=ProcessMultiSelection(\Ans@choice,"\alph{quizno}",%
\thequestionno,\arabic{quizno},"\curr@quiz",\eqPTs,\eq@pPTs);\jsR\jsT
       RecordProblemType("\eqQT",\thequestionno);\jsR\jsT
       ProcessQuestion(aPMSretn[0],aPMSretn[1],\thequestionno,%
\arabic{quizno},"\curr@quiz",0,\ifnocorrections0\else1\fi,%
"\bqlabelISO"\if\eqQuizType\isQZ\ifx\eq@online\eq@YES
\ifeq@noquizsolutions\else,1\fi\fi\fi);\jsR
}
    }}
}
\def\Ans@ck@l@Defaults
{%
    \BC{}\S{S}\W{1}\H{N}\Ff{\FfNoToggleToOff}
    \textSize{12}\textColor{0 g}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}
}
\def\Ans@ck@l{%
    \leavevmode\if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}%
    \else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\PBS\raggedright
    \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@l}\sbox{\eq@tmpbox}{\eq@l@l}%
    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
    \eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox
    \def\link@@Content{(\hfil\linkContentFormat\hfil)}%
% begin dps changes 12/19/03
    \makebox[0pt][l]{%
        \check@@Box{}{mck.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}}%
        {\eq@tmpdima}{\RadioFieldSize}{\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}%
        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@l@check@driver}%
        {\Ans@ck@l@Defaults\every@RadioButton
         \every@qckCheckbox}}%
% end dps changes 12/19/03
    \set@@Link{}{}{}%
    {\makebox[\eq@tmpdima]{\color{\@linkcolor}\link@@Content}}%
    {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setWidgetProps\setLink@driver}%
    {\set@LinkTextDefaults\Ans@ck@@l@Actions\every@Link}%
    \ifnocorrections\else
        \if\Ans@choice1\relax
            \edef\Ans@c@l@Choice{\noexpand\DV{Yes}%
                \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\noexpand\BC{}%
                \noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
                \else % there is a solution
                    \ifeq@noquizsolutions
                        \noexpand\BC{}\noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
                    \else
                        \noexpand\BC{\solution@Color}%
                        \noexpand\A{\noexpand\quiz@SolutionActionHook}%
                    \fi
                \fi
            }%
        \else
            \def\Ans@c@l@Choice{\Ff{\FfReadOnly}\BC{}}%
        \fi
        \makebox[0pt][r]{\check@@Box{}%
            {mcq.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}}%
            {\eq@tmpdima}{0pt}{Yes}{}%
            {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@l@check@driver}%
            {\Ans@c@f@Defaults\Ans@c@l@Choice\every@RadioButton
             \every@qRadioButton}}%
    \fi
    \Ans@proofing{\eq@tmpdima}%
\eq@hspanner\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \subsubsection{Form Style}
%    \begin{macro}{\Ans@f}
% For the form button multiple choice type question. The driver independent stuff starts
% here, then goes to |\Ans@f@driver| the rest of the code that depends on the
% driver.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Ans@f{\leavevmode\if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}%
    \else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\PBS\raggedright\Ans@@f}
\def\Ans@r@f@Defaults
{%
    \BC{0 0 0}\S{S}\W{1}\Ff{\FfNoToggleToOff}
    \textSize{12}\textColor{0 g}
}
% Action of the radio button field
\def\Ans@r@f@Actions
{%
    \A{\JS{%
        RecordPointValue([0,\eqPTs,\eq@pPTs],\thequestionno);\jsR
        RecordProblemType("\eqQT",\thequestionno);\jsR
        ProcessQuestion(\Ans@choice,"\alph{quizno}",\thequestionno,%
\arabic{quizno},"\curr@quiz",0,\ifnocorrections0\else1\fi,%
"\bqlabelISO"\if\eqQuizType\isQZ\ifx\eq@online\eq@YES
\ifeq@noquizsolutions\else,1\fi\fi\fi);}%
    }
}
% Action of the check box underlying the radio button field
\def\quiz@SolutionActionHook{%
    /S/GoTo/D(\@qzsolndest)/Next<<\JS{this.resetForm(%
        ["mcq.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}"]);}>>
}
\def\Ans@c@f@Defaults
{%
    \BC{0 0 0}\S{S}\W{1}\F{\FHidden}\textSize{12}
    \textColor{0 g}\symbolchoice{circle}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v6.05d}{2007/04/14}
% {
%   Added the command \cs{insertGrayLetters}. This can be defined to place symbols under
%   the multiple choice form boxes. The command \cs{bottomOfAnsfStack} is there as a
%   hook for whatever purposes are desired.
% }
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\bottomOfAnsfStack\relax
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
\def\insertGrayLetters{\ifaebshowgrayletters
    \rlap{\makebox[\RadioFieldSize]%
        {\textcolor{gray}{\Alph{quizno}}}}\else\relax\fi}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*package>
\def\Ans@@f
{%
    \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@f}%
    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1
    \bottomOfAnsfStack\insertGrayLetters
% dps add
\edef\rbf@Opts{\ifaeb@usecircles\else
    \noexpand\symbolchoice{\qz@chksymb}\fi
    \noexpand\textColor{\qz@chksymbcol}}%
    \expandafter\radio@@Button\expandafter{\rbf@Opts}%
        {mc.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}%
        {\RadioFieldSize}{\RadioFieldSize}{\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}%
        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RadioCheck@driver}%
        {\Ans@r@f@Defaults\Ans@r@f@Actions\every@RadioButton
         \every@qRadioButton\insert@circlesymbol}%
    \let\late@options\@empty
    \ifnocorrections\else
        \if\Ans@choice1\relax
            \edef\Ans@c@f@Choice{\noexpand\DV{Yes}%
                \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
                \else
                    \ifeq@noquizsolutions
                        \noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
                    \else
                        \noexpand\A{\noexpand\quiz@SolutionActionHook}%
                    \fi
                \fi
            }%
        \else
            \def\Ans@c@f@Choice{\Ff{\FfReadOnly}}%
        \fi
% dps add
%    \if\Ans@choice1%
%        \def\cbf@Opts{\symbolchoice{\qz@corrsymch}%
%            \textColor{\qz@corrsymcol}}\else
%        \def\cbf@Opts{\symbolchoice{\qz@wrgsymch}%
%            \textColor{\qz@wrgsymcol}}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v6.7h}{2013/08/19}{When the \cs{useMCCircles} is used, the boundary
% color is transparent. We try a fix for this to show the colored solution
% boundary. The fix uses the \cs{late@options} commands.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifaeb@usecircles\def\late@options{\BC{}}\fi
        \if\Ans@choice1\relax
            \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else
                \ifeq@noquizsolutions\else
                    \edef\late@options{\noexpand\BC{\solution@Color}}%
                \fi
            \fi
        \fi
        \makebox[0pt][r]{\check@@Box{}%
            {mcq.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}}%
            {\RadioFieldSize}{\RadioFieldSize}{Yes}{}%
            {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RadioCheck@driver}%
            {\Ans@c@f@Defaults\Ans@c@f@Choice\every@CheckBox
             \every@qCheckBox\late@options}}%
%(12/08/08) {\Ans@c@f@Defaults\Ans@c@f@Choice\every@RadioButton
%             \every@qRadioButton}}%
    \fi
    \Ans@proofing{\RadioFieldSize}%
\eq@hspanner\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\limitSelectionTo} limits the selection to the number specified
% by its argument for multiple selection questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\limitSelectionTo#1{\def\eqlimselTo{#1}}
\let\eqlimselTo\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\Ans@ck@f}
% The support for multiple selection answers within the \texttt{manswers} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Ans@ck@f{\leavevmode\if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}%
    \else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\PBS\raggedright\Ans@@ck@f}
\def\Ans@ck@f@Defaults
{%
    \BC{0 0 0}\S{S}\W{1}\Ff{\FfNoToggleToOff}
    \textSize{12}\textColor{0 g}
}
% Action of the radio button field
\def\Ans@ck@f@Actions
{%
    \A{\JS{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here is limit the number of selections. If \cs{eqlimselTo} is nonempty,
% we call \texttt{LimitSelection()} to count the number of checks in this
% current field. If too many, we uncheck the current effort and inform the
% user.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var _bOK=true;\jsR
\ifx\eqlimselTo\@empty\else _bOK = LimitSelection(\eqlimselTo,%
"mck.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno","\arabic{quizno}");\jsR\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% As a result of the previous changes, we make this a condition:
% if the JavaScript function \texttt{LimitSelection()} returns false, we do not execute. The default
% value is \texttt{\_bOK=true}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
if (_bOK) {\jsR\jsT
       var aPMSretn=ProcessMultiSelection(\Ans@choice,"\alph{quizno}",%
\thequestionno,\arabic{quizno},"\curr@quiz",\eqPTs,\eq@pPTs);\jsR\jsT
       RecordProblemType("\eqQT",\thequestionno);\jsR\jsT
       ProcessQuestion(aPMSretn[0],aPMSretn[1],\thequestionno,%
\arabic{quizno},"\curr@quiz",0,\ifnocorrections0\else1\fi,%
"\bqlabelISO"\if\eqQuizType\isQZ\ifx\eq@online\eq@YES
\ifeq@noquizsolutions\else,1\fi\fi\fi);\jsR
}
    }}%
}
% Action of the check box underlying the radio button field
\def\quiz@SolutionActionHook{%
    /S/GoTo/D(\@qzsolndest)/Next<<\JS{this.resetForm(%
["mcq.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}"]);}>>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{Ans@@ck@f} is the definition of the \cs{Ans} command within the
% \texttt{manswers} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Ans@@ck@f
{%
    \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@f}%
    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1
    \bottomOfAnsfStack\insertGrayLetters
%    \end{macrocode}
% The bottom most checkbox
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \bottomOfAnsfStack\insertGrayLetters
% dps add
\def\cbf@Opts{\symbolchoice{\qz@chksymb}%
    \textColor{\qz@chksymbcol}}%
    \expandafter\check@@Box\expandafter{\cbf@Opts}%
        {mck.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}}%
        {\RadioFieldSize}{\RadioFieldSize}{\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}%
        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RadioCheck@driver}%
        {\Ans@ck@f@Defaults\Ans@ck@f@Actions\every@RadioButton
        \every@qckCheckbox}%
    \ifnocorrections\else
        \if\Ans@choice1\relax
            \edef\Ans@c@f@Choice{\noexpand\DV{Yes}%
                \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
                \else
                    \ifeq@noquizsolutions
                        \noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
                    \else
                        \noexpand\A{\noexpand\quiz@SolutionActionHook}%
                    \fi
                \fi
            }%
        \else
            \def\Ans@c@f@Choice{\Ff{\FfReadOnly}}%
        \fi
        \let\late@options\@empty
        \if\Ans@choice1\relax
            \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else
                \ifeq@noquizsolutions\else
                    \edef\late@options{\noexpand\BC{\solution@Color}}%
                \fi
            \fi
        \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% The top most checkbox
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \makebox[0pt][r]{\check@@Box{}%
            {mcq.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\arabic{quizno}}%
            {\RadioFieldSize}{\RadioFieldSize}{Yes}{}%
            {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RadioCheck@driver}%
            {\Ans@c@f@Defaults\Ans@c@f@Choice\every@CheckBox
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2012/12/22) Replace \cs{every@qRadioButton} with \cs{every@qCheckBox}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \every@qCheckBox\late@options}}%
    \fi
    \Ans@proofing{\RadioFieldSize}%
\eq@hspanner\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{bChoices}/\protect\cs{eChoices}}
% {\textbackslash{bChoices}/\textbackslash{eChoices}} Pair}
% (2/15/05) This pair of macros is not really an environment, the
% \cs{eChoices} really does nothing other than to act as an ending marker. The idea
%behind this pair of macros twofold: (1) To provide a convenient way of listing
%alternate choices for a multiple choice questions, the ``environment'' makes it
%easy to change the number of columns, or to change from tabular to list (or visa-versa);
%(2) Laying out the alternatives in a list style, makes it easy to develop techniques
%of randomizing the alternatives. Here is an example of usage:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\begin{answers}{4}
%\bChoices[2]
%    \Ans0 a choice\eAns
%    \Ans1 another choice\eAns
%    \Ans0 still another choice\eAns
%    \Ans0 another\eAns
%    \Ans0 incoming\eAns
%    \Ans0 more choices\eAns
%    \Ans0 another still\eAns
%    \Ans0 too many\eAns
%    \Ans0 choices\eAns
%\eChoices
%\end{answers}
%\end{verbatim}
%\noindent The argument of the \texttt{answers} environment is $4$ which means we are
%going to use the tabular environment with $4$ columns. Now within those $4$ we are going
%to only use the first $2$ columns ( this is the optional argument of \cs{bChoices}.
%
% If the optional argument is removed from \cs{bChoices}, the choices are typeset
% in the with $4$ columns. If the argument of \cs{answers} is changed to $1$, then the
% optional argument of \cs{bChoices} is ignored, and the alternatives are typeset in a
% one column list environment.
%
% By changing the two parameters (one for \cs{answers} and one for \cs{bChoices})
% you can easily modify how the alternatives are typeset.
%\par\medskip\noindent
% This counter tracts the column number we are in.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\eq@tabColCnt
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\bChoices}
% This command has one optional argument, the number of columns to use.
%
% When the answer environment sets the number of columns, the answers are set in
% tabular form.  If you say \verb!\begin{answers}[4]!, four columns are used.
% If you then say \verb!\Choices[nCols=2]!, only the first two columns are used.
% To maintain backward compatibility, you can also say \verb!\Choices[2]!
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{bchoice}{nCols}{\def\bChoiceNumCols{#1}}
\@for\eqi:=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 \do{\edef\temp@expand@def{%
    \noexpand\define@key{bchoice}{\eqi}[\eqi]{%
        \noexpand\def\noexpand\bChoiceNumCols{\eqi}}%
    }\temp@expand@def
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The number of columns specified in the answers environment is saved as the value
% of \cs{aeb@numCols}. This the default value of \cs{bChoiceNumCols}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\bChoiceNumCols{\aeb@numCols}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This is the definition of the random key, a boolean.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{bchoice}{random}[true]{%
    \csname if#1\endcsname\eq@randomizeChoicestrue
        \else\eq@randomizeChoicesfalse\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v6.3x}{2011/04/05}{%
% Added \texttt{label} parameter to \cs{bChoices}.
%}
% A new key, \texttt{label}, if this label is specified, then we keep track of all the
% correct alternatives, put them into a commands to make them accessible by the user.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{bchoice}{label}[]{\xdef\bChoiceLabel{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{bChoices} command is now processed by the \texttt{keyval} package. There
% are two keys: \texttt{nCols} and \texttt{random}. The first key
% sets the number of columns we are limited to; the second one obviously declares
% that this list of choices should be randomized, a boolean. The \texttt{random}
% key is ignored unless the document author has use the \texttt{allowrandomize} option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\bChoices{\@ifnextchar[{\@ansChoices}{\@ansChoices[\aeb@numCols]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \cs{numCols} is $1$, we use a list environment, otherwise, a tabular is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ansChoices[#1]%
{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We initialize some variables that the new label option uses.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \global\let\@tempholdSaveAns\@empty %4/5
    \global\let\@tempholdSaveChoice\@empty %4/5
    \global\let\bChoiceLabel\@empty %4/5
    \setkeys{bchoice}{#1}%
    \global\eq@tabColCnt=0
    \ifnum\aeb@numCols=1 % list mode
        \def\eq@next{\@layoutListAns}%
    \else % tabular mode
         \def\eq@next{\@layoutTabularAns{\bChoiceNumCols}}%
    \fi
    \eq@next
}
\let\eChoices\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% If the next token is \cs{Ans} we grab its all stuff between
% \cs{Ans} and \cs{eAns} and typeset it. We continue until the
% next token is not \cs{Ans}. (This last token
% should be \cs{eChoices}.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@layoutListAns{\@ifnextchar\Ans{\@getListAns}%
    {\@lookforendansChoices{\@layoutListAns}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v6.3x}{2011/04/05}{%
% Supporting commands that use the value of the \texttt{label} parameter
% of \cs{bChocies}: \cs{eq@saveAns}, \cs{eq@displayAns}, \cs{eq@displayAlts}, etc.
%}
% \texttt{4/5} We begin an experimental series of commands. The idea is to be able to
% conveniently reference a multiple choice problem when the
% \texttt{vspacewithsolns} option is in effect (\textsf{eqexam}).
%
% \cs{eq@saveAns} is an internal macro, it gathers up the first two
% arguments of \cs{Ans}, if the second arg is a 1, it passes the flow
% to \cs{@@@SaveAns}; otherwise, it gobbles all leftovers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\eq@saveAns}[2][]{%
    \let\eq@next\@@@SaveAnsGobbleAns
    \ifx\bChoiceLabel\@empty\else
    \def\eq@savedAnsOpt{#1}\def\eq@savedAnsZO{#2}%
    \if\eq@savedAnsZO1 \let\eq@next\@@@SaveAns\fi
    \fi\eq@next
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{@@@SaveAns} collects the answer to the problem, and placed
% it in the holding command \cs{@tempholdSaveAns}, it also saves
% the alternative letter as well in \cs{@tempholdSaveChoice}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@@@SaveAns#1\eAns{% 4/5
    \g@addto@macro\@tempholdSaveAns{\\{\ignorespaces#1}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% This code is expanded before the \cs{Ans} command is, so we'll simulate
% incrementing the \texttt{quizno} counter, \dots
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \addtocounter{quizno}{1}%
    \edef\temp@expand{\noexpand\g@addto@macro\noexpand
    \@tempholdSaveChoice{%
%        \noexpand\\{\ifaebshowgrayletters\Alph{quizno}\else
%        \thequizno\fi}}}\temp@expand
        \noexpand\\{\ifx\sqstar\@empty\aebChoiceAltFmt\else
        \ifaebshowgrayletters\Alph{quizno}\else
        \thequizno\fi\fi}}}\temp@expand
%    \end{macrocode}
% and decrement when we are finished adding to the token list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \addtocounter{quizno}{-1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{eq@displayAns} is \cs{let} to \verb!\\!. Definition and name may change.
% \cs{useSaveAns} is a simple interface to accessing the list of all correct
% answers. Probably this definition will change.
%
% \cs{eq@insertComma} is a simple way of delimiting the list. We put a  comma
% before each expression, except for the first one.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@insertComma{\ifx\eq@comma\@empty\def\eq@comma{,}\else
    \eq@comma\space\fi}
\long\def\eq@displayAns#1{\eq@insertComma#1} % 4/5
\def\eq@displayAlts#1{\eq@insertComma(#1)} % 4/5
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\useSavedAns}
%    \begin{macro}{\useSavedAlts}
%    \begin{macro}{\useSavedAltsAns}
%    \begin{macro}{\useSavedNumAns}
% \changes{v6.3x}{2011/04/05}{%
% Added \cs{useSavedAns}, \cs{useSavedAlts}, and \cs{useSavedAltsAns}.
%}
% These three commands hold the correct alternatives and answers to a multiple choice
% or multiple selection problem. The optional first argument allows you to display
% a particular result, the second argument is the value of the \texttt{label} key-value,
% given in the enclosing \cs{bChoices}/\cs{eChoices} ``environment.''
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\useSavedAns}[2][]{% 4/5
    \bgroup\let\label\@gobble
        \def\eq@argi{#1}\ifx\eq@argi\@empty
            \let\eq@comma\@empty
            \let\\\eq@displayAns\csname SavedAns#2\endcsname\else
            \csname SavedAns#2-Idx#1\endcsname\fi
    \egroup
} % 4/5
\newcommand{\useSavedAlts}[2][]{%
    \bgroup
        \def\eq@argi{#1}\ifx\eq@argi\@empty
            \let\eq@comma\@empty
            \let\\\eq@displayAlts\csname SavedAlts#2\endcsname\else
            (\csname SavedAlts#2-Idx#1\endcsname)\fi
    \egroup
} % 4/5
\newcommand{\useSavedAltsAns}[2][]{%
    \bgroup\let\label\@gobble
        \def\eq@argi{#1}\ifx\eq@argi\@empty
            \csname SavedAltsAns#2\endcsname\else
            (\csname SavedAlts#2-Idx#1\endcsname)
            \csname SavedAns#2-Idx#1\endcsname\fi
    \egroup
} %4/5
\newcommand{\useSavedNumAns}[1]{\csname NumAns#1\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@@@SaveAnsGobbleAns#1\eAns{} % 4/5
%    \end{macrocode}
% This command gets, and sets the list of alternatives
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@getListAns\Ans#1\eAns{%\@@par %start new paragraph
%    \end{macrocode}
% We record the list as we process each item.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \eq@saveAns#1\eAns % 4/5
    \Ans#1\vspace{\@rowskip}%
    \@layoutListAns
}
\long\def\@lookforendansChoices#1{%
    \@ifnextchar\eChoices{\rowsep{\rowsep@default}%
        \expandafter\@findendans\@gobble}{\expandafter#1\@gobble}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The argument is the number of columns to typeset, this number
% is forced to be \texttt{<=} to the number of columns specified in the \texttt{answers}
% environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@layoutTabularAns#1{%
    \let\eq@tabSep\@empty
    \xdef\numShortCols{#1}%
    \ifnum#1>\aeb@numCols \xdef\numShortCols{\aeb@numCols}\fi
    \@@layoutTabularAns
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the next token is \cs{Ans} we grab its all stuff between
% \cs{Ans} and \cs{eAns} and typeset it and insert the appropriate
% token, either \texttt{\&} or \texttt{\string\cr}.
% We continue until the next token is not \cs{Ans}. (This last token
% should be \cs{eChoices}.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@layoutTabularAns{%
    \@ifnextchar\Ans{\@getTabAns}%
        {\@lookforendansChoices{\@@layoutTabularAns}}%
}
\def\rowsep#1{\gdef\@rowsep{[#1]}\gdef\@rowskip{#1}}%
\rowsep{\rowsep@default}
\def\rowsepDefault#1{\def\rowsep@default{#1}}
\def\rowsep@default{0pt}
\long\def\@getTabAns\Ans#1\eAns{%
    \eq@saveAns#1\eAns
    \global\advance\eq@tabColCnt1
    \let\@save@tabSep=\eq@tabSep
    \ifnum\eq@tabColCnt=\numShortCols
        \global\eq@tabColCnt=0
            \xdef\eq@tabSep{\noexpand\\\noalign{\kern\@rowskip\relax}}%
    \else
        \gdef\eq@tabSep{&}%
    \fi
    \@ifnextchar\eChoices{\@save@tabSep\Ans#1\rowsep{\rowsep@default}
        \expandafter\@findendans\@gobble}%
        {\@save@tabSep\Ans#1\@@layoutTabularAns}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This command, I think, is executed after we've found the \cs{eChoices}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@findendans{\@ifnextchar\end{% 4/5
%    \end{macrocode}
% If there is a \cs{bChoiceLabel} we process the alternatives.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\bChoiceLabel\@empty\else
    \processLabeledAns\fi
    }{\expandafter\@findendans\@gobble}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The command that processes the alternatives.
% \changes{v6.7g}{2013/08/09}{Changed \texttt{\#1} to \cs{the}\cs{@temptokena} Fixing
% a nasty bug. Reported by Christopher C.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\defineEachAns#1{\advance\count0by1\relax
    \@temptokena={#1}\expandafter\xdef
    \csname SavedAns\bChoiceLabel-Idx\the\count0\endcsname
        {\the\@temptokena}\ifsolutionsonly\else
        {\let\\\relax\eq@IWDefs{%
    \string\expandafter\string\gdef\string\csname\space
    SavedAns\bChoiceLabel-Idx\the\count0%
    \string\endcsname{\the\@temptokena}}}\fi
}
\def\defineEachChoice#1{\advance\count0by1\relax
    \@temptokena={#1}\expandafter\xdef
    \csname SavedAlts\bChoiceLabel-Idx\the\count0\endcsname
        {\the\@temptokena}\ifsolutionsonly\else
        {\let\\\relax\eq@IWDefs{%
    \string\expandafter\string\gdef\string\csname\space
    SavedAlts\bChoiceLabel-Idx\the\count0%
    \string\endcsname{\the\@temptokena}}}\fi
}
\def\processLabeledAns{% 4/5 \@tempholdSaveAns \@tempholdSaveChoice
    \bgroup
        \let\label\@gobble
        \toks@=\expandafter{\@tempholdSaveAns}\expandafter
        \xdef\csname SavedAns\bChoiceLabel\endcsname{\the\toks@}%
        \ifsolutionsonly\else{\let\\\relax\eq@IWDefs{%
        \string\expandafter\string\gdef\string\csname\space
        SavedAns\bChoiceLabel\string\endcsname{\the\toks@}}}\fi
        \count0=0\relax\let\\\defineEachAns\the\toks@
        \xdef\@currNCntAns{\the\count0 }\expandafter
        \xdef\csname NumAns\bChoiceLabel\endcsname{\@currNCntAns}%
        \ifsolutionsonly\else{\eq@IWDefs{%
        \string\expandafter\string\gdef\string\csname\space
        NumAns\bChoiceLabel\string\endcsname{\the\count0 }}}\fi
        \toks@=\expandafter{\@tempholdSaveChoice}\expandafter
        \xdef\csname SavedAlts\bChoiceLabel\endcsname{\the\toks@}%
        \ifsolutionsonly\else{\let\\\relax\eq@IWDefs{%
        \string\expandafter\string\gdef\string\csname\space
        SavedAlts\bChoiceLabel\string\endcsname{\the\toks@}}}\fi
        \count0=0\relax\let\\\defineEachChoice\the\toks@
        \count0=1\relax\toks@={\ignorespaces\@gobble}%
        \loop
            \edef\temp@exp{\the\toks@, %
            \noexpand\useSavedAlts[\the\count0]{\bChoiceLabel}
            \noexpand\useSavedAns[\the\count0]{\bChoiceLabel}}%
            \toks@=\expandafter{\temp@exp}%
            \ifnum\count0<\@currNCntAns
            \advance\count0by1
        \repeat
        \expandafter
        \xdef\csname SavedAltsAns\bChoiceLabel\endcsname{\the\toks@}%
        \ifsolutionsonly\else{\let\\\relax\eq@IWDefs{%
        \string\expandafter\string\gdef\string\csname\space
        SavedAltsAns\bChoiceLabel\string\endcsname{\the\toks@}}}\fi
    \egroup
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*randomize>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Randomizing the Order of the Multiple Choices}\label{randomize}
%
% When the author wants to randomize the multiple choices, we require the \texttt{keyval}
% package and the \texttt{random.tex} macro file.  This works only when using \cs{bChoices}
% and \cs{eChoices}. The use of \cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} is limited to non-verbatim
% items.
%
% The \texttt{random.tex}, by Donald Arseneau, provides the random number support.
%\changes{v6.7f}{2013/08/03}{Added conditional input of random.tex}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{nextrandom}{\input{random.tex}}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% We redefine \cs{nextrandom} from \texttt{random.tex} to save the initializing seed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\nextrandom{\begingroup
 \ifnum\randomi<\@ne % then initialize with time
    \global\randomi\time
    \global\multiply\randomi388 \global\advance\randomi\year
    \global\multiply\randomi31 \global\advance\randomi\day
    \global\multiply\randomi97 \global\advance\randomi\month
    \message{Randomizer initialized to \the\randomi.}%
    \nextrandom \nextrandom \nextrandom
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save the initial seed value to \cs{eqInitSeedValue}.
% \changes{v1.0c}{2013/08/03}{Save the initial seed value to \cs{rtInitSeedValue}.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \xdef\InitSeedValue{\the\randomi}%
 \fi
 \count@ii\randomi
 \divide\count@ii 127773 % modulus = multiplier * 127773 + 2836
 \count@\count@ii
 \multiply\count@ii 127773
 \global\advance\randomi-\count@ii % random mod 127773
 \global\multiply\randomi 16807
 \multiply\count@ 2836
 \global\advance\randomi-\count@
 \ifnum\randomi<\z@ \global\advance\randomi 2147483647\relax\fi
 \endgroup
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{bChoices} command is now processed by the \texttt{keyval} package. There
% are two keys: \texttt{nCols} and \texttt{random}. The first key
% sets the number of columns we are limited to; the second one obviously declares
% that this list of choices should be randomized, a boolean.
%
% We redefine \cs{@ansChoices} above to take key-value optional arguments.
% We allow for a global override of the random key. If random is true, we
% call \cs{@@bChoices}, which begins the process of randomization; otherwise
% we call \cs{@@ansChoices} which is roughly equal to the earlier
% \cs{@ansChoices}.
% \changes{v6.1}{2007/10/28}
% {%
%   Added support for randomizing the multiple choices, requires the use of \cs{bChoices}
%   and \cs{eChoices}.
% }
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ansChoices[#1]%
{%
    \global\let\@tempholdSaveAns\@empty % 5/24
    \global\let\@tempholdSaveChoice\@empty % 5/24
    \global\let\bChoiceLabel\@empty % 5/24
    \ifeq@randomizeallChoices
        \setkeys{bchoice}{#1,random=true}\else
        \setkeys{bchoice}{#1}\fi
    \global\eq@tabColCnt=0
    \ifeq@randomizeChoices\expandafter\@@bChoices
    \else\expandafter\@@ansChoices\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This is actually the old \cs{@ansChoices} only slightly modified.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@ansChoices{%
    \ifnum\aeb@numCols=1 % list mode
        \def\eq@next{\@layoutListAns}%
    \else % tabular mode
        \edef\eq@next{\noexpand\@layoutTabularAns{\bChoiceNumCols}}%
    \fi
    \eq@next
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following are some registers to hold integers and tokens.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\aeb@numChoices
\newcount\aeb@ranChoice
\newtoks\aeb@hold\aeb@hold={}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This is the command that begins the randomization of the alternatives.
% First we initialize some scratch macros to hold the choices, then
% we look for the next token, if it is \cs{Ans} we then execute \cs{@getAns}
% otherwise, we're finished.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@bChoices{\gdef\@temphold{}\gdef\@tempholdrandom{}%
    \gdef\@tempholdfreeze{}\aeb@searchfortoken{\@getAns}%
}
\def\aeb@searchfortoken#1{%
    \@ifnextchar\Ans{\advance\aeb@numChoices1\relax#1}
        {\@ifnextchar\eFreeze{\expandafter\@getFreezeAns\@gobble}
        {\@ifnextchar\par{\def\@@temp{\aeb@searchfortoken{#1}}%
        \expandafter\@@temp\@gobble}{\@eChoices}}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The non-frozen questions will be held in the macro \cs{@temphold}.
% We keep track of the number of choices using the counter \cs{aeb@numChoices}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@getAns\Ans#1\eAns{%
    \g@addto@macro\@temphold{{\Ans#1\eAns}}%
    \aeb@searchfortoken{\@getAns}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% We've encountered \cs{eFreeze}, if the next token is \cs{Ans}, go get the
% choices, otherwise, we are finished.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@getFreezeAns{\aeb@searchfortoken{\@@getFreezeAns}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get the frozen choice, then look for another. Hold these frozen choices
% in the macro \cs{@tempholdfreeze}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@@getFreezeAns\Ans#1\eAns{%
    \g@addto@macro\@tempholdfreeze{\Ans#1\eAns}%
    \aeb@searchfortoken{\@@getFreezeAns}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% When we are finished finding all the choices, we come here to randomize the choices.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@eChoices#1\eChoices{%
    \aeb@randomizeChoices{\the\aeb@numChoices}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The routine that randomizes the choices. Basically, we use \texttt{random.tex} to get
% a random number between one and \cs{aeb@numChoices}, inclusive. Then we search through
% the list of choices (\cs{@temphold}, moved to \cs{aeb@hold}). The one selected at random
% is moved to \cs{@tempholdrandom}, and the rest of the choices are moved to \cs{@temphold},
% here \cs{aeb@hold} is used as a scratch token register.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\aeb@randomizeChoices#1{%
    \setrannum{\aeb@ranChoice}{1}{#1}
    \count0=0 \aeb@hold=\expandafter{\@temphold}\def\@temphold{}%
    \expandafter\@tfor\expandafter
        \@temp\expandafter:\expandafter=\the\aeb@hold \do {%
        \advance\count0by1
        \ifnum\count0=\aeb@ranChoice
            \aeb@hold=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
                {\expandafter\@tempholdrandom\@temp}%
            \edef\@tempholdrandom{\the\aeb@hold}%
        \else
            \aeb@hold=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
                {\expandafter\@temphold\expandafter{\@temp}}%
            \edef\@temphold{\the\aeb@hold}%
        \fi
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We repeat this process a total of \cs{aeb@numChoices}, the original count of the number
% of choices. Once finished, we go to \cs{aeb@finishedRandomizing} to lay out the
% randomized choices for typesetting.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \aeb@numChoices=#1
    \advance\aeb@numChoices-1
    \ifnum\aeb@numChoices=0\relax
        \def\aeb@next{\aeb@finishedRandomizing}\else
        \def\aeb@next{\aeb@randomizeChoices{\the\aeb@numChoices}}\fi
    \aeb@next
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This command assembles the questions held in random order in the command \cs{@tempholdrandom} and
% the frozen ones held in \cs{@tempholdfreeze}, and lays out the choices for typesetting.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\aeb@finishedRandomizing{%
    \aeb@hold=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
        {\expandafter\@tempholdrandom\@tempholdfreeze}%
    \gdef\@temphold{}\gdef\@tempholdrandom{}\gdef\@tempholdfreeze{}%
    \edef\finished@Randomizing{%
    \noexpand\@@ansChoices
    \the\aeb@hold
    \noexpand\eChoices}%
    \finished@Randomizing
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\saveRandomSeed}
%    \begin{macro}{\inputRandomSeed}
%    \begin{macro}{\useRandomSeed}
%
% \cs{saveRandomSeed} causes \texttt{exerquiz/eqexam} to save the last random seed used.
%
% When you have labels, as we might have in a list of multiple choices, the save feature
% needs to be turned off for several runs of latex until the label reference
% becomes up to date.
%
% \cs{inputRandomSeed} causes \texttt{exerquiz/eqexam} to input the last random seed used, if
% one exists, to re-seed the randomization so a new random sequence
% will be generated. This allows you to get a new sequence every time
% you latex.
%
% (2013/09/17) Made a number of changes so that the randomization of \cs{bChoices}
% and \cs{eChoices} works well with the \textsf{ran\_toks}. There is a lot of common
% code, and commands with the same name. I've also change from using the aux file
% \cs{jobname\_ran.sav} to \cs{jobname\_rt.sav}, the latter being the aux file used
% by \textsf{ran\_toks}. Now, there share a common aux file and common initial and final
% seeds.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\def\saveRandomSeed{\AtEndDocument{\eq@writeRandomData}}
\def\saveRandomSeed{\PackageInfo{exerquiz}
    {The command \string\saveRandomSeed\space
    is deprecated.\MessageBreak Seed automatically saved}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% I \cs{let} the commands in this file to the companion commands in \textsf{ran\_toks} file.
% The user can use either set of commands \cs{inputRandomSeed} or \cs{useLastSeed} as one
% pair and \cs{useRandomSeed} and \cs{useThisSeed} as the other pair.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifpackageloaded{ran_toks}{%
    \let\inputRandomSeed\useLastAsSeed
    \let\useRandomSeed\useThisSeed
}{%
    \def\inputRandomSeed{\eq@readRandomData}%
    \def\useRandomSeed#1{\saveseedfalse\randomi=#1}%
}
\def\InitSeedValue{\the\randomi} % dps
\@ifundefined{ifsaveseed}{\newif\ifsaveseed\saveseedtrue}{} % dps
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@writeRandomData
{%
    \ifsaveseed
        \@ifundefined{saveseedinfo}{\newwrite\saveseedinfo}{}
        \immediate\openout \saveseedinfo \jobname_rt.sav
        \let\verbatim@out\saveseedinfo
        \def\eqrt@msgi{initializing seed value}%
        \def\eqrt@msgii{last random number used}%
        \uccode`c=`\%\uppercase{%
            \immediate\write\verbatim@out
                {\InitSeedValue\space c \eqrt@msgi}%
            \immediate\write\verbatim@out
                {\the\randomi\space c \eqrt@msgii}%
        }\immediate\closeout\saveseedinfo
    \fi
}
\AtEndDocument{\eq@writeRandomData}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save the data to the file \cs{jobname\_ran.sav}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@readRandomData{\IfFileExists{\jobname_rt.sav}{%
    \PackageInfo{exerquiz}{Inputting \jobname_rt.sav}%
   \@ifundefined{readsavfile}{\newread\readsavfile}{}%
    \openin\readsavfile=\jobname_rt.sav
    \read\readsavfile to \InitSeedValue
    \read\readsavfile to \eqlastRandomNum
    \closein\readsavfile
    \randomi=\eqlastRandomNum
    \xdef\InitSeedValue{\the\randomi}%
    \immediate\closeout\readsavfile
}{%
    \PackageInfo{exerquiz}{\jobname_rt.sav cannot
    be found, \MessageBreak
    using the random initializer}%
}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</randomize>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\subsection{In Support of showgrayletters}
%
% This is a hack to reference multiple choice questions when the
% \texttt{showgrayletters} option is in effect. We define \cs{REF} to
% return the uppercase version of the letters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package|eqexam>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\graylettersOn}
%    \begin{macro}{\graylettersOff}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\graylettersOn{\aebshowgrayletterstrue}
\def\graylettersOff{\aebshowgraylettersfalse}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\aeb@exiii{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\REF}
% Same syntax as \cs{ref}, including a \texttt{*} option. the
% \texttt{*} version does not create a link. If
% \texttt{showgrayletters} is not in effect, then \cs{REF} is
% equivalent to \cs{ref}.
%\changes{v6.06c}{2007/04/26}
%{
%   Added \cs{REF} in support of the \texttt{showgrayletters} option.
%}
%\changes{v6.4d}{2011/07/14}{%
%   Correct \cs{REF} so that a link is created.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\REF{\@ifstar{\let\isREFstar=1\aeb@REFstar}
    {\let\isREFstar=0\aeb@REF}}
\def\aeb@REFstar#1{\@ifundefined{r@#1}{\hbox{\reset@font\bfseries ??}}
    {\ifaebshowgrayletters\aeb@buildUpperCaseRef{#1}%
     \else\ref*{#1}\fi}%
}
\def\aeb@REF#1{\@ifundefined{r@#1}{\hbox{\reset@font\bfseries ??}}
    {\ifaebshowgrayletters\aeb@buildUpperCaseRef{#1}%
     \else\ref{#1}\fi}%
}
%</package|eqexam>
%<*eqexam>
\def\aeb@buildUpperCaseRef#1{%
    \xdef\tmp@expand{\aeb@exiii\@firstoftwo\csname r@#1\endcsname}%
    \xdef\tmp@expand{\uppercase{\tmp@expand}}\tmp@expand
}
%</eqexam>
%<*package>
\def\aeb@buildUpperCaseRef#1{%
    \xdef\tmp@expand{\aeb@exiii\@firstoffive\csname r@#1\endcsname}%
    \xdef\tmp@expand{\uppercase{\tmp@expand}}%
    \if\isREFstar1\tmp@expand\else\hyperref[#1]{\tmp@expand}\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
%    \subsection{Circles instead of Rectangles}
%
% For quizzes only, there is now an way to use circles for the radio button
% fields for multiple choice questions (not for multiple selection questions, however).
%
%    \begin{macro}{\useMCCircles}
% Execute this command prior to the quiz you want to use circular radio buttons. The command
% saves the values of \cs{every@qRadioButton} and \cs{every@qCheckBox}, then uses the
% every mechanism to set the all radio buttons created in a quiz to a circle symbol, we also
% set all check boxes used in multiple choice question to a transparent border.
%
%\changes{v6.3j}{2008/12/08}
%{
%   Added \cs{useMCCircles} and \cs{useMCCRects}.
%}
% \par\medskip\noindent We use a switch to keep track of ``circle mode.'' If the
% document author invokes \cs{useMCCircles} when we are already in circle mode,
% \cs{useMCCircles} does nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifaeb@usecircles\aeb@usecirclesfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\insert@circlesymbol\@empty
\def\useMCCircles{\useForms
    \ifaeb@usecircles\else
        \global\aeb@usecirclestrue
        \gdef\insert@circlesymbol{\symbolchoice{circle}}%
    \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\useMCRects}
% We can restore the default behavior by executing \cs{useMCRects} prior to the next quiz.
% The command restores the state of \cs{every@qRadioButton} and \cs{every@qCheckBox}
% to their values prior to the last invocation of \cs{useMCCircles}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\useMCRects{\useForms
    \ifaeb@usecircles\global\aeb@usecirclesfalse
        \global\let\insert@circlesymbol\@empty
    \fi
}
\let\useMCCRects\useMCRects
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
%    \section{Objective Style Questions}
%
% The code for objective style questions is very simple. The
% evaluation of the  user's response is done by JavaScript. The
% JavaScript is inserted into the PDF file through DLJS. For
% authors using \textsf{pdftex} or \textsf{dvipdfm}, this process
% is automatic; for authors using the distiller (hence, would use
% the \texttt{dvips} or \texttt{dvipsone} option), the solution is
% also automatic if you  use \textbf{Acrobat 5.0}. If you do not have
% the latest version  of Acrobat, the DLJS must be inserted
% manually using the \texttt{Document > Insert Pages} menu item. See
% paragraphs below for a little more detail, or see the manual.
%
% There are two kinds of questions that can be posed (actually only one type):
% (1) a question that has a numerical answer;
% (2) a question that has a symbolic answer in one variable,
% $x$. The symbolic answer must reduce, however, to a numerical value when
% $x$ is given a numerical value.  Thus, only questions whose answers can
% be reduced to numerical values can be posed.
%
% If the author has Acrobat 5.0, the \textsf{exerquiz} package should be
% built using the \texttt{Acrobatv} option in the
% \textsf{exerquiz.ins} file. In this case, Document level
% Javascript will be input when the newly distilled file is
% first opened in the Acrobat Viewer. If the function ``CkBalP'' is
% undefined, the we input the FDF file contained the Doc Level JS.
% The file needs to be saved (Save As) for the Doc Level JS to
% remain in the PDF file.
%
% In the case of the author using Acrobat 4.0, he/she needs to load
% manually insert the \texttt{eq\_DLJS.pdf} file. If only exercises
% are used, this insertion is not needed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\oQuestion}
% This was my first attempt and I have not deleted it from the package yet.
% Useful for posing a single question only. The argument is the (unique) name
% of this question. This name is used to define the macro \cmd{\oField} which is used
% by support macros.  The \texttt{shortquiz} environment can also be used for
% single/multiple questions as well.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\oqpriorhook\@empty
\newenvironment{oQuestion}[1]
{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% (06/08/10) The next two lines initialize the macros for registering the
% question label, i.e., \texttt{2(a)(ii)}. These two lines are repeated for
% the \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{quiz} environments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    \let\@eqListExp\relax
    \let\@currentQues\@empty
    \xdef\eq@pageThisQ{\the\c@page}%
    \global\let\eqQzQuesList\@empty
    \xdef\oField{#1}\xdef\curr@quiz{#1}\xdef\currQuiz{#1}%
    \let\@qzsolndest\@empty
    \stepcounter{questionno}%
    \let\eqQuizType\isSQZ\gdef\eqPTs{1}\global\let\eqQT\eq@na
    \let\answers\answers@sq
    \let\endanswers\endanswers@sq
    \let\manswers\manswers@sq
    \let\endmanswers\endmanswers@sq
    \let\solution\solution@sq
    \let\endsolution\endsolution@sq
    \noindent\oqpriorhook\ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty
    \else\aebtitleQuiz\fi\ignorespaces
}{%
    \global\let\aebtitleQuiz\@empty
    \global\let\aebTitleQuiz\@empty
    \global\let\eq@tq@star\relax
}
\def\oSolution#1{\edef\@qzsolndest{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\replaceExclPt}
% When processing a mathematical expression, replace \texttt{n!} or \texttt{(n)!} with
% \texttt{fact(n)}. Used with the \texttt{combinatorics} option of \textsf{dljslib} package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\replaceExclPt#1{\def\replaceexclaim{#1}}
\replaceExclPt{false}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\negPointsAllowed}
% Used with the \texttt{ProcessMultiSelection} when processing \texttt{manswers} environments.
% The default is not to allow the score to go below 0. By executing \cs{negPointsAllowed}
% in the preamble, we allow the score to go below zero.
%\changes{v6.3i}{2008/10/22}
%{
%   Added \cs{negPointsAllowed} to allow negative scores on quizzes. This is only relevant
%   when the quiz has a \texttt{manswers} environment.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\negPointsAllowed{\def\negpointsallowed{true}}
\@onlypreamble{\negPointsAllowed}
\def\negpointsallowed{false}
\def\negPointsMarkupAllowed{\def\negpointsmarkupallowed{true}}
\def\negpointsmarkupallowed{false}
\@onlypreamble{\negPointsMarkupAllowed}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\requireAlertBox}
% Turn off the ``Do not show this message again'' checkbox for objective questions
% and multiple choice questions.
%\changes{v6.3m}{2010/01/27}
%{
%   Added \cs{requireAlertBox} to turn off the ``Do not show this message again'' checkbox for objective questions.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\requireAlertBox{\def\bcheckboxused{false}}
\def\allowNoAlertBox{\def\bcheckboxused{true}}
\allowNoAlertBox
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \subsection{Math Fill-In Questions}
%    \begin{macro}{\RespBox}
%    \begin{macro}{\RespBoxMath}
%    \begin{macro}{\RespBoxNT}
% \cmd{\RespBox} and \cmd{\RespBoxNT} lay out a text box, into which the
% user enters his/her response to the question. \cmd{\RespBox} expects the presence
% of \cmd{\sqTallyBox}, whereas \cmd{\RespBoxNT} does not (NT = No Tally ).
%\par\medskip
% Usage: |\RespBox[#1]#2(#3)[#4]#5#6#7#8[#9]*#10|
% \begin{description}
% \item[\ttfamily\#1 :] Optional parameter used to modify the appearance of the
%     text field.
% \item[\ttfamily\#2 :] The correct answer to the question.
%     This must be a numerical value, or a function of one variable.
%     JavaScript Note:
%     In JavaScript, functions such as \texttt{sin(x)} and \texttt{cos(x)} are
%     methods of the \texttt{Math} object.  It is not necessary, however, to
%     type \texttt{Math.sin(x)} or \texttt{Math.cos(x)}; this is done by inserting
%     the expression into a \texttt{with(Math)} group.
% \item[\ttfamily\#3 :] An optional parameter, \textit{delimited by parentheses},
% that defines the independent variable; \texttt{x}, is the default value. Note
% that this parameter is set off by parentheses.  For a multivariate question, just
% list the variables in juxtaposition, \texttt{(xyz)}.  An alternate method is to
% delimit with commas \texttt{(x,y,n)} and include the type of the variables
% \texttt{(r:x,r:y,i:n)}, where \texttt{"r"} means a real variable and \texttt{"i"}
% means an integer variable.  The variables must be either of the old style (no commas, no typing)
% or the new style. Do  not mix the styles.
% \item[\ttfamily\#4 :] Optional, a named destination to the solution to the
% question. If this parameter appears, then a solution must follow the
% question, enclosed in a \texttt{solution} environment.
% Alternately, the fourth parameter can be a `\texttt*', in which case, we have
% automatic naming of the destination, namely, \texttt{[\string\curr@quiz.\string\thequestionno]}
% \item[\ttfamily\#5 :] The number of samples points to be used, usually $3$ or $4$ is
% sufficient.
% \item[\ttfamily\#6 :] Precision required, the $\epsilon$ value, if you will.
% \item[\ttfamily\#7 :] Parameters \#7 and \#8 are  used to define the interval from
% which to draw the sample points. There are two forms: (1) \#7 is the left-hand endpoint
% of the interval and \#8 is the right-hand endpoint (the use of \#7 and \#8 in this form
% is deprecated); (2) the interval is defined by standard interval notation, \texttt{[a,b]}.
% For a multivariate question---one where parameter \#2 lists more than one variable,
% separate the intervals for each variable by a `x', \texttt{[0,2]x[1,2]x[3,4]}.
% \item[\ttfamily\#8 :] (1) \#8 is the right-hand endpoint of the interval (the use of this
% parameter is deprecated); (2) in the second
% case, \#8 is not used.
% \item[\ttfamily\#9 :] This optional parameter is either the name of a customized
% comparison function \textit{or} a JavaScript object with at most two properties:
% \texttt{priorParse} and \texttt{comp}. See the demo file \texttt{integer\_tst.tex} for
% examples of usage.
% \item[\ttfamily\#10:] (Only detected if following an asterisk, `\texttt*')
% The name of a JavaScript function that is to be used to process the user input.
% \end{description}
% Example:
%\begin{flushleft}\footnotesize
%|\RespBoxMath{<exp(t), 2*t, sin(t)>}(t)[soln]{3}{.0001}{[0,1]}[compare]*{ProcVec}|
%\end{flushleft}
% or (the deprecated form)
%\begin{flushleft}\footnotesize
%|\RespBoxMath{<exp(t), 2*t, sin(t)>}(t)[soln]{3}{.0001}{0}{1}[compare]*{ProcVec}|
%\end{flushleft}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\RespBoxNT{\def\rbFlag{0}\@RespBox}
\newcommand\RespBox{\def\rbFlag{0}\@RespBox}
\newcommand\RespBoxMath{\def\rbFlag{0}\@RespBox}
%    \end{macrocode}
% These commands can be used define the default appearance of the \cs{RespBoxMath},
% \cs{RespBoxTxt} et al.  This first set controls all standard text fields.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get any changes in the appearance of the text box
% \changes{v6.4c}{2011/07/01}{\cs{RespBoxMath} now records its lists of
% independent variables under the global variable \texttt{\_mathVars}.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{defineJS}[%
    \catcode`\%=14\relax\catcode`\@=0\relax]{\AAKqRespBoxMath}
if(event.willCommit){
    RecordPointValue(@eqPTs,@thequestionno@ifx@grpquestions1,%
@thegrpquestionno,@grpPointValue,@grpTotalWeight,%
"@grpEvalFunction"@fi);
    RecordProblemType("@eqQT",@thequestionno);
    _mathVars=@indepVar;
    var retn = @processJSfunc(@rbArgs,@compareJSfunc);
    if (retn != null)
        ProcUserResp(retn,event.value,@thequestionno,%
0@ifx@grpquestions1,@thegrpquestionno@fi);
}
if (!isQuizInitialized("@currQuiz")) {
    @eqObjAlert@space app.alert(InitMsg("@bqlabelISO"),3);
    event.rc = false;
}
\end{defineJS}
\def\RespBoxMathDefaults
{%
    \BC{0 0 0}\S{S}\textColor{0 g}\F{\FPrint}%
}
\def\moreRespBoxMathDefaults
{%
    \edef\@moreRespBoxMathDefaults{%
        \if\eqQuizType\isQZ\ifx\eq@online\eq@YES
            \ifeq@noquizsolutions
            \else\noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}\fi\fi\fi
    }%
}
\let\eqFormatArg\@empty
\def\@@RespBoxMathActions
{%
    \AA{\if\eqQuizType\isQZ
            \AAKeystroke{\AAKqRespBoxMath\eqAAKeystrokeArg}
            \AAFormat{\eqFormatArg}
        \else
            \AAKeystroke{if(event.willCommit) {\r\t
                _mathVars=\indepVar;\r\t
                retn = \processJSfunc(\rbArgs,\compareJSfunc);\r
\if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1
                \t OnBlurRespBox(%
                \if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1retn\else null\fi,"\curr@quiz");
                \eqAAKeystrokeArg\r
\fi
                }%
            }
            \AAFormat{\eqFormatArg}%
            \AAOnFocus{\JS{var retn = null;}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% dps 2/12/05 A fix for Acro7.0, a change in the blur event,
% must move this event to keystroke so behavior is the same
% as in previous versions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if\@sqTurnOffAlerts0
            \AAOnBlur{\JS{OnBlurRespBox(%
                \if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1retn\else null\fi,"\curr@quiz");}}%
\fi
        \fi
    }
}
\newcommand\@RespBox[1][]
{%
    \eq@AddProbToQzQuesList
    \smallskip\ifx\grpquestions\eq@Zero
        \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\eqPTs}\fi
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ
        \def\rbFlag{1}%
        \ifx\grpquestions\eq@One
            \stepcounter{grpquestionno}%
            \def\Fld@name{%
                grpobj.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\thegrpquestionno}%
        \else
            \edef\eqtmp{\aPointType}%
            \xdef\aPointType{\eqtmp,[\eqPTs,"math"]}%
            \stepcounter{questionno}%
            \def\Fld@name{obj.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}%
        \fi
    \else % shortquiz
        \ifx\grpquestions\eq@One
            \stepcounter{grpquestionno}%
            \def\Fld@name{%
                grpobj.\oField.\thequestionno.\thegrpquestionno}%
        \else
            \stepcounter{questionno}%
            \def\Fld@name{%
                obj.\oField.\thequestionno}%
        \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Changed (v6.3f, 2008/10/08) the command \cs{array} to \cs{Array} to avoid clashing with the
% array command defined in \texttt{amsmath}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \let\Array\aeb@array
        \moreRespBoxMathDefaults
        \text@@Field{#1}{\Fld@name}{\RBW}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
        {\eq@protect\AA}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RespBox}%
        {\RespBoxMathDefaults\@moreRespBoxMathDefaults
        \@@RespBoxMathActions\every@eqTextField\every@RespBoxMath}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get the second parameter, which is the correct answer to the question, and
% test to see if there is a specification for the optional third parameter,
% which is the variable list, `\texttt x' is the default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@RespBox#1{\gdef\eq@currentAns{#1}%
    \@ifnextchar({\@eq@RespBox{#1}}{\@eq@RespBox{#1}(x)}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Pick up the optional third parameter, then test whether the optional fourth parameter is there.
% There are two forms: the [mydest] an explicit destination for the solution to the problem, or
% a `\texttt*', in which case, we have automatic naming, the name is
% \texttt{[\string\curr@quiz.\string\thequestionno]}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@eq@RespBox#1(#2){\@ifnextchar[{\@eq@RespB@x{#1}(#2)}%
    {\@ifstar{\@eq@RespB@x{#1}(#2)[\curr@quiz.\thequestionno]}%
            {\@eq@RespB@x{#1}(#2)[]}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now get the next three parameters: the number of samples, the precision, and the first of the
% two interval parameters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@Zero{0}
\def\defaultRDPrecision#1{\def\eq@defaultRDPrecision{#1}}
\defaultRDPrecision{1E-14}
%    \end{macrocode}
% dps/change 02/23/07 Here we try to implement a suggest of Bruce Wagner. If the tolerance
% is set to zero, then use \texttt{reldiffCompare} as the default compare, and set the tolerance
% to some small value. Here, the small value is the value of the command
% \cs{eq@defaultRDPrecision} which can be set by \cs{defaultRDPrecision}. The default definition
% is \verb!\defaultRDPrecision{1E-14}!.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@eq@RespB@x#1(#2)[#3]#4#5#6{%
    \xdef\@qzsolndest{#3}\def\indepVar{"#2"}%
    \def\eq@precision{#5}\ifx\eq@precision\eq@Zero
    \def\eq@defaultCompare{reldiffCompare}%
        \def\rbArgstmp{\rbFlag,"#1",#4,\eq@defaultRDPrecision}%
    \else
        \def\eq@defaultCompare{diffCompare}%
        \def\rbArgstmp{\rbFlag,"#1",#4,#5}%
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% We have arrived at the first of possibly two parameters that define the interval(s)
% from which to sample random points. There are two forms, the old style (deprecated)
% and the new style. We must detect which form this is.
% \par\medskip\noindent
% (10/10/11) To support \cs{viidna}, we expand \texttt{\#6} first before passing it
% to the command \cs{@checkforInterval}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\eq@ixparam{#6}%
    \expandafter\@checkforInterval\eq@ixparam\\%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\viidna} is used with the \texttt{satisfyEq} for the seventh parameter,
% these routines do not use the ninth, but there needs to be something that does not
% stop compilation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\viidna{[]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the next token is a `\texttt[', then that signals the beginning of an interval
% such as \texttt{[a,b]}, must be the new style. The second parameter is not
% needed, and not expected in this case. It would be a mistake to include it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@checkforInterval{%
    \@ifnextchar[{\@checkforIntervali}{\@checkforIntervalii}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This is the case of the new style of defining the interval. We insert it into the
%  arguments list, and continue on to the next stage.
%
% I have detected a problem when the ninth parameters is a JavaScript object and the left brace
% is next to the left bracket. Somehow, the left brace and right brace get absorbed. We do a
% work around, and insert a space after the left bracket.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@checkforIntervali#1\\{%
    \def\rbArgs{\rbArgstmp,"#1",\indepVar}%
    \@ifnextchar[{\@eq@@RespBox[ \expandafter\@gobble}%
        {\@eq@@RespBox[\eq@defaultCompare]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This is assumed to be the old style for defining the interval. In this case, the next
% token is the right-hand endpoint of the interval, we need it.  It would be a mistake
% \texttt{not} to include it. We also test for the presence of the optional
% of a customized comparison function, parameter \texttt{\#9}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@checkforIntervalii#1\\#2{%
    \def\rbArgs{\rbArgstmp,"[#1,#2]",\indepVar}%
    \@ifnextchar[{\@eq@@RespBox}{\@eq@@RespBox[\eq@defaultCompare]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, we see if there will be a 10th parameter by seeing if `\texttt*' comes
% next. We change the catcodes here, so we can have a left and right brace in the
% optional argument \#9. Hope it works. dps 12/30/03
%\changes{v6.4g}{2011/07/21}{%
%   Changing the definition of \cs{@eq@@RespBox}, removing the change
%   in \cs{catcode}s.  If this causes problems, can restore the
%   old definition.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\def\@eq@@RespBox{\begingroup\catcode`\<=1\relax\catcode`\>=2\relax
%    \catcode`\{=12\relax\catcode`\}=12\relax\@eq@@@RespBox}
%\def\@eq@@@RespBox[#1]{\endgroup\@ifstar{\jsRespBox[#1]}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Below is an alternate (and obvious) definition for \cs{@eq@@RespBox}. Whatever
% reason I had to change the catcodes, I don't remember, and things seem to work
% without it. But, will keep things as they are.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@eq@@RespBox{\@eq@@@RespBox}
\def\@eq@@@RespBox[#1]{\@ifstar{\jsRespBox[#1]}%
    {\jsRespBox[#1]{ProcResp}}}
\def\jsRespBox[#1]#2{%
    \def\compareJSfunc{#1}\def\processJSfunc{#2}%
    \ifeq@proofing\makebox[0pt][l]{\space\math@correctAnswer}\fi
    \eq@TextField % send to the driver-dependent macro
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The primitive \cs{meaning} is used to get a typeset version of the answer for the \texttt{proofing}
% option. I found it a difficult problem because once the answer is scanned, it has catcodes attached.
% Once that is done, it is impossible to use standard methods to make a typeset the answer in
% verbatim mode.  This trick appears in the \TeX book.  \cs{meaning} inserts additional spaces on occasion,
% for example, following a period (`.'). Oh, well.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\gobbleMacro#1>{}
\gdef\math@correctAnswer{%
    \ttfamily\color{\@proofingsymbolColor}\spaceskip=2pt\xspaceskip=2pt%
    \expandafter\gobbleMacro\meaning\eq@currentAns
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%\subsection{Text Fill-In}
%    \begin{macro}{\RespBoxTxt}
%    \begin{macro}{\RespBoxTxtNT}
% These two macros process open-ended questions that require a text response.
% There are several ways to customize these macros; as described below.
% \par\medskip
% \noindent Usage: |\RespBoxTxt[#1]#2#3[#4]#5<plus listing of alternatives>|
% \begin{description}
% \item[\ttfamily\#1 :] Optional parameter used to modify the appearance of the
%     text field.
% \item[\ttfamily\#2 :] This required parameter is a number that indicates
% the filtering method to be used. Permissible values of this parameter are
% \begin{description}
%     \item[\ttfamily -1: ] (The default) The author's and user's answers are not filtered
%     in any way. (Spaces, case, and punctuation are preserved.)
%     \item[\ttfamily 0: ] The author's and user's answers are converted to
%     lower case, any white space and non-word characters are removed.
%     \item[\ttfamily 1: ] The author's and user's answers are converted to
%     lower case, any white space is removed.
%     \item[\ttfamily 2: ] The author's and user's answers are stripped of any
%     white space.
% \end{description}
% \item[\ttfamily\#3 :] This parameter a number that indicates the compare
% method to be used. Permissible values of this parameter are
% \begin{description}
%     \item[\ttfamily 0: ] (The default) The author's and user's answers are
%     compared for an exact match. (These answers are filtered before they are
%     compared.)
%     \item[\ttfamily 1: ] The user's response is searched in an attempt to
%     get a substring match with the author's alternatives. Additional comparison
%     methods may be added.
% \end{description}
% \item[\ttfamily\#4 :] Optional, a named destination to the solution to the
% question. If this parameter appears, then a solution must follow the
% question, enclosed in a \texttt{solution} environment.
% \item[\ttfamily\#5 :] This required parameter is the number of alternative
% answers that are acceptable. The alternative answers are listed
% immediately after this parameter. (The example above specified
% that $4$ alternatives follow.)
% \end{description}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\RespBoxTxtNT{\def\rbFlag{0}\@RespBoxTxt}
\newcommand\RespBoxTxt{\def\rbFlag{0}\@RespBoxTxt}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Pick up any parameters that would modify the appearance of this text field.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\RespBoxTxtOnBlur{OnBlurRespBox(%
    \if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1retn\else null\fi,"\curr@quiz");}
\def\eqObjAlert{%
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ\ifx\eq@online\eq@YES\ifeq@noquizsolutions\else
    if (false)\fi\fi\fi
}
\begin{defineJS}[%
    \catcode`\@=0\relax\catcode`\%=14\relax]{\AAKqRespBoxTxt}
if(event.willCommit){
    RecordPointValue(@eqPTs,@thequestionno@ifx@grpquestions1,%
@thegrpquestionno,@grpPointValue,@grpTotalWeight,%
"@grpEvalFunction"@fi);
    RecordProblemType("@eqQT",@thequestionno);
    var retn = ProcRespTxt(@rbTxtAlt);
    if (retn != null)
        ProcUserResp(retn,event.value,@thequestionno,%
0@ifx@grpquestions1,@thegrpquestionno@fi);
}
if (!isQuizInitialized("@currQuiz")) {
    @eqObjAlert@space app.alert(InitMsg("@bqlabelISO"),3);
    event.rc = false;
}
\end{defineJS}
\def\RespBoxTxtDefaults
{%
    \BC{0 0 0}\W{1}\S{S}\textColor{0 g}\F{\FPrint}%
}
\def\moreRespBoxTxtDefaults
{%
    \edef\@moreRespBoxTxtDefaults{%
        \if\eqQuizType\isQZ\ifx\eq@online\eq@YES
        \ifeq@noquizsolutions\else
        \noexpand\Ff{\FfReadOnly}\fi\fi\fi
    }%
}
\def\@@RespBoxTxtActions
{%
    \AA{\if\eqQuizType\isQZ
            \AAKeystroke{\AAKqRespBoxTxt}
        \else
            \AAKeystroke{%
                if(event.willCommit) {\r\t
                    retn = ProcRespTxt(\rbTxtAlt);\r
\if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1
                \t\RespBoxTxtOnBlur\r
\fi
                }%
            }
            \AAOnFocus{\JS{var retn = null;}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% dps 2/12/05 A fix for Acro7.0, a change in the blur event, must
% move this event to keystroke so behavior is the same as in previous
% versions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if\@sqTurnOffAlerts0
            \AAOnBlur{\JS{\RespBoxTxtOnBlur}}%
\fi
        \fi
    }
}
\newcommand\@RespBoxTxt[1][]
{%
    \eq@AddProbToQzQuesList
%    \smallskip
    \ifx\grpquestions\eq@Zero\addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\eqPTs}\fi
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ
        \def\rbFlag{1}%
        \ifx\grpquestions\eq@One
            \stepcounter{grpquestionno}%
            \def\Fld@name{%
                grpobj.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\thegrpquestionno}%
        \else
            \edef\eqtmp{\aPointType}%
            \xdef\aPointType{\eqtmp,[\eqPTs,"text"]}%
            \stepcounter{questionno}%
            \def\Fld@name{obj.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}%
        \fi
    \else
        \stepcounter{questionno}%
        \def\Fld@name{obj.\oField.\thequestionno}%
    \fi
    \moreRespBoxTxtDefaults
    \text@@Field{#1}{\Fld@name}{\RBW}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
    {\eq@protect\AA}{\eq@setWidgetProps\@@RespBoxTxt}%
    {\RespBoxTxtDefaults\@moreRespBoxTxtDefaults
     \@@RespBoxTxtActions\every@eqTextField\every@RespBoxTxt}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now get the next two required parameters. Also, see if there is going to be a solution.
% This can be specified in two ways: (1) By inserting an explicit named destination \texttt{[mydest]}
% or (2) by specifying a `\texttt*', in which case, automatic naming is performed. The name is
% \texttt{\string\curr@quiz.\string\thequestionno}, \texttt{[\string\curr@quiz.\string\thequestionno]]} is inserted
% as the parameter.
% \medskip\noindent
% |#1 = filter|, |#2 = comp|
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@RespBoxTxt#1#2{%
    \@ifnextchar[{\@@@RespBoxTxt{#1}{#2}}
        {\@ifstar{\@@@RespBoxTxt{#1}{#2}[\curr@quiz.\thequestionno]}%
            {\@@@RespBoxTxt{#1}{#2}[]}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% |#1 = filter|, |#2 = comp|, |#3 = dest|, |#4 = num_alts|
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@ZERO{0}\def\eq@ONE{1}\def\eq@TWO{2}
\def\@@@RespBoxTxt#1#2[#3]#4{%
    \xdef\@qzsolndest{#3}%
    \def\eq@argi{#1}\ifx\eq@argi\eq@ZERO\else
        \ifx\eq@argi\eq@ONE\else\ifx\eq@argi\eq@TWO\else
        \def\eq@argi{-1}\fi\fi\fi
    \def\eq@argii{#2}\ifx\eq@argii\eq@ONE\else\def\eq@argii{0}\fi
    \begingroup
    \ifnum\eq@argii=1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% local definitions: \DescribeMacro{\rexpStr}\cs{rexpStr},
% \DescribeMacro{\\<RegEXP>}|\\|, and \DescribeMacro{\word}\cs{word}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \def\rexpStr##1{\eqbs\eqbs\eqbs\eqbs##1}%
        \def\\##1{\eqbs\eqbs\eqbs\eqbs##1}%
        \def\word##1{\\b##1\\b}\def\any{@any@}\fi
    \xdef\rbTxtAlt{\rbFlag,\eq@argi,\eq@argii}%
    \count0=#4 \ifnum\count0 > 0 \expandafter\@argRead\else
    \PackageError{exerquiz}{%
        The fourth required parameter of \string\RespBoxTxt\MessageBreak
        is required to be a positive integer. You entered\MessageBreak
        #4\space instead}{Enter a positive integer.}\fi
}
\def\@argRead#1{\edef\jsTemp{\rbTxtAlt}\xdef\rbTxtAlt{\jsTemp,"#1"}%
    \@@argRead}
\def\@@argRead{\advance\count0 by-1\relax
    \ifnum\count0=0\relax\def\eq@next{\endgroup\eq@@RespBoxTxt}%
    \else\def\eq@next{\@argRead}%
    \fi\eq@next
}
\def\eq@@RespBoxTxt{%
    \ifeq@proofing\makebox[0pt][l]{\space\txt@correctAnswer}\fi
    \eq@TextField
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the \texttt{proofing} option is specified, then we type out the author's list of
% acceptable answers.  Again, we use \cs{meaning}, probably not needed here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\gobbleTxt#1>#2,#3,#4,{}
\gdef\txt@correctAnswer{\ttfamily\color{\@proofingsymbolColor}%
    \spaceskip=2pt\xspaceskip=2pt
    \expandafter\gobbleTxt\meaning\rbTxtAlt
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\RespBoxTxtPC}
% This is pretty much a copy of \cs{RespBoxTxt}, with slight modifications. Here,
% we attempt to award partial credit for words that appear in the answer.
% This  is a feature request of Kate of Kenya.
% \par\medskip
% \noindent Usage:
%\begin{verbatim}
%   \RespBoxTxt[#1]#2[#3]#4[<num1>]{<word1>}...[<num_n>]{<word_n>}
%\end{verbatim}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\ttfamily\#1 :] Optional parameter used to modify the appearance of the
%     text field.
% \item[\ttfamily\#2 :] This required parameter is a number that indicates
% the filtering method to be used. Permissible values of this parameter are
% \begin{description}
%     \item[\ttfamily -1: ] (The default) The author's and user's answers are not filtered
%     in any way. (Spaces, case, and punctuation are preserved.)
%     \item[\ttfamily 0: ] The author's and user's answers are converted to
%     lower case, any white space and non-word characters are removed.
%     \item[\ttfamily 1: ] The author's and user's answers are converted to
%     lower case, any white space is removed.
%     \item[\ttfamily 2: ] The author's and user's answers are stripped of any
%     white space.
%     \item[\ttfamily 3: ] The author's and user's answers are converted to
%     lower case only. \emph{This is the recommended value for this function.}
% \end{description}
% \item[\ttfamily\#3 :] Optional, a named destination to the solution to the
% question. If this parameter appears, then a solution must follow the
% question, enclosed in a \texttt{solution} environment.
% \item[\ttfamily\#4 :] This required parameter is the number of alternative
% answers that are acceptable. The alternative answers are listed
% immediately after this parameter. (The example above specified
% that $4$ alternatives follow.)
% \end{description}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{defineJS}[%
    \catcode`\@=0\relax\catcode`\%=14\relax]{\AAKqRespBoxTxtPC}
if(event.willCommit){
    RecordPointValue(@eqPTs,@thequestionno@ifx@grpquestions1,%
@thegrpquestionno,@grpPointValue,@grpTotalWeight,%
"@grpEvalFunction"@fi);
    RecordProblemType("@eqQT",@thequestionno);
    var retn = ProcRespTxtPC(@rbTxtAlt);
    if (retn != null) {
@ifx@grpquestions1%
        ProbValue[@thequestionno][3+@thegrpquestionno]%
=ProcRespTxtPC.txtPCpCr;@else%
        ProbValue[@thequestionno]=ProcRespTxtPC.txtPCpCr;@fi
        ProcUserResp(retn,event.value,@thequestionno,0%
@ifx@grpquestions1,@thegrpquestionno@fi);
    }
}
if (!isQuizInitialized("@currQuiz")) {
    @eqObjAlert@space app.alert(InitMsg("@bqlabelISO"),3);
    event.rc = false;
}
\end{defineJS}
\def\@@RespBoxTxtPCActions
{%
    \AA{\if\eqQuizType\isQZ
            \AAKeystroke{\AAKqRespBoxTxtPC}
        \else
            \AAKeystroke{%
                if(event.willCommit) {\r\t
                    retn = ProcRespTxtPC(\rbTxtAlt);\r
\if\@sqTurnOffAlerts1%
                \t\RespBoxTxtOnBlur\r
\fi
                }%
            }
            \AAOnFocus{\JS{var retn = null;}}
\if\@sqTurnOffAlerts0%
            \AAOnBlur{\JS{\RespBoxTxtOnBlur}}%
\fi
        \fi
    }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here is the beginning of \cs{RespBoxTxtPC}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\RespBoxTxtPC}{\def\rbFlag{0}\@RespBoxTxtPC}
\newcommand\@RespBoxTxtPC[1][]
{%
    \eq@AddProbToQzQuesList
    \smallskip\ifx\grpquestions\eq@Zero
        \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\eqPTs}\fi
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ\def\rbFlag{1}%
        \ifx\grpquestions\eq@One
            \stepcounter{grpquestionno}%
            \def\Fld@name{%
                grpobj.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno.\thegrpquestionno}%
        \else
            \edef\eqtmp{\aPointType}%
            \xdef\aPointType{\eqtmp,[\eqPTs,"text"]}%
            \stepcounter{questionno}%
            \def\Fld@name{obj.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}%
        \fi
    \else
        \stepcounter{questionno}%
        \def\Fld@name{obj.\oField.\thequestionno}%
    \fi
    \moreRespBoxTxtDefaults
    \text@@Field{#1}{\Fld@name}{\RBW}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
    {\eq@protect\AA}{\eq@setWidgetProps\@@RespBoxTxtPC}%
    {\RespBoxTxtDefaults\@moreRespBoxTxtDefaults
     \@@RespBoxTxtPCActions\every@eqTextField\every@RespBoxTxt}%
}
\def\@@RespBoxTxtPC#1{\@ifnextchar[{\@@@RespBoxTxtPC{#1}}
    {\@ifstar{\@@@RespBoxTxtPC{#1}[\curr@quiz.\thequestionno]}%
    {\@@@RespBoxTxtPC{#1}[]}}}
\def\@@@RespBoxTxtPC#1[#2]#3{\xdef\@qzsolndest{#2}%
    \begingroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% We make special definitions for retrieving the parameters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\rexpStr##1{\eqbs\eqbs\eqbs\eqbs##1}%
    \def\\##1{\eqbs\eqbs\eqbs\eqbs##1}%
    \def\word##1{\\b##1\\b}\def\any{@any@}
    \gdef\rbTxtAlt{\rbFlag,#1,1}% force sub-string match
    \count0=#3 \ifnum\count0>0 \expandafter\@argReadPC\else
    \PackageError{exerquiz}{%
        The third required parameter of
        \string\RespBoxTxtPC\MessageBreak
        is required to be a positive integer.
        You entered\MessageBreak #3\space instead}
        {Enter a positive integer.}\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \texttt{\#1=<num>}, partial credit for this answer, \texttt{\#2=word}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\@argReadPC[2][0]{\edef\jsTemp{\rbTxtAlt}%
    \xdef\rbTxtAlt{\jsTemp,["#2",#1]}\@@argReadPC}
\def\@@argReadPC{\advance\count0 by-1\relax
    \ifnum\count0=0\relax\def\eq@next{\endgroup\eq@@RespBoxTxtPC}%
    \else\def\eq@next{\@argReadPC}\fi\eq@next
}
\def\eq@@RespBoxTxtPC{%
    \ifeq@proofing\makebox[0pt][l]{\space\txt@correctAnswer}\fi
    \eq@TextField
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%\subsection{Essay Fill-In}
%    \begin{macro}{\RespBoxEssay}
% Here is a simple text field with a multi-line attribute for entering
% essay-type questions. This question will not be graded by JavaScript,
% of course; ideally, the response will be submitted to a CGI for storage
% in a database. The instructor can later bring up the student's response
% and assign a grade.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\RespBoxEssayDefaults
{%
    \BC{0 0 0}\W{1}\S{S}\Ff{\FfMultiline}\rawPDF{}%
}
\def\@@RespBoxEssayActions
{%
    \AA{\if\eqQuizType\isQZ
        \AAKeystroke{%
            if(event.willCommit){\jsR\jsT
            RecordPointValue(\eqPTs,\thequestionno);\jsR\jsT
            RecordProblemType("\eqQT",\thequestionno);\jsR\jsT
            }\jsR
            if (!isQuizInitialized("\curr@quiz")) {\jsR\jsT
                @eqObjAlert\space app.alert(%
                    InitMsg("\bqlabelISO"),3);\jsR\jsT
                event.rc = false;\jsR
            }%
        }%
    \fi
    }
}
\newcommand\RespBoxEssay[3][]
{%
    \smallskip\addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\eqPTs}%
    \stepcounter{questionno}%
    \text@@Field{#1}{essay.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}{#2}{#3}%
    \edef\eqtmp{\aPointType}\xdef\aPointType{\eqtmp,[\eqPTs,"essay"]}%
    {\eq@protect\AA}{\eq@setWidgetProps\@@RespBoxEssayActions
     \eq@TextField}{\RespBoxEssayDefaults\every@eqTextField}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%\subsection{Fields that Support the Fill-Ins}
%    \begin{macro}{\sqTallyBox}
% The \cmd{\sqTallyBox} holds the number of incorrect responses to the
% question. This box is not required to appear. If it does not
% appear, use \cmd{\RespBoxNT} to prevent the doc level JavaScript
% from trying to write a nonexistent text field.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sqTallyBoxDefaults
{%
    \BC{0 0 0}\textColor{1 0 0 rg}\S{I}\Q{2}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}
}
\ifpdf\def\@@sqTallyBoxActions{%
    \AA{\AAValidate{getTotalTally("\oField");}}}\else
    \let\@@sqTallyBoxActions\@empty
\fi
\newcommand\sqTallyBox[1][]
{%
    \text@@Field{#1}{tally.\oField.\thequestionno}%
        {\TBW}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
        {}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@TextField}%
        {\sqTallyBoxDefaults\@@sqTallyBoxActions\every@eqTextField
        \every@sqTallyBox}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\sqTallyTotal}
% This text field stores the tally total. Only used within the
% \texttt{shortquiz} environment. Takes on optional parameter; this
% parameter can be used to modify the appearance of the fields.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sqTallyTotalDefaults
{%
    \rawPDF{}\BC{0 0 0}\S{I}\textColor{1 0 0 rg}%
    \Q{2}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}%
}
\def\@@sqTallyTotalActions
{%
    \AA{%
        \AAKeystroke{AFNumber_Keystroke(0,0,0,0,"",true);}
        \AAFormat{AFNumber_Format(0,0,0,0,"",true);}
        \AACalculate{%
            AFSimple_Calculate("SUM",new Array("tally.\oField"));
    }}
}
\newcommand\sqTallyTotal[1][]
{%
    \text@@Field{#1}{tallytotal.\oField}{\TBW}%
        {\DefaultHeightOfWidget}{\eq@protect\AA}%
%        {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@calcTextField}%
        {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@TextField}%
        {\sqTallyTotalDefaults\@@sqTallyTotalActions\every@eqTextField
         \every@sqTallyTotal}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\CorrAnsButton}
% The \cmd{\CorrAnsButton} is a button macro which, when pressed, will
% display the correct answer for the user. This button is again
% optional. This macro takes one parameter and one optional parameter
%\begin{verbatim}
%#1 : the correct answer as the user should enter it.
%\end{verbatim}
% The value if \texttt{\#1} may be different from the parameter
% \texttt{\#2} in \cmd{\RespBox}; for example, if the answer is
% $x^2$, then \texttt{\#2} of \cmd{\RespBox} would be
% \texttt{pow(x,2)}; but the user would enter |x^2|.
%
% The optional parameter is specified by a star * followed by a
% name of a JavaScript function. The arguments of this JS function
% is the same as that of DisplayAnswer. For example,
%\begin{verbatim}
%\CorrAnsButton{convertFrac('#1','#2')}*{EvalCorrAnsButton}}
%\end{verbatim}
% The JavaScript function might be
%\begin{verbatim}
%function EvalCorrAnsButton(fieldname,theanswer)
%{
%    theanswer = eval(theanswer);
%    DisplayAnswer(fieldname,theanswer);
%}
%\end{verbatim}
% Here, we call a function to evaluate the answer for us.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\CorrAnsButtonDefaults
{%
   \CA{\eq@local@CorrAnsButton}\W{1}\S{S}
    \BC{0 0 0}\BG{.7529 .7529 .7529}\H{P}
}
\def\normalCABtnBC{0 0 0}
 \def\qCorrAnsButtonActionHook
 {%
     \JS{%
        \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else
            if (event.shift)\jsR\jsT
                this.gotoNamedDest("\@qzsolndest");\jsR
            else\jsR\jsT
        \fi
        \processJSfunc("Ans.\curr@quiz","\CorrectAns",\currQuiz);
     }%
 }
 \def\sqCorrAnsButtonActionHook
 {%
     \JS{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Allow local definition the reset color for response boxes. The reset color
%    is normally black (\cs{eqDefaultColor}). Now if \cs{sqCorrAnsResetBC} is none
%    empty, we put it in as a property of the \cs{oField} object.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%        \ifx\sqCorrAnsResetBC\@empty\else
%            if ( typeof \oField=="undefined")\jsR\jsT
%                var \oField = new Object;\jsR
%            \oField.CorrAnsResetBC=\sqCorrAnsResetBC;\jsR
%        \fi
        \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else
            if (event.shift)\jsR\jsT
            this.gotoNamedDest("\@qzsolndest");\jsR
            else\jsR\jsT
        \fi
        \processJSfunc("obj.\oField.\thequestionno","\CorrectAns",%
\currQuiz);
     }%
 }
\newcommand\CorrAnsButton[1][]{\eq@@CorrAnsButton{#1}}
\def\eq@@CorrAnsButton#1#2{%
    \@ifstar{\eq@@@CorrAnsButton{#1}{#2}}{%
        \eq@@@CorrAnsButton{#1}{#2}{DisplayAnswer}}%
}
\def\eq@@@CorrAnsButton#1#2#3{%
    \def\CorrectAns{#2}\def\processJSfunc{#3}%
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ\def\Fld@name{corr.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}%
    \else\def\Fld@name{corr.\oField.\thequestionno}\fi
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ
        \edef\@@CorrAnsButtonActions{\noexpand\F{\FHidden}%
            \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty%\noexpand\BC{\normalCABtnBC}%
            \else\noexpand\BC{\solution@Color}\fi
            \noexpand\A{\noexpand\qCorrAnsButtonActionHook}}%
        \ifeq@noquizsolutions\else
           \mbox{\push@@Button{#1}{\Fld@name}{}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
                {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setButtonProps\eq@Button@driver}%
                {\CorrAnsButtonDefaults\@@CorrAnsButtonActions
                \every@ButtonField\every@CorrAnsButton}}%
        \fi
    \else
        \edef\@@CorrAnsButtonActions{%
        \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty%\noexpand\BC{\normalCABtnBC}
        \else\noexpand\BC{\solution@Color}\fi
        \noexpand\A{\noexpand\sqCorrAnsButtonActionHook}}%
        \mbox{\push@@Button{#1}{\Fld@name}{}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
            {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setButtonProps\eq@Button@driver}%
            {\CorrAnsButtonDefaults\@@CorrAnsButtonActions
            \every@ButtonField\every@CorrAnsButton}}%
    \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\sqClearButton}
% This button will clear the tallyfields and change the color of
% the \cmd{\RespBox} back to \cmd{\defaultColorJS}. The button clears the fields
% based on the current value of \cmd{\oField}. This text macro is
% given its value when the optional parameter in the
% \texttt{shortquiz} environment is specified.
%\changes{v6.3g}{2008/10/13 }
%{%
% Fixed a problem with the clear button not setting the boundary color
% back to the default. I must have changed the name of an objective field,
% now, we say \texttt{this.getField("obj.\cs{oField}")}.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sqClearButtonDefaults
{%
    \CA{\eq@local@sqClearButton}\textColor{0 g}\F{\FPrint}
    \BC{0 0 0}\BG{.7529 .7529 .7529}\W{1}\S{B}\Ff{\FfNoExport}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% In an attempt to supply some custom colors for the shortquiz, we
% define \cmd{\sqRespBoxResetColor}. It determines the clear
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@sqClearButtonActions
{%
    \A{\JS{ProcessIt = false;\jsR
        if ( typeof \oField\space== "undefined" )\jsR\jsT
            \oField\space= new Object\jsR
        this.resetForm(new Array("mc.\oField","obj.\oField",%
        "tally.\oField","grpobj.\oField"));\jsR
        var f = this.getField("obj.\oField");\jsR
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Here, we give the user an opportunity to designate the color
%    of the response boxes when they are reset by the \cs{sqClearButton}.
%    The default is to use \cs{eqDefaultColor}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        if ( f != null ) f.strokeColor=\ifx\defaultColorJSLoc\@empty
\defaultColorJS\else\defaultColorJSLoc\fi;\jsR
        f = this.getField("grpobj.\oField");\jsR
        if ( f != null ) f.strokeColor=\ifx\defaultColorJSLoc\@empty
\defaultColorJS\else\defaultColorJSLoc\fi;\jsR
        f = this.getField("rbmarkup.\oField");\jsR
        if ( f != null ) f.display=display.hidden;\jsR
%        \oField = new Object;\jsR
        \oField.Grp = {};\jsR
        appAlerts["\oField"] = {bAfterValue: false};\jsR
        ProcessIt=true;}%
    }
}
\newcommand\sqClearButton[1][]
{%
    \push@@Button{#1}{clear.\oField}{}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setButtonProps\eq@Button@driver}%
        {\sqClearButtonDefaults\@@sqClearButtonActions\every@ButtonField
         \every@sqClearButton}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\@PromptButton}
% The \cs{@PromptButton} is used to create a ``progressive-style'' question (for math fill-in).
% Some series of questions build on one another. You can use this button to show the solution
% for one problem, so the student can try the next problem. On clicking on the prompt button,
% the student cannot enter another answer in the text field, and the input that is already
% there will be the one that is counted has the student's response.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\PromptButtonDefaults
{%
   \CA{\eq@local@CorrAnsButton}\W{1}\S{S}\BC{0 0 0}
   \BG{.7529 .7529 .7529}\H{P}
}
\newcommand{\promptButtonMsg}{%
    "Would you like to see the correct answer at this time? "\r\t\t
    + "Your current answer will be the one that will be scored. "\r\t\t
    + "If you click on \\"Yes\\",
        you will not be able to change your answer."
}
\def\PromptButtonActionHook
{%
     \JS{%
        if (!isQuizInitialized("\currQuiz")) {\r\t
            app.alert(InitMsg("\bqlabelISO"),3);\r\t
            event.rc = false;\r
        } else {\r\t
            if ( ! \currQuiz.oAlertCheck.bAfterValue ) {\r\t
                var resp = app.alert({\r\t\t
                    cMsg:\promptButtonMsg,\r\t\t
                    nIcon: 2, nType: 2,\r\t\t
                    cTitle: "AcroTeX Prompt Message",\r\t\t
                    oCheckbox: \currQuiz.oAlertCheck\r\t
                });\r\t
            }\r
            if ( resp == 4 )\r\t
            {\r\t\t
                var field = this.getField(%
                    "obj.\currQuiz.\thequestionno");\r\t\t
                field.readonly = true;\r\t\t
                this.getField(%
                    "Ans.\currQuiz").value = "Answer: \PromptAns";\r\t
            }\r
        }
    }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This button takes the standard two arguments
% \begin{flushleft}
% \texttt{\#1}: Optional parameters to change the appearance of the field\\
% \texttt{\#2}: Prompt answer
% \end{flushleft}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\@PromptButton[2][]
{%
    \def\PromptAns{#2}\if\eqQuizType\isQZ
    \def\Fld@name{promptButton.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}%
    \else\def\Fld@name{promptButton.\oField.\thequestionno}\fi
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ
        \def\@@PromptButtonActions{%
            \A{\PromptButtonActionHook}}%
            \push@@Button{#1}{\Fld@name}{}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
                {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setButtonProps\eq@Button@driver}%
                {\PromptButtonDefaults\@@PromptButtonActions
                \every@ButtonField\every@CorrAnsButton}%
        \else \PackageWarning{exerquiz}{The \string\PromptButton
            is for quiz questions only.}
    \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% \DescribeMacro{\PromptButton} is the default definition of the \cs{PromptButton},
% it can be redefined. The \cs{CorrectAns} command is defined in the
% \cs{CorrAnsButton} as the answer provided by the author.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\PromptButton}{\makebox[0pt][r] % assumes xcolor
    {\@PromptButton[\CA{Ans}\textColor{1 0 0 rg}]{\CorrectAns}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{environment}{mathGrp}
% An environment for enclosing a collection of math/text fill-ins that are to be grouped
% together. This grouping should not cross a begin or end of another environment, or include more
% an \cs{item}. This environment has two optional arguments:
%\begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{[\#1]}] : total weight (needed when sum of weight is greater than total number of points
% \item[\texttt{[\#2]}] : evaluation function, a JavaScript function to evaluate the user's responses.
% The default evaluation function is \texttt{groupEval}.
%\end{description}
% The way the parsing of the parameters works out, to specify \texttt{\#1}, you must specify
%\texttt{\#2}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\grpquestions=\eq@Zero
\def\mathGrp{\@ifnextchar[{\@imathGrp}{\@imathGrp[groupEval]}}
\def\@imathGrp[#1]{\def\argi{#1}%
    \@ifnextchar[{\@iimathGrp}{\@iimathGrp[]}}
\def\@iimathGrp[#1]{\def\argii{#1}%
    \eq@AddProbToQzQuesList
    \global\let\grpquestions\eq@One
    \setcounter{grpquestionno}{0}%
    \stepcounter{questionno}%
    \xdef\beginGrp{\thequestionno}%
    \xdef\grpPointValue{\eqPTs}%
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ
        \edef\eqtmp{\aPointType}%
        \xdef\aPointType{\eqtmp,[\eqPTs,"grp"]}\fi
    \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\eqPTs}%
    \ifx\argii\@empty
        \xdef\grpTotalWeight{\eqPTs}%
        \xdef\grpEvalFunction{\argi}%
    \else
        \xdef\grpTotalWeight{\argi}%
        \xdef\grpEvalFunction{\argii}%
    \fi
}
\def\endmathGrp{\global\let\grpquestions\eq@Zero
    \xdef\endGrp{\thequestionno}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
%    \begin{macro}{\CorrAnsButtonGrp}
% The correct answer button for grouped questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\CorrAnsButtonGrpDefaults
{%
   \CA{\eq@local@CorrAnsButton}\W{1}\S{S}\BC{0 0 0}
   \BG{.7529 .7529 .7529}\H{P}
}
\def\CorrAnsButtonGrpActionHook{\JS{%
\ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty\else
    if (event.shift)\jsR\jsT
        this.gotoNamedDest("\@qzsolndest");\jsR
    else\jsR
\fi
    {\jsR\jsT
        var aCorrectAns = \CorrectAns;\jsR\jsT
        var beginGrp = 1;\jsR\jsT
        grpOffset = beginGrp;\jsR\jsT
%        if ( typeof \currQuiz == "undefined" ) {\jsR\jsT\jsT
%            \currQuiz = new Object;\jsR\jsT\jsT
%            \currQuiz.Grp = {};\jsR\jsT
%        }\jsR\jsT
        if ( \currQuiz.Grp==null ) \currQuiz.Grp = {};\jsR\jsT
        if (typeof \currQuiz.Grp["\thequestionno"]=="undefined")\jsR\jsT
        {\jsR\jsT\jsT
            \currQuiz.Grp["\thequestionno"] = {offset: 0};\jsR\jsT\jsT
            var f = this.getField(%
                "grpobj.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno."
                    + grpOffset)\jsR\jsT\jsT
%    \end{macrocode}
% When the field is readonly, then we cannot set the focus. We'll remove the readonly, set focus, then
% reset readonly to true again; however, we must wait a little for \texttt{setFocus} to finish.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            if ( f.readonly ) {\jsR\jsT\jsT
                f.readonly = false;\jsR\jsT\jsT
                f.setFocus();\jsR\jsT\jsT
                eqDelay = app.setTimeOut(%
                    "f.readonly = true;
                    app.clearTimeOut(eqDelay);",10);\jsR\jsT
            } else f.setFocus();\jsR\jsT
        }\jsR\jsT
        else \jsR\jsT
        {\jsR\jsT\jsT
            \currQuiz.Grp["\thequestionno"].offset =
                ++\currQuiz.Grp["\thequestionno"].offset
                \% aCorrectAns.length;\jsR\jsT\jsT
            grpOffset = beginGrp
                + \currQuiz.Grp["\thequestionno"].offset;\jsR\jsT\jsT
            var f = this.getField("grpobj.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno."
                + grpOffset);\jsR\jsT\jsT
            if ( f.readonly ) {\jsR\jsT\jsT
                f.readonly = false;\jsR\jsT\jsT
                f.setFocus();\jsR\jsT\jsT
                eqDelay = app.setTimeOut("f.readonly = true;
                    app.clearTimeOut(eqDelay);",10);\jsR\jsT
            } else f.setFocus();\jsR\jsT
        }\jsR\jsT
\if\eqQuizType\isQZ
        DisplayAnswer("Ans.\curr@quiz",
            aCorrectAns[\currQuiz.Grp["\thequestionno"].offset],%
\currQuiz);
%\ifx\sqCorrAnsResetBC\@empty\else,\currQuiz\fi);\jsR
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Allow local definition the reset color for response boxes. The reset color
%    is normally black (\cs{eqDefaultColor}). Now if \cs{sqCorrAnsResetBC} is none
%    empty, we put it in as a property of the \cs{oField} object.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\ifx\sqCorrAnsResetBC\@empty\else
%    if ( typeof \oField=="undefined")\jsR\jsT\jsT
%        var \oField = new Object;\jsR\jsT
%    \oField.CorrAnsResetBC=\sqCorrAnsResetBC;\jsR\jsT
%\fi
        DisplayAnswer("grpobj.\oField.\thequestionno."+ grpOffset,
            aCorrectAns[\currQuiz.Grp["\thequestionno"].offset],%
\oField);\jsR
\fi
    }
}}
\newcommand\CorrAnsButtonGrp[2][]
{%
    \makeStringArray{#2}%
    \edef\CorrectAns{\stringArray}%
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ\def\Fld@name{corr.\curr@quiz.\thequestionno}%
    \else\edef\currQuiz{\oField}%
    \def\Fld@name{corr.\oField.\thequestionno}\fi
    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ
        \edef\@@CorrAnsButtonGrpActions{\noexpand\F{\FHidden}%
            \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty%\noexpand\BC{\normalCABtnBC}
            \else\noexpand\BC{\solution@Color}\fi
            \noexpand\A{\noexpand\CorrAnsButtonGrpActionHook}}%
        \ifeq@noquizsolutions\else
           \mbox{\push@@Button{#1}{\Fld@name}{}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
                {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setButtonProps\eq@Button@driver}%
                {\CorrAnsButtonGrpDefaults\@@CorrAnsButtonGrpActions
                \every@ButtonField\every@CorrAnsButton}}%
        \fi
    \else
        \edef\@@CorrAnsButtonGrpActions{%
            \ifx\@qzsolndest\@empty%\noexpand\BC{\normalCABtnBC}
            \else\noexpand\BC{\solution@Color}\fi
            \noexpand\A{\noexpand\CorrAnsButtonGrpActionHook}}%
        \mbox{\push@@Button{#1}{\Fld@name}{}{\DefaultHeightOfWidget}%
            {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setButtonProps\eq@Button@driver}%
            {\CorrAnsButtonGrpDefaults\@@CorrAnsButtonGrpActions
            \every@ButtonField\every@CorrAnsButton}}%
    \fi
}
\def\makeStringArray#1{\def\stringArray{[}\@makeStringArray#1,\@nil}
\def\@makeStringArray#1,#2\@nil{%
    \edef\eq@temp{\stringArray}\def\argii{#2}%
    \ifx\argii\@empty
        \edef\stringArray{\eq@temp"#1"]}%
        \def\eq@next{}%
    \else
        \edef\stringArray{\eq@temp"#1",}%
        \def\eq@next{\@makeStringArray#2\@nil}%
    \fi
    \eq@next
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \section{Quiz Summary Tables}
%
% This code is designed for use with a \texttt{quiz}, as opposed to a
% \texttt{shortquiz}. Insert the command \cs{displaySumryTbl} after the
% end of the quiz, but before \verb!\end{quiz}!. The expansion  of
% \cs{displaySumryTbl} is a table summarizing the user's effort on the
% quiz, indicating which questions had responses, and which did not.
%\par\medskip\noindent
% (06/08/10) We define \cs{eq@AddProbToQzQuesList}, which adds the current question label to
% the list \cs{eqQzQuesList}. The command \cs{@eqListExp} is initially defined
% to be \cs{relax} and is redefined just before \cs{eqQzQuesList} is expanded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@eqListExp\relax
\let\@currentQues\@empty
\let\eqQzQuesList\@empty
\def\eq@AddProbToQzQuesList{%
    \edef\eq@tmpExp{\noexpand\g@addto@macro%
        \noexpand\eqQzQuesList{%
            \noexpand\@eqListExp{\@currentQues}{\thepage}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We add to the list only if we are not within a \texttt{mathGrp} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\grpquestions\eq@Zero\eq@tmpExp\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<*sumrytbls>
%    \end{macrocode}
% The command below is convenience command to concatenate the current quiz with
% another string. The reason the parameter is enclosed in parenthesis is that
% the command is (sometimes) executed in a limited verbatim environment were the
% catcodes of our friendly braces have been changed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ccatCurrQzWith(#1){\currQuiz#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This is the JavaScript action for the push button \cs{pbPopulateSumTable}.
% The code is activated when the page becomes visible. The code reads through
% the Responses array and determines which questions were answered, and checks
% the appropriate box. (Version 6 or greater)
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This zero width/height push button is hidden at the top of the table. When
% the page that contains the button, the JS is executes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pbPopulateSumTable{\pushButton[\W0\BG{}\BC{}\S{S}
    \AA{\AAPageVisible{popVisitsTbl("\currQuiz",\thequestionno)}}]%
    {\currQuiz activateSC}{0pt}{0pt}}
\def\pbDoNoCorrectSumryTbl{\makebox[0pt][l]{\pushButton[\F{\FHidden}]%
    {\currQuiz NoCorrections}{0pt}{0pt}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% A scratch counter to count the number of row entries we have created.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\eq@rowcnt
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\sumryTblQ}
%    \begin{macro}{\sumryTblR}
%    \begin{macro}{\sumryTblP}
% Through these commands, the author can change the title headings of the summary table.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sumryTblQ}{Question}
\newcommand{\sumryTblR}{Responded}
\newcommand{\sumryTblP}{Page}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\sumryTblProbFmt}
% Set the {\LaTeX} formatting for the problem numbers that appear in the
% first column of the table.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sumryTblProbFmt}[1]{\textbf{\textcolor{blue}{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\sumrytablesep}
% A macro to set the separation between the tables.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sumrytablesep}{\space}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% This can be redefined. We begin a \texttt{tabular} with
% headings (may be redefined).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@begintab{%
    \begin{tabular}[t]{lcc}\sumryTblQ&\sumryTblR&\sumryTblP\\\hline
    {\Large\strut}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% End of the \texttt{tabular}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@endtab{\end{tabular}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\displaySumryTbl}
% Place this command between the end of the quiz \textbf{on a new page} (after the closing of the
% last \texttt{questions} environment and before \verb!\end{quiz}!. The command
% takes one argument, and number, either 1 or 2: a value of 1 gives a single column
% table of a listing of the questions numbers; a value of 2 gives a two column
% table (actually two tables) side by side.
%
% The \cs{displaySumryTbl} takes two parameters, one optional and one required.
%\begin{enumerate}
%  \item \texttt{\#1} is optional and takes key-value pairs
%   \begin{itemize}
%       \item \texttt{ntables} is a key that has a value of 1 or 2, the default is determined by
%             \cs{smrytbl@ntables}, which is set to 2 in this package. If
%             \texttt{ntables=1} only one table is created, and if \texttt{ntables=2}
%             two tables are created, each containing half the information.
%       \item \texttt{showmarkup}: If this switch is true, then markup fields are
%             created that will hold the number of points the student received for
%             each problem. The default is there is no markup. Entering
%             \texttt{showmarkup} in the option list will generate the markup fields.
%       \item \texttt{nocorrections}: If this switch is true, corrections will not
%             be shown when the user presses the `End Quiz' button.
%   \end{itemize}
%  \item \texttt{\#2} is the quiz this table represents, usually this is \cs{currQuiz}.
%\end{enumerate}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{smrytbl}{ntables}{%
    \@tempcntb=#1
    \ifnum\@tempcntb<1 \@tempcntb=1 \fi
    \ifnum\@tempcntb>2 \@tempcntb=2 \fi
    \edef\smrytbl@ntables{\the\@tempcntb}%
}
\def\smrytbl@ntables{2}%
\newif\ifeqshowmarkup\eqshowmarkupfalse
\define@key{smrytbl}{showmarkup}[true]{%
    \csname if#1\endcsname\eqshowmarkuptrue
        \else\eqshowmarkupfalse\fi
}
\newif\ifsmrytbl@corrections\smrytbl@correctionstrue
\define@key{smrytbl}{nocorrections}[true]{%
    \csname if#1\endcsname\smrytbl@correctionsfalse
        \else\smrytbl@correctionstrue\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally we come to the definition of \cs{displaySumryTbl}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\displaySumryTbl}[2][]{%
    \begingroup\edef\currQuiz{#2}%
    \edef\@expand@temp{\noexpand\setkeys{smrytbl}{#1}}%
    \@expand@temp\count0=\smrytbl@ntables\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% We accept only 1 or 2 as an argument, we put it in \cs{count0},
% if not an integer, we'll stop the compile. If the argument is not 1,
% we force a value of 2.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\count0=1\relax\else\count0=2\relax\fi
    \eq@rowcnt=0\relax\@tempcntb=\value{questionno}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We calculate the number of rows in the first column, in case
% of a two column table. When the number of questions is odd,
% the the left-hand table will have one more entry than the right-hand
% column.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\count0=2
        \divide\@tempcntb2\relax
        \advance\@tempcntb\ifodd\value{questionno}2\else1\fi
        \xdef\@beginSecCol{\the\@tempcntb}%
        \advance\@tempcntb-1\relax
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% We \cs{let} \cs{@eqListExp} to \cs{@@eqListExp}, defined below.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\@eqListExp\@@eqListExp
%    \end{macrocode}
% \dots and expand the token list \cs{eqQzQuesList}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \eqQzQuesList
    \endgroup
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
% This is a definition of \cs{@eqListExp}. It appears in the
% token list \cs{eqQzQuesList}. A typical entry in  \cs{eqQzQuesList} is
% of the form
%\begin{verbatim}
%    \@eqListExp{<question_label>}{\thepage}
%\end{verbatim}
% We use the two arguments to construct a table of three columns: Question (consisting
% of the question label); Responded (a checkbox that is checked if that question was answered);
% and Page (a hypertext link to the page containing he question). The command may be redefined
% to as needed.
%
% \cs{@@eqListExp} is \cs{let} to \cs{@eqListExp} in \cs{displaySumryTbl}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@eqListExp#1#2{%
    \global\advance\eq@rowcnt1
%    \end{macrocode}
% If it is the first row, we insert the push button that will activate
% when the page becomes visible, and we expand \cs{eq@begintab}, which
% is a \texttt{tabular} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\eq@rowcnt=1
        \pbPopulateSumTable\ifsmrytbl@corrections\else
        \pbDoNoCorrectSumryTbl\fi\expandafter\eq@begintab\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% If it is the two table solution, and the row number equals the calculated
% value of the first row of the second table, we emit another
% \cs{eq@begintab}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\count0=2 \ifnum\eq@rowcnt=\@beginSecCol\relax
        \sumrytablesep\expandafter\eq@begintab\fi\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% We layout a row of the table, problem label, checkbox, and page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \sumryTblProbFmt{#1} &%
    \checkBox[\Ff{\FfReadOnly}]%
        {\ccatCurrQzWith(SanityCheck).\the\eq@rowcnt}%
        {9bp}{9bp}{Yes}\ifeqshowmarkup
        \makebox[0pt][l]{\kern3bp\textField[\Ff\FfReadOnly\BC{}
        \textColor{1 0 0}\textSize{0}\autoCenter{n}
        ]{\ccatCurrQzWith(SanityCheckPts).\the\eq@rowcnt}%
        {12bp}{9bp}}\fi&%
    \setLink[\A{\JS{this.pageNum=(#2-1)}}]{#2}\\[1bp]
%    \end{macrocode}
% We set the \cs{eq@endtab} at the bottom of the first table,
% and at the bottom of the second table.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\count0=2 \ifnum\eq@rowcnt=\@tempcntb
        \expandafter\eq@endtab\fi\fi
    \ifnum\eq@rowcnt=\thequestionno\relax\expandafter\eq@endtab\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Duplicating the Summary Table elsewhere}
%
%    \begin{macro}{\writeProListAux}
% This command writes the information essential to the creation of
% the quiz summary table (\cs{displaySumryTbl}), and should be
% placed after the final question, and before the `End Quiz'. The purpose
% is to write the info to the auxiliary file so the table can be
% constructed elsewhere, for example, at the beginning of the quiz, or
% wherever desired.  The command writes two macros to the aux file,
% \verb!\csname \currQuiz QzQuesList\endcsname! that contains the token
% list of problems using by the table, and
% \verb!\csname \currQuiz nQuestions\endcsname! that contains the
% total number of questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\writeProListAux{%
    \eq@IWAuxOut{\string\expandafter\string\gdef
    \string\csname\space\currQuiz QzQuesList\string\endcsname
    {\eqQzQuesList}}%
    \eq@IWAuxOut{\string\expandafter\string\gdef
    \string\csname\space\currQuiz nQuestions\string\endcsname
    {\thequestionno}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\setParamSumryTblAux{%
    \edef\eqQzQuesList{\@nameuse{\currQuiz QzQuesList}}%
    \@ifundefined{\currQuiz nQuestions}{}{%
        \value{questionno}=\@nameuse{\currQuiz nQuestions}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{environment}{sumryTblAux}
% Normally, we use \cs{displaySumryTbl} right after the last question, and before
% the `End Quiz.' It is possible to display a summary table elsewhere, perhaps at the beginning
% of the quiz, on the first page, wherever. Assuming \cs{writeProListAux} jas beem
% inserted after the last question and before `End Quiz', you can then use the
% \texttt{sumryTblAux} environment to place the same table in another location. For example,
%\begin{verbatim}
%    \begin{sumryTblAux}{demoQuiz}
%    \begin{center}
%        {\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries Quiz Summary Table}\\[3pt]
%        \displaySumryTbl[showmarkup]{\currQuiz}
%    \end{center}
%    \end{sumryTblAux}
%\end{verbatim}
% The environment takes one parameter, the quiz name that this table
% represents. It uses \cs{setParamSumryTblAux} to set the appropriate
% variables that \cs{displaySumryTbl} uses.
%
% This environment \emph{is required} if the table appears outside the scope of the
% quiz.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{sumryTblAux}[1]{%
    \DeclareQuiz{#1}\setParamSumryTblAux}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{environment}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</sumrytbls>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \section{Input Language definitions and JS}
%
% Here is were we make the redefinitions of the above commands if
% a language option is specified.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\LangRedefinitions
%    \end{macrocode}
% We introduce the document-level JavaScript for exerquiz at this point.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\input{aebjs.def}
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the \texttt{usesumrytbls} option is taken, we input the code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\inputSumryTblCode
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \section{eForms Support}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\solutionColor}
% This color is introduced at the pdfmark/rawPDF level. Define
% the color without commas. For example |\solutionColor{0 .6 0}|
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\solutionColor}[1]{\def\eq@argi{#1}\ifx\eq@argi\@empty
    \def\solution@Color{\solutionColorDef}\else
    \def\solution@Color{#1}\fi}
\newcommand{\solutionColorDef}{0 .6 0}
\solutionColor{\solutionColorDef}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Default Colors for Checks, Crosses, and Borders}
%
% These commands are used to define the colors for the checks,
% crosses and correct symbols.  These are controlled by JavaScript,
% so use the correct syntax for defining colors here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@getCmdName#1#2{\edef#1{\expandafter\@gobble\string#2}}
\def\eq@getfirst#1#2\@nil{\def\eq@argi{#1}}
\def\eq@checkValidityModel#1{%
    \if#1g\else\if#1r\else\if#1c\else
        \PackageError{exerquiz}
        {JavaScript does not support this model}
        {Use a named color from one of the models gray, rgb, or cmyk.}
    \fi\fi\fi
}
\def\eq@jsSetColorMsg#1#2{\PackageWarning{exerquiz}
    {The argument `#2' of \string#1\MessageBreak
    is not of the right form.\MessageBreak Using the default}}
\def\exModelInfo#1#2{%
    \uppercase{\def\eq@ucmodel{#1}}\def\eq@modelspec{#2}%
    \eq@getfirst#1\@nil\eq@checkValidityModel{\eq@argi}%
}
\def\eq@checkRawJSColor#1{%
    \expandafter\eq@@checkRawJSColor#1\@nil
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% We test for raw JS color in two ways, look for \texttt{["} or look for \texttt{co}
% as the first two tokens.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eq@@checkRawJSColor#1#2#3\@nil{\let\eq@rawJSCol\eq@NO
    \if[#1\if#2"\let\eq@rawJSCol\eq@YES\fi\fi
    \ifx\eq@rawJSCol\eq@NO\if#1c\if#2o\let\eq@rawJSCol\eq@YES\fi\fi\fi
}
\def\eq@checkRawJSColor#1{%
    \edef\eq@argi{#1}\ifx\eq@argi\@empty
        \def\eq@next{\let\eq@rawJSCol\eq@YES}\else
    \def\eq@next{\expandafter\eq@@checkRawJSColor#1\@nil}\fi\eq@next
}
\def\eq@jsColorWXColori#1#2{\edef\eq@colorDefn{#2}%
    \ifx\eq@colorDefn\@empty
        \ifx\is@Defined\eq@YES
            \edef\eq@colorDefn{\csname\cmdName Def\endcsname}\else
            \PackageError{exerquiz}{JS color \string#1 has an
                empty definition}{}\fi
    \fi
    \eq@checkRawJSColor{\eq@colorDefn}%
    \ifx\eq@rawJSCol\eq@NO
    \extractcolorspec{\eq@colorDefn}{\eq@tmp@color}%
    \expandafter\exModelInfo\eq@tmp@color
    \edef#1{["\eq@ucmodel",\eq@modelspec]}%
    \else\edef#1{\eq@colorDefn}\fi
}
\def\eq@jsColorWOXColori#1#2{\def\eq@colorDefn{#2}%
    \ifx\eq@colorDefn\@empty
        \ifx\is@Defined\eq@YES
            \edef\eq@colorDefn{\csname cmdName Def\endcsname}\else
            \PackageError{exerquiz}{JS color \string#1 has an
                empty definition}{}\fi
    \fi
    \eq@checkRawJSColor{\eq@colorDefn}%
    \ifx\eq@rawJSCol\eq@YES\edef#1{\eq@colorDefn}\else
        \eq@jsSetColorMsg{#1}{#2}\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{\jsColor} General command for defining a JavaScript Color, and support commands for
% \textsf{xcolor} and w/o \textsf{xcolor}. When \textsf{xcolor} is used, colors
% can be specified using the usual {\LaTeX} color methods:
%\begin{verbatim}
%   \jsColor{\rghtColorJS}{blue}
%   \jsColor{\rghtColorJS}{[cmyk]{0,1,0,0}}
%\end{verbatim}
% or the \emph{JavaScript format} can be used:
%\begin{verbatim}
%   \jsColor{\rghtColorJS}{["RGB",0,0,1]}
%   \jsColor{\rghtColorJS}{["CMYK",0,1,0,0}
%\end{verbatim}
% When \textsf{xcolor} is not used, only the JavaScript format is allowed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\jsColor#1#2{\eq@getCmdName{\cmdName}{#1}%
    \let\is@Defined\eq@YES
    \expandafter\ifx\csname\cmdName\endcsname\relax
        \PackageWarning{exerquiz}{\string#1 is not a command used by
        exerquiz.\MessageBreak Will define it anyway}%
        \let\is@Defined\eq@NO\fi
    \HyColor@IfXcolor{\eq@jsColorWXColori{#1}{#2}}%
        {\eq@jsColorWOXColori{#1}{#2}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The default colors for the above defined color declaration commands, the
% the default definitions of the color commands. The commands appear in pairs
% and are used in the second and third arguments of \cs{eq@jsColor}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\rghtColorJSDef{["RGB", 0, .6, 0]}
\newcommand\rghtColorJS{\rghtColorJSDef}
\newcommand\wrngColorJSDef{color.red}
\newcommand\wrngColorJS{\wrngColorJSDef}
\newcommand\partialColorJSDef{color.blue}
\newcommand\partialColorJS{\partialColorJSDef}
\newcommand\defaultColorJSDef{color.black}
\newcommand\defaultColorJS{\defaultColorJSDef}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The next command is special, it is used in \texttt{shortquiz}zes to allow a localization
% of the color. Unlike the ones above, this can be specified within the body of the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\defaultColorJSLoc\@empty
\let\defaultColorJSLocDef\@empty
\let\rghtColorJSLoc\@empty
\let\rghtColorJSLocDef\@empty
\let\wrngColorJSLoc\@empty
\let\wrngColorJSLocDef\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \paragraph*{Symbol choice.} This is in support for changing check styles for quizzes
% These must be declared in the preamble.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\chooseJSsymbol{\@ifstar{\let\eq@isstar\eq@YES\chooseJSsymboli}
    {\let\eq@isstar\eq@NO\chooseJSsymboli}}
\def\chooseJSsymboli#1{\lowercase{\edef\eq@arg{#1}}%
    \def\eq@carg{check}\ifx\eq@arg\eq@carg
    \def\eq@retnStyle{style.ch}\else
    \def\eq@carg{cross}\ifx\eq@arg\eq@carg
    \def\eq@retnStyle{style.cr}\else
    \def\eq@carg{diamond}\ifx\eq@arg\eq@carg
    \def\eq@retnStyle{style.di}\else
    \def\eq@carg{circle}\ifx\eq@arg\eq@carg
    \def\eq@retnStyle{style.ci}\else
    \def\eq@carg{star}\ifx\eq@arg\eq@carg
    \def\eq@retnStyle{style.st}\else
    \def\eq@carg{square}\ifx\eq@arg\eq@carg
    \def\eq@retnStyle{style.sq}\else
    \let\eq@retnStyle\@empty
    \ifx\eq@isstar\eq@NO\PackageWarning{exerquiz}
    {Argument `#1' not recognized.\MessageBreak
     Permissible values are check, cross, diamond,\MessageBreak
     circle, star, square. Will use the default}\fi
    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\setRightAnsSymb}
%    The check style when the user is correct. (def: \texttt{style.ch})
%    \begin{macro}{\setCorrAnsSymb}
%    The check style when the user is wrong but you are marking which response is correct.
%    (def: \texttt{style.ci})
%    \begin{macro}{\setWrongAnsSymb}
%    The check style when the use chooses the incorrect answer.
%    (def: \texttt{style.cr})
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\def\defineAnsStyle#1#2{%
%    \eq@getCmdName{\cmdName}{#1}\let\is@Defined\eq@YES
%}
\newcommand\setRghtAnsSymb[1]{\chooseJSsymbol{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@retnStyle\@empty\else
    \edef\rghtAnsSymbJS{\eq@retnStyle}%
    \edef\rghtAnsSymb{\eq@carg}\fi}
\def\rghtAnsSymbJS{style.ch}
\def\rghtAnsSymb{check}
\newcommand\setCorrAnsSymb[1]{\chooseJSsymbol{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@retnStyle\@empty\else
    \edef\corrAnsSymbJS{\eq@retnStyle}%
    \edef\corrAnsSymb{\eq@carg}\fi}
\def\corrAnsSymbJS{style.ci}
\def\corrAnsSymb{circle}
\newcommand\setWrngAnsSymb[1]{\chooseJSsymbol{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@retnStyle\@empty\else
    \edef\wrngAnsSymbJS{\eq@retnStyle}%
    \edef\wrngAnsSymb{\eq@carg}\fi}
\def\wrngAnsSymbJS{style.cr}
\def\wrngAnsSymb{cross}
\def\setRghtAnsSymbLoc#1{\chooseJSsymbol*{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@retnStyle\@empty
        \let\rghtAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty\else
        \edef\rghtAnsSymbJSLoc{\eq@retnStyle}\fi
}
\def\setCorrAnsSymbLoc#1{\chooseJSsymbol*{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@retnStyle\@empty
        \let\corrAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty\else
        \edef\corrAnsSymbJSLoc{\eq@retnStyle}\fi
}
\def\setWrngAnsSymbLoc#1{\chooseJSsymbol*{#1}%
    \ifx\eq@retnStyle\@empty
        \let\wrngAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty\else
        \edef\wrngAnsSymbJSLoc{\eq@retnStyle}\fi
}
\let\rghtAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty
\let\rghtAnsSymbJSLocDef\@empty
\let\corrAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty
\let\corrAnsSymbJSLocDef\@empty
\let\wrngAnsSymbJSLoc\@empty
\let\wrngAnsSymbJSLocDef\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% \subsection{``Every'' Definitions}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\everyeqTextField[1]{\def\every@eqTextField{#1}}
\def\every@eqTextField{}
\newcommand\everyRespBoxMath[1]{\def\every@RespBoxMath{#1}}
\def\every@RespBoxMath{}
\newcommand\everyRespBoxTxt[1]{\def\every@RespBoxTxt{#1}}
\def\every@RespBoxTxt{}
\newcommand\everyrbMarkup[1]{\def\every@rbMarkup{#1}}
\def\every@rbMarkup{}
\newcommand\everysqTallyBox[1]{\def\every@sqTallyBox{#1}}
\def\every@sqTallyBox{}
\newcommand\everysqTallyTotal[1]{\def\every@sqTallyTotal{#1}}
\def\every@sqTallyTotal{}
\newcommand\everyScoreField[1]{\def\every@ScoreField{#1}}
\def\every@ScoreField{}
\newcommand\everyAnswerField[1]{\def\every@AnswerField{#1}}
\def\every@AnswerField{}
\newcommand\everyPointsField[1]{\def\every@PointsField{#1}}
\def\every@PointsField{}
\newcommand\everyPercentField[1]{\def\every@PercentField{#1}}
\def\every@PercentField{}
\newcommand\everyGradeField[1]{\def\every@GradeField{#1}}
\def\every@GradeField{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\AddAAFormat}
% Here is the definition of \cs{AddAAFormat}. This macro can be used
% in \cs{RespBoxMath} to add in formatting of the answer. This macro is
% necessary because the \cs{AA} actions for the \textsf{exerquiz} quiz macros
% are ``protected''; the document author cannot accidentally overwrite my
% JavaScript for processing the user's answer.
% \begin{flushleft}
% Example: In the preamble
%\begin{verbatim}
%\begin{defineJS}{\formatAsSet}
%if (event.value.replace(/\\s/g,"") != "")
%    event.value =  "{ " + event.value + " }";
%\end{defineJS}
%\end{verbatim}
% and in the body of a \texttt{quiz} environment,
%\begin{verbatim}
%$x^2 - 3x + 2 = 0$, $S = \RespBoxMath[\AddAAFormat{\formatAsSet}
%    \rectW{.75in}\textSize{0}]{1,2}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespSetNum}$
%\end{verbatim}
%\end{flushleft}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@eqAddAAFormat#1{\def\eqFormatArg{#1}}
\def\eq@AddAAFormat{}
\def\formatAsSet{try{formatAsSet()}catch(e){}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\AddAAKeystroke}
% The value of this key is JS code that executes after the input box has been processed.
% Created to use with AcroFleX for showing graphs after the user enters a response.
%
%\changes{v6.3b}{2008/06/29}
%{
% Added the \cs{AddAAKeystroke} to the recognizable set of keys. This will be obeyed
% within the optional arguments of \cs{RespBoxMath}.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@eqAddAAKeystroke#1{\def\argi{#1}\ifx\argi\@empty
    \def\eqAAKeystrokeArg{}\else\def\eqAAKeystrokeArg{\r #1}\fi}
\def\eqAAKeystrokeArg{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{\everysqRadioButton}
%    \begin{macro}{\everyqRadioButton}
% Here, you can control the appearance of all the standard checkboxes, also
% effects radio fields of \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{quiz}.
%    \begin{macro}{\everyqckCheckBox}
% (2010/07/30) Added \cs{everyqckCheckBox} to control the appearance
% of the underlying checkbox for \texttt{manswers} environments.
% Previously \cs{everyqRadioButton} was used, but this is the same as used by
% multiple choice. To get control over \texttt{manswers} when \cs{useMCCircles}
% and \cs{useMCCRects} \texttt{manswers} needs it one ``every'' command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\everysqRadioButton}[1]{\def\every@sqRadioButton{#1}}
\def\every@sqRadioButton{}
\newcommand{\everyqRadioButton}[1]{\def\every@qRadioButton{#1}}
\def\every@qRadioButton{}
\newcommand{\everyqckCheckBox}[1]{\def\every@qckCheckbox{#1}}
\def\every@qckCheckbox{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\everyqCheckBox}
% (12/08/2008) Added \cs{everyqCheckBox}, this is used only for the check boxes
% that hold the answer of a multiple choice question, not a multiple selection
% problem. This change is needed to create a circle radio button, in this case
% we need to make the boundary of the check box to 0 width.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\everyqCheckBox}[1]{\def\every@qCheckBox{#1}}
\def\every@qCheckBox{}
\newcommand{\everysqCheckBox}[1]{\def\every@sqCheckBox{#1}}
\def\every@sqCheckBox{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
% Here, you can control the appearance of all the standard buttons.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\everyeqButtonField\everyButtonField
\newcommand\everyCorrAnsButton[1]{\def\every@CorrAnsButton{#1}}
\def\every@CorrAnsButton{}
\newcommand\everysqClearButton[1]{\def\every@sqClearButton{#1}}
\def\every@sqClearButton{}
\newcommand\everyeqButton[1]{\def\every@eqButton{#1}}
\newcommand\everyCorrButton{\everyeqButton}
\def\every@eqButton{}
\newcommand\everyBeginQuizButton[1]{\def\every@BeginQuizButton{#1}}
\def\every@BeginQuizButton{}
\newcommand\everyEndQuizButton[1]{\def\every@EndQuizButton{#1}}
\def\every@EndQuizButton{}
% Replace everyeqGenButten with everyPushButton
\let\everyeqGenButton\everyPushButton
\let\every@eqGenButton\every@PushButton
\newcommand\everyeqIcon[1]{\def\every@eqIcon{#1}}
\def\every@eqIcon{}
% dps new
\let\eqGenButton\pushButton
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\eqIcon}
% Create a push button for displaying an icon. I've set this on read only, this
% can be removed by saying \verb+\Ff{-\FfReadOnly}+/
%\begin{verbatim}
% #1 = optional, used to enter any modification of the appearance/actions
% #2 = the title of the button field
% #3 = the width of the bounding rectangle
% #4 = the height of the bounding rectangle
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eqIconDefaults
{%
    \rawPDF{}\S{}\mkIns{/TP 1}
    \CA{}\RC{}\AC{}\BC{}\BG{}\H{N}
    \textColor{0 g}\Ff{\FfReadOnly}
}
\newcommand\eqIcon[4][]
{%
    \push@@Button{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{}{\eq@setButtonProps
        \eq@Button@driver}{\eqIconDefaults\every@ButtonField
        \every@eqIcon}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \section{Document Level JavaScripts}
%
% The \texttt{insDLJS} package is used to insert the JavaScript at
% the document level. This package makes all necessary
% driver-dependent conversions, we just write the JavaScript code,
% which is hard enough.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*aebjs>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\aeb@array(#1){new Array (#1)}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following definitions are associated with \texttt{requireForm()}, the JS function
% defined below.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\defaultReqFormMsg}{%
    "The expression is not in the expected form."}
%    \end{macrocode}
% (07/16/11) Some definitions that may be used by \texttt{requireForm}, a \cs{RespMathBox} filter
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\refac(#1){\\(#1\\)}\def\rediv{\\/}\def\repow{\\^}
\def\redigit{\\d}\def\rechrclass(#1){[#1]}\def\reany{.}
\def\remul{[\\*]}\def\rebstr{\string^}\def\reestr{\string$}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macro}{\preDenyForm}
%    \begin{macro}{\preReqForm}
%    \begin{macro}{\postDenyForm}
% (10/07/11) Some convenience commands to simplifying the use of the \texttt{priorParse}
% and \texttt{postParse} filters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\preDenyForm(#1){\Array(denyForm,#1)}
\def\preReqForm(#1){\Array(requireForm,#1)}
\def\postDenyForm(#1){\Array(requireFormNot,#1)}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{insDLJS*}[exerquizLoaded]{exerquiz}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Global Data}
% Global data and some miscellaneous definitions
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{newsegment}{AeB: AcroTeX eDucation Bundle}
/*
        Document Level JavaScript
        AcroTeX eDucation Bundle
        D. P. Story copyright 2000-\the\year
*/
var exerquizLoaded = true;
this.disclosed = true;
app.runtimeHighlight=false;
\end{newsegment}
\begin{newsegment}{Eq: Global Data}
var ok2Continue = true;
%    \end{macrocode}
% The global variable \texttt{ProcessIt} is really used only once. In the
% function \texttt{DisplayAnswer()}. The function is called by the correct
% answer button. It sets \texttt{ProcessIt = false}, then it inserts the correct
% answer into the text field. A \texttt{false} value of \texttt{ProcessIt}
% prevents the \texttt{ProcResp} (and others) from from processing the answer.
%
% The arrays \texttt{RightWrong}, \texttt{ProbValue}, \texttt{ProbDist} and \texttt{ProbType} maintain quiz information
% for a quiz. The following are typical values of these arrays. This is a quiz taken
% from the manswer.tex demo file. Question 1 is a multiple selection question; Question 2
% is a multiple choice question; Question 3 is a math fill-in question; and Question 4
% is a grouped question. (The \texttt{undefined} entries indicate an empty or a not used entry.)
%\begin{verbatim}
%RightWrong.toSource()
%[undefined, [0, 1, [undefined, undefined, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1]], 1, 1,
%   [undefined, 1, 1, 1, 0]]
%
%Responses.toSource()
%[undefined, [undefined, undefined, "b", "c", "d", "e", "f"], "a", "cos(x)",
%   [undefined, "0", "4", "1", "9"]]
%
%ProbValue.toSource()
%[undefined, [3, 5, [undefined, undefined, -2, 3, 3, -2, 3]], [0, 3, 0], 3,
%   [1, "groupEval", 4, 4, 1, 1, 1, 1]]
%
%ProbDist.toSource()
%[undefined, 5, 3, 3, 3]
%
%ProbType.toSource()
%[undefined, "na", "na", "na", "na"]
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
var ProcessIt = true;
var retn;
var Score=0;
var ptScore=0;
var pcScore=0;
var quizGrade="C";
var e = Math.E;
var pi = Math.PI;
var replaceExclaim = \replaceexclaim;
var negPointsAllowed = \negpointsallowed;
var negPointsMarkupAllowed = \negpointsmarkupallowed;
var aQuizControl = new Array();
var RightWrong=new Array();
var ProbValue = new Array();
var ProbDist = new Array();
var ProbType = new Array();
var Responses=new Array();
var appAlerts = new Object;
var _mathVars;
%    \end{macrocode}
% JSf is an array of supported mathematical functions.
%\changes{v6.06}{2007/02/23}
%{
% Separated the \texttt{JSf} array into \texttt{JSfBuiltIn} and \texttt{JSfCustom}. This
% allows us to identify the built-in JavaScript functions. I concatenate these two
% into \texttt{JSf}.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
var JSfBuiltIn = new Array
    ( "abs","acos","asin","atan","ceil", "floor","cos","exp",
      "log","max","min","pow","random","round","sin",
      "sqrt","tan");
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.3c}{2008/07/03}
%{
%   Added the hyperbolic functions and inverse hyperbolic functions
%}
% Additional function recognized by exerquiz. Note to self, when adding
% functions, if one function is a substring of another, list the function
% with the longer name first. Searching is done in the order the functions
% are listed in this array.
%\changes{v6.3o}{2010/05/24}
%{
%   Modification of the array structure for supported JS functions, due to
%    Robert Marik. He writes, ``arcsin(x), arccos(x) and arctan(x) are not
%    recognized properly when implmulti from dljslib is active. I think that
%    the problem is caused by the fact that arcsin(x) follows sin(x) in the
%    field of known functions and converted into arc*sin(x) and then into
%    a*r*c*sin(x). I enclose the patch for the exerquiz.dtx file which in my
%    opinion solves the problem.''
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
var JSfCustomEarly = new Array ("arctan", "arcsin", "arccos")
var JSfCustomLate = new Array
    ( "logc", "ln","sec","csc","cot",
       "asinh", "acosh","atanh","acoth","asech","acsch",
       "sinh", "cosh","tanh","coth","sech","csch","sgn",
       "C","P","fact","pi");
var JSf = new Array().concat(JSfCustomEarly, JSfBuiltIn, JSfCustomLate);
var JSfCustom = new Array().concat(JSfCustomEarly, JSfCustomLate);
var JSc = new Array("PI","E")
%    \end{macrocode}
% Additional functions that I've defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function ln(x) { return Math.log(x); }
function sec(x) { return 1/Math.cos(x); }
function csc(x) { return 1/Math.sin(x);}
function cot(x) { return Math.cos(x)/Math.sin(x); }
function arctan(x) { return Math.atan(x); }
function arcsin(x) { return Math.asin(x); }
function arccos(x) { return Math.acos(x); }
function logc(x) { return Math.LOG10E * Math.log(x); }
function C(x,y) {return ch(x,y);}
function P(x,y) {return perm(x,y);}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Additional functions that I've defined. (07/03/08)
%    \begin{macrocode}
function sinh(x) { return ( Math.exp(x) - Math.exp(-x) )/2; }
function cosh(x) { return ( Math.exp(x) + Math.exp(-x) )/2; }
function tanh(x) {
    return (Math.exp(x)-Math.exp(-x))/(Math.exp(x)+Math.exp(-x)); }
function coth(x) {
    return ( Math.exp(x)+Math.exp(-x))/(Math.exp(x)-Math.exp(-x)); }
function sech(x) { return 2/( Math.exp(x) + Math.exp(-x) )/2; }
function csch(x) { return 2/( Math.exp(x) - Math.exp(-x) )/2; }
function asinh(x) { return Math.log (x+Math.sqrt(Math.pow(x,2)+1)); }
function acosh(x) {
    return Math.log (x+Math.sqrt(Math.pow(x,2)-1)); } // x ge 1
function atanh(x) { return .5*Math.log ((1+x)/(1-x)); } // -1 < x < 1
function acoth(x) { return atanh(1/x); } // |x| > 1
function asech(x) { return acosh(1/x); } // 0 < x le 1
function asch(x) { return asinh(1/x); } // x ne 0
function sgn(x) { return (x==0?0:(x<0?-1:1)) };
%    \end{macrocode}
% The aGroup array lists left and right grouping delimiters. This array is
% used by ParseInput() to call CkBalP().
%    \begin{macrocode}
var aGroup = new Array
    ( ["\(","\)",\eqParens],
      ["[","]",\eqBrackets],
      ["{","}",\eqBraces]
    );
\end{newsegment}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Math Fill-in}
% This section of the code is primarily dedicated to processing the math fill-in questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{newsegment}{Eq: Support for Math Fill-in}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Description: Checks for balanced grouping delimiters.
% Arguments:
%\begin{enumerate}
%   \item \texttt{UserInput}: A string
%   \item \texttt{lDelimiter}: left delimiter
%   \item \texttt{rDelimiter}: right delimiter
%\end{enumerate}
% Returns: \texttt{true} (if balanced); \texttt{false} (if not)
%    \begin{macrocode}
function CkBalP(UserInput,lDelimiter,rDelimiter)
{
    var Lcount=0, Rcount=0;
    for (var k=0; k < UserInput.length; k++)
    {
        if (UserInput.charAt(k) == lDelimiter) Lcount++;
        else if (UserInput.charAt(k) == rDelimiter) Rcount++;
    }
    return (Lcount==Rcount);
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Description: This function simply determines if there are an even number of
% `\verb+|+' chars.  Used for parsing absolute value.
% \verb=| x+2 | --> abs(x+2)=.\\
% Arguments:\\
%   \texttt{UserInput}: a string\\
%   Returns: \texttt{true} (if even); \texttt{false} (if odd)
%    \begin{macrocode}
function CkBalVert(UserInput)
{
    var Lcount=0;
    for (var k=0; k < UserInput.length; k++)
        if (UserInput.charAt(k)=="|") Lcount++;
    return (Lcount \% 2 == 0);
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Description: This function searches for alpha words and matches them against supported
% mathematical functions.\\
% Arguments:\\
%   \texttt{UserInput}: a string\\
%   Returns: 1 (if there is a match); 0 (if no match)
%       also sets the global variable \texttt{ok2Continue} to \texttt{false}.
% \changes{v6.4c}{2011/07/01}{Ckfunc now uses a global variable \texttt{\_mathVars} which
% holds the variables of the current \cs{RespBoxMath} being processed. We search
% all substrings containing 2 or more letters; if it consists only of the variables
% that substring is OK.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
function Ckfuncs(UserInput)
{
    var re, rei, reii;
    re = /[a-zA-Z]{2,}/g;
    reii=/r:|i:|,/g
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get \texttt{\_mathVars}, and remove special formatting, new variable \texttt{\_v}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var _v=_mathVars.replace(reii,"");
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define a regular expression that will return null if the string
% contains only letters from the variable list \texttt{\_v}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
	rei=new RegExp("[^"+_v+"]", "g");
    aF = UserInput.match(re);
    if ( aF == null ) return true;
    for (var i=0; i < aF.length; i++)
    {
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the current string contains only variables, move on to the next string
%    \begin{macrocode}
		if ( rei.exec(aF[i]) == null ) continue;
        for(var j=0; j < JSf.length; j++)
            if ( aF[i].indexOf(JSf[j]) != -1 ) break;
        if (j < JSf.length) continue;
        for(var j=0; j < JSc.length; j++)
            if ( aF[i].indexOf(JSc[j]) != -1 ) break;
        if(j==JSc.length)
        {
            app.alert(\eqerrBadMathFunc,3);
%    \end{macrocode}
% 09/07/09 added the next line, this could change behavior. We try to signal
% that an alert box has already been displayed, don't display another one.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            ok2Continue=false;
            return false;
        }
    }
    return true;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This function displays the answer.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function DisplayAnswer(fieldname,theanswer)
{
    ProcessIt = false;
    var oDefault;
    if (arguments.length > 2 )
        var oQName = arguments[2];
    else var oQName = oDefault;
    if (typeof oQName=="undefined")
        var oQName = new Object;
    var defaultColor=(typeof oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\defaultColorJS:oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc;
    try {
    this.getField(fieldname).value=(theanswer);
    this.getField(fieldname).strokeColor = defaultColor
    } catch(e) {}
    ProcessIt = true;
}
function EvalCorrAnsButton(fieldname,theanswer)
{
    theanswer = eval(theanswer);
    DisplayAnswer(fieldname,theanswer);
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finds and returns the position of the matching parentheses.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function FindBalP(UserInput,Poff,Forward)
{
    var j,depth;
    if (Forward)
    {
        for (depth=-1, j=Poff+1; depth !=0; j++)
        {
            if ( j > UserInput.length) return null;
            if (UserInput.charAt(j)=="\(") depth--;
            else if (UserInput.charAt(j)=="\)") depth++;
        }
        j--
    }
    else
    {
        for (depth=-1, j=Poff-1; depth !=0; j--)
        {
            if ( j < 1 ) return null;
            if (UserInput.charAt(j)=="\)") depth--;
            else if (UserInput.charAt(j)=="\(") depth++;
        }
        j++
    }
    return j;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remove white spaces from \texttt{UserInput}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function stripWhiteSpace (UserInput)
{
    UserInput = UserInput.replace(/\s/g,"");
    if(UserInput==null || UserInput.length==0)
    {
        ok2Continue = false;
        return false;
    } else return UserInput;
}
function stripOutMuli (UserInput)
{
    UserInput = UserInput.replace(/\*/g,"");
    return UserInput;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This function takes its argument, and adds in the suffix of \texttt{Math.}
% in front of every recognizable JS built-in functions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function addMathObject(UserInput)
{
    for ( var i=0; i < JSfBuiltIn.length; i++) {
        var re = new RegExp("\\b("+JSfBuiltIn[i]+")\\b","g");
        UserInput = UserInput.replace(re,"Math.$1");
    }
    re = /\b(PI)\b/g;
    UserInput = UserInput.replace(re,"Math.$1");
    return UserInput;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \paragraph{ParseInput.}
%
% This is the very heart of parsing the user's input.  This function takes the
% \texttt{UserInput} and works it over and places it in a proper JavaScript expression
% for the JavaScript interpreter to evaluate.
%
% First get rid of all whitespace. Then
% check for balanced parentheses followed by checking for known
% or unknown math functions.
%
% The power function is \texttt{pow}; thus, |x^2| is \texttt{pow(x,2)}. Rather than
% make students write \texttt{pow(x,2)} we try to code things so they can enter
% |x^2| instead, much easier for them.  Now we must scan through for different
% patterns. The patterns are: |x^n|, |(expr)^n|, |x^(expr)| and |(expr1)^(expr1)|. We
% search through looking for these patterns and replace them appropriately:
% |pow(x,n)|, |pow(expr,n)|, |pow(x,expr)| and |pow (expr1,expr2)|. To do this, we
% must find balanced parentheses.
%
% For those who have Acrobat 5.0, you can call this function from the console, something
% I do quite a lot when developing new scripts. From the console, enter, for example,
% \verb+ParseInput("xycos(xy^3)")+, and the return value of this function will be
% displayed in the console.  An author can check the syntax of his/her answer.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
function ParseInput(UserInput)
{
    var re, repi;
    UserInput = stripWhiteSpace (UserInput);
    if (!ok2Continue) return null;
%    \end{macrocode}
% See if there are matching `\texttt{[]}', `\texttt{\{\}}' and `\texttt{()}'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    for(var i=0; i< aGroup.length; i++)
    {
        if(!CkBalP(UserInput, aGroup[i][0], aGroup[i][1]))
        {
            app.alert(\eqerrDelimNotBal,3);
            ok2Continue = false;
            return false;
        }
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% Replace `\texttt{[]}' and `\texttt{\{\}}' with `\texttt{()}'; only parentheses
% are used in JavaScript for grouping.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    UserInput = ChngAllGrpsToParens(UserInput);
%    UserInput = UserInput.replace(/\[|\{/g, "\(");
%    UserInput = UserInput.replace(/\]|\}/g, "\)");
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the \texttt{fact} function is defined, we attempt to replace user's input of the form
% \texttt{<number>!} with \texttt{fact(<number>)}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if ( replaceExclaim &&(typeof fact == "function") )
        UserInput = UserInput.replace(%
/(?=\()?(\d+)(?=\))?!/g,"fact($1)");
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check to see if there are an even number of absolute value symbols, `\verb+|+'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if (!CkBalVert(UserInput))
    {
        app.alert(\eqerrABS,3);
        ok2Continue = false;
        return false;
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% 07/07/08 Before we go further, find all occurrences of the JavaScript function,
% and enclose each in parentheses. This helps with some of the exponential parsing
% later. Things of the form \verb!sin^2(x)! will not be enclosed, but will be
% if the \texttt{ImplMulti} option is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    UserInput=groupJSf(UserInput);
%    \end{macrocode}
% (01/09/10) We try to identify an expression of the form \verb!e^!, when preceded by a
% letter or number, in this case we assume multiplication. We also look for
% the letter \texttt{e} when it is not in the middle of \texttt{sec}, this interpreted
% as a numerical constant, it is converted to \verb!(e^1)!.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    re=/(\w)(e)(\^)/g;
    repi=/(\w)(pi)/g;
%    \end{macrocode}
% If its a word followed by e, followed by the exponent symbol (\verb!^!), it is
% multiplication.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    UserInput=UserInput.replace(re, "$1*$2$3");
    UserInput=UserInput.replace(repi, "$1*$2");
%    UserInput=UserInput.replace(repE, "$1*$2");
%    \end{macrocode}
% We mark \texttt{sec} so we don't get a hit on the next search.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    UserInput=UserInput.replace(/(sec)/g, "s@e@c");
    re=/(\w)(e)([^\^])?/g;
%    \end{macrocode}
% If its a word, followed by e, followed by something other than \verb!^!
% then e must be used in the sense of a constant, so we replace it by
% \verb!(e^1)!, so subsequence searches within this function will ultimately
% convert it to \texttt{pow(e,1)}.
% multiplication.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    UserInput=UserInput.replace(re,"$1($2\^1)$3");
    UserInput=UserInput.replace(/(s@e@c)/g, "sec");
%    \end{macrocode}
% (07/16/11) In support of scientific notation. It is desirable to support E4, for example.
% So we search for any occurrence of  \texttt{E\cs{d}} and replace with \texttt{E+\cs{d}}.
% Note: the letters \texttt{E} and \texttt{e} are used in JS to represent floating point numbers.
% In this package \texttt{e} will be used for the natural number. Another problem,
% JavaScript does not compute something like \texttt{1*E+2}, so we must remove any \texttt{*} between
% the digit previous to \texttt{E} and \texttt{E}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    re=/E(\d)/g;
    UserInput=UserInput.replace(re,"E+$1");
    re=/(\d)\*E/g;
    UserInput=UserInput.replace(re,"$1E");
%    \end{macrocode}
% We make a rough check of the user input, if it has alpa-words of size two or greater
% that do not match up against a recognizable function, it must be an error.
%
% (09/07/09) Comment this out so we check for function in both cases, get same alert message
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    if (typeof(Ck4Exponents) == "undefined")
        if(!Ckfuncs(UserInput)) return false;
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now try to insert the multiplication operator where applicable.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if (typeof(Ck4Exponents) != "undefined")
        UserInput = Ck4Exponents(UserInput);
    if (typeof(Ck4Products) != "undefined" )
        UserInput = Ck4Products(UserInput);
    ok2Continue = true;
%    \end{macrocode}
% Convert any occurrence of log to log10 (known internally as logc). We are now (12/22/06) going to use log for
% common log even though log in JS is natural log. This may break a few things.
% \changes{v6.05f}{2006/12/22 }
% {
%   Added support for common logarithms.  log is now common logs, and ln is
%   natural logs.
% }
%    \begin{macrocode}
    re = /\b(log)\b/g;
    UserInput = UserInput.replace(re, "logc");
%    \end{macrocode}
% Search for occurrences of \verb!|<exp>|! and replace with \texttt{abs(<exp>)}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    while (/\|/.test(UserInput)&&(ok2Continue))
    {
        re = /(\|)([^\|]*)(\|)([-\+\/\*\^\)\|])/;
        if (re.test(UserInput))
            if (re.exec(UserInput)[4] == '^')
                UserInput = UserInput.replace(re, "(abs($2))$4");
            else
                UserInput = UserInput.replace(re, "abs($2)$4");
        else
        {
            re = /(\|)([^\|]*)(\|$)/;
            if (re.test(UserInput))
                UserInput = UserInput.replace(re, "abs($2)");
        }
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% We now begin our search for exponents, we search the UserInput from left to right
% for any of the four strings \texttt{"\string^"},\texttt{")\string^"}, \texttt{"\string^("}, and
% \texttt{")\string^("}, using the regular expression \texttt{reTstExp}. (07/07/08) I've rewritten
% this part of the parser to accommodate nested exponents of the form \verb!x^2^3!, which should
% be interpreted as \verb!(x^2)^2!, something like \verb!2^sin(x)! and \verb!sin(x)^2! work, the latter
% is interpreted as \verb!(sin(x))^2!. This is why earlier we executed \texttt{groupJSf} to enclose
% all JS function and their arguments in parentheses; by the time \verb!sin(x)^2! reaches this parser
% it has already been changed to \verb!(sin(x))^2!, which is correct syntax.
%
% These is another change to the parser here. We pass through \texttt{Ck4OddRoots}, which tries,
% in a crude way, to determine if this exponent is of the form \texttt{a/b}, and if so, whether
% \texttt{b}, the denominator, is an odd root. If so, we change the calculation of \texttt{Math.pow}
% to avoid a calculation bug by that JavaScript function.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var reTstExp = /(\))?\^(\()?/g;
    while ( ((aResults=reTstExp.exec(UserInput))!=null)&&(ok2Continue) )
    {
        var firstGroup = Number(Boolean(aResults[1]));      // 0 or 1
        var secondGroup = 2*Number(Boolean(aResults[2]));   // 0 or 2
        var caseStudy = firstGroup+secondGroup;             // 0,1,2,3
        switch(caseStudy) {
            case 0:
                re=/([a-zA-Z]|\d*\.?\d*)\^([a-zA-Z]|[\+-]?\d+\.?\d*|%
[\+-]?\d*\.?\d+)/;
                if (re.test(UserInput))
                    UserInput=Ck4OddRoots(UserInput,re);
                else ok2Continue=false;
                break;
            case 1:
                aP =/\)\^/.exec(UserInput);
                LeftP=FindBalP(UserInput,aP.index,0);
                re = new RegExp("\\((.{"+eval(aP.index-LeftP-1)
                    +"})\\)\\^([a-zA-Z]|[\+-]?\\d+\\.?\\d*|%
[\+-]?\\d*\\.?\\d+)");
                if (re.test(UserInput))
                    UserInput=Ck4OddRoots(UserInput,re);
                else ok2Continue=false;
                break;
            case 2:
                aP = /\^\(/.exec(UserInput);
                RightP=FindBalP(UserInput,aP.index+1,1);
                re = new RegExp("([a-zA-Z]|\\d*\\.?\\d*)\\^\\((.{"
                    +eval(RightP-aP.index-2)+"})\\)");
                if (re.test(UserInput))
                    UserInput=Ck4OddRoots(UserInput,re);
                else ok2Continue=false;
                break;
            case 3:
                aP = /\)\^\(/.exec(UserInput);
                LeftP=FindBalP(UserInput,aP.index,0);
                RightP=FindBalP(UserInput,aP.index+2,1);
                re = new RegExp("\\((.{"+eval(aP.index-LeftP-1)
                    +"})\\)\\^\\((.{"+eval(RightP-aP.index-3)+"})\\)");
                if (re.test(UserInput))
                    UserInput=Ck4OddRoots(UserInput,re);
                else ok2Continue=false;
                break;
            default:
                ok2Continue=false;
        }
% console.println("working.."+UserInput);
    }
    if (!ok2Continue)
    {
        app.alert(\eqerrBadExp,3);
        return false;
    }
    else {
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.06}{2007/02/23}
%{
% Now, just before we return the parsed expression, we append all built-in
% JavaScript functions and constants with \texttt{Math.}, this is to avoid
% having to use the \texttt{with(Math)} construct. These changes are in support
% of using scientific notation.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
        UserInput=addMathObject(UserInput);
        return UserInput;
    }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{ChngAllGrpsToParens}(2011/10/04) Separated out the routine to replace `\texttt{[}' and `\verb!{!' with
% `\texttt{(}'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function ChngAllGrpsToParens(UserInput)
{
    UserInput = UserInput.replace(/\[|\{/g, "\(");
    UserInput = UserInput.replace(/\]|\}/g, "\)");
    return UserInput;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{Ck4OddRoots}The \texttt{Ck4OddRoots} function looks for exponents of the form \texttt{a/b},
% it checks whether \texttt{b} is an odd integer, if yes, instead of returning
% the usual of \verb!"(pow($1,$2))"!, it returns something like
% \verb!(sgn(<base>)^a*(abs(<base>)^a)^(1/b))!. This gives a base that evaluates
% to a negative number a change of being evaluated, and avoid a bug in the \texttt{Math.pow}
% function.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function Ck4OddRoots(UserInput,re) {
    var a=re.exec(UserInput);
%    \end{macrocode}
% \texttt{a[2]} should be the exponent
% try to remove extraneous parentheses
%    \begin{macrocode}
    while ( a[2].charAt(0)=="\(") {
        var RightP=FindBalP(a[2],0,1); // forward search
        if (RightP == a[2].length-1)
            a[2]=a[2].substring(1,a[2].length-1);
        else break;
    }
    var b=a[2].split("/");
%    \end{macrocode}
% We are looking for an exponent of the form a/b, if we can't find it
% we process this power in the usual way. \texttt{b[0]} is our possible numerator
% and \texttt{b[1]} is our possible denominator.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if ( b.length==2 ) {
        try { _m=eval(b[1])
%    \end{macrocode}
% We try to evaluate the denominator \texttt{b[1]}. If there are unbalanced
% parentheses, JavaScript will throw an exception, if \texttt{\_m} is either
% undefined or not a number, we throw an exception. The expression will be
% processed in the usual way.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            if ( _m == undefined || isNaN(_m) ) throw new Error();
%    \end{macrocode}
% The denominator appears to be numerical, so we'll continue
%    \begin{macrocode}
            var d = b[1];
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check for the presence of enclosing parentheses
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var isEnclosed=(d.charAt(0) == "\(" && d.charAt(d.length-1)=="\)");
%    \end{macrocode}
% if not enclosed look for arithmetic operations
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if (!isEnclosed)
%    \end{macrocode}
% if arithmetic operations of add/sub found, exit. In this case, perhaps the user had an
% exponent of the form \texttt{x/2 + 3}, and so \texttt{d = 2 + 3}, which is not the desired denominator.
% We'll throw an exception, and process as usual.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        if (/.+[\+\-].+/.test(d)) throw new Error();
%    \end{macrocode}
% remove enclosing parentheses
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if (isEnclosed) d = s.substring(1,d.length-1);
%    \end{macrocode}
% now need to do the same thing for the numerator
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var n = b[0];
    isEnclosed=(n.charAt(0) == "\(" && n.charAt(d.length-1)=="\)");
    if (!isEnclosed)
%    \end{macrocode}
% if arithmetic operations of add/sub found, exit. If numerator was not enclosed
% in parentheses, and there is either addition or subtraction, we are looking
% at an exponent of the form \texttt{1 + x/d,} and \texttt{n = 1 + x}. The numerator is not \texttt{1+x}, we
% process in the usual way.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            if (/.+[\+\-].+/.test(n)) throw new Error();
%    \end{macrocode}
% I don't think we need to remove the enclosing parentheses
% as we did for the denominator.
%
% Now check if the denominator, \texttt{d}, is an integer, for that we'll use \texttt{parseInt},
% If it is an integer, we see if it is odd or even using \verb!d % 2!, which yields
% a nonzero remainder if d is odd. If \texttt{d} passes all tests, we write
% \verb!<base>^(n/d)! as \verb!(sgn(<base>))^n! \verb!(abs(<base>)^(n/d))!.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            if ( d == parseInt(d) && ( Boolean(d \% 2) ) ) {
                UserInput=UserInput.replace(re,
                    "(pow(sgn($1),"+n+")*(pow(abs($1),$2)))");
%    \end{macrocode}
% We we have an odd integer as a denominator, we return our result here
%    \begin{macrocode}
                return UserInput;
            }
%    \end{macrocode}
% All exceptions come here, then continue on to the lines that follow.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        } catch(e) {}
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% If we don't have an odd integer as a denominator, we return here
%    \begin{macrocode}
    UserInput=UserInput.replace(re,"(pow($1,$2))");
    return UserInput;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{groupJSf}We enclose all recognizable functions in parentheses. This makes it easier for doing
% exponents, and avoids parsing errors. We look for functions of the form \texttt{fname(..)},
% replace that with \texttt{fname@(..)} to avoid an infinite loop, as we search for the function
% name followed by a left parenthesis. Once finished, we remove the \texttt@ character.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function groupJSf(UserInput)
{
    var re, regexp, aP, RightP;
    for (var i=0; (i<JSf.length) && (ok2Continue); i++)
    {
        re = new RegExp(JSf[i]+"\\\(");
        while ( re.test(UserInput) && (ok2Continue) )
        {
            regexp = new RegExp(JSf[i]+"\\\(", "g");
            if ( (aP = regexp.exec(UserInput)) != null )
            {
                RightP=FindBalP(UserInput,regexp.lastIndex-1,1);
                offsetArg = RightP - regexp.lastIndex;
                regexp = new RegExp(%
"("+JSf[i]+")\\((.{"+offsetArg+"})\\)");
                regexp.lastIndex=0;
                if (regexp.test(UserInput))
                    UserInput=UserInput.replace(regexp,"($1@($2))");
                else ok2Continue=false;
                continue;
            }
        }
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remove the \texttt@ marker, and return.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    UserInput=UserInput.replace(/@/g,"");
    return UserInput;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Process the user's response.  Here, we randomly choose, $n$,
% points from the selected interval $[a,b]$. The correct answer (as
% supplied by the author of the document and the answer provided by
% the user are evaluated at each of the $n$ points. If any of the
% evaluations differs by more than \texttt{epsilon}, the answer is
% considered wrong.
%
% The idea for evaluating user input in this way comes from  Drs.\
% Wlodzimierz Bryc and Stephan Pelikan of The University of
% Cincinnati.  These two have developed an \texttt{html} based
% \textbf{Online Exercise System} which can  evaluate objective
% type questions. This evaluation, however, takes place on the
% \emph{server-side}. This implementation is on \emph{the client-side}.
%
%    \begin{macro}{TypeParameters}
% The argument \texttt{v} is either a comma delimited list of variables \texttt{"x,y,z"} or just a list \texttt{"xyz"}.
% This function types each untyped variable that is not typed. Currently, there
% are only two data types: \texttt{"r"} and \texttt{"i"}.  \texttt{"r:x"} means \texttt{"x"} is a real variable,
% \texttt{"i:x"} means \texttt{"x"} is an integer variable.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function TypeParameters(v)
{
    var aV;
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \texttt{v} has a colon in it, we take that as a signal that the variables are comma
% delimited.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    aV = ( (v.indexOf(":") == -1) && (v.indexOf(",") == -1) ) ?
        v.split("") : v.split(",");
    for ( var i=0; i < aV.length; i++)
        if ( aV[i].indexOf(":") == -1 ) aV[i] = "r:"+aV[i];
    return aV.join(",")
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macro}{ProcResp}
% This function handles numerical answers or function of a single variable, x,
% that evaluate to a number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function ProcResp(flag,CorrAns,n,epsilon,a,indepVar,oComp)
{
    if (!ProcessIt) return null;
    var fieldname = event.target.name;
    var UserAns = event.value;
    var success = _ProcResp(flag,CorrAns,UserAns,%
n,epsilon,a,indepVar,oComp);
%    if ( success == -1 ) return null;
%    \end{macrocode}
% 09/07/09 Added next line to avoid double alert boxes
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if ( success == -1 || !ok2Continue ) return null;
    if ( success == null ) { return syntaxError(), null; }
    return notifyField(success, flag, fieldname);
}
// changed name of var comp -> oComp
function _ProcResp(flag,CorrAns,UserAns,n,epsilon,a,indepVar,oComp)
{
    ok2Continue = true;
%    \end{macrocode}
% by preprocessing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    CorrAns = ParseInput(CorrAns);
    if (!ok2Continue) {
        app.alert("Syntax error in author's answer! Check console.", 3);
        return null;
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \texttt{oComp} is an object, then see if it has a \texttt{comp} property
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var comp = ( typeof oComp == "object" ) ?
        (typeof oComp.comp == "undefined" ) ?
            diffCompare : oComp.comp : oComp;
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \texttt{comp} parameter, which has been changed to \texttt{oComp}, can now be
% an object. One property of this object is \texttt{comp}, handled above. Another
% property is \texttt{priorParse}, this is a function that returns \texttt{null}
% or \texttt{true}. This \texttt{priorParse} function allows for additional
% filtering of the \texttt{UserAns} before parsing. If it returns \texttt{true},
% we are ok to continue, if \texttt{null}, we don't like something the user has entered,
% and ask him/her to change it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if ( (typeof(oComp)=="object") %
&& (typeof(oComp.priorParse)!="undefined") ) {
        var retn=processSpecialParse(oComp.priorParse,UserAns);
        if (retn==null) return -1;
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2012/04/13) Bruce Wagner reports a problem with the user enters an answer containing
% a comma \texttt{"3,2"}, if the correct answer is 2, exerquiz marks the response as correct
% even though the user has also entered a 3. The comma operator in JS, evaluates its operands
% one to the left, one to the right, and returns the value of the one on the right. To fix
% this problem, we scan the \texttt{UserAns} for a comma (,) and set an alert if one is found.
%
% For vector- and list-valued answers, the \texttt{ProcResp<name>} procedure should parse
% the comma-delimited answers and call \texttt{\_ProcResp} once for each answer in the list
% so there should be no problem with commas in that regard.
% \changes{v6.4r}{2012/04/13}{Added a warning about commas in an answer.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var reComma=/,/;
    if ( reComma.test(UserAns) ) {
        app.alert(\eqSyntaxErrorComma,3);
        return -1;
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% Parse the user's input.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    UserAns = ParseInput(UserAns);
%    \end{macrocode}
% Originally, the value of \texttt{indepVar} is a string of variables \texttt{"xyz"}. You can
% now have variables of the form \texttt{"r:x,i:n,r:y"}. Where the identifier \texttt{"r:"} indicates a
% real variable and \texttt{"i:"} indicates an integer variable. \texttt{indepVar} must be either
% of the old style, or the new style, not a mixture of both, e.g. \texttt{"xyi:n"}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    indepVar = TypeParameters(indepVar);
    if (!ok2Continue) return null;
    var success=randomPointCompare(n,a,indepVar,%
epsilon,CorrAns,UserAns,comp);
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2011/10/05) The beginning of an idea, \texttt{postParse}. After it is determined
% whether the answer is right or wrong, post-process it here. For example,
% if the problem is to extract all roots of $\sqrt{72}$, the correct answer
% is $6\sqrt{2}$, whereas $3\sqrt{8}$ is not correct though it is equal to
% $\sqrt{72}$
%    \begin{macrocode}
        if ( success && (typeof(oComp)=="object") %
&& (typeof(oComp.postParse)!="undefined") )
        success=processSpecialParse(oComp.postParse,UserAns);
    return success;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
function processSpecialParse(oParse,UserAns) {
    var retn;
    if ( typeof(oParse) == "object" ) {
        for ( var i=0; i < oParse.length; i++) {
            var _o=oParse[i];
            if (typeof(_o)=="function") {
               retn = _o(UserAns);
               if (retn==null) return retn;
            } else {
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \texttt{oComp.priorParse[i]} is not a function, it is required to be an array. The first
% element of the array is the function, the rest of the entries are the additional arguments
% (in addition to \texttt{UserAns}). We will support at most 3 additional arguments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                switch(_o.length) {
                    case 2:
                        retn = _o[0](UserAns,_o[1]);
                        break;
                    case 3:
                        retn = _o[0](UserAns,_o[1],_o[2]);
                        break;
                    case 4:
                        retn = _o[0](UserAns,_o[1],_o[2],_o[3]);
                        break;
                    default:
                        app.alert("Author Error, we support only %
1, 2, or 3 extra arguments");
                        return null;
                }
                if (retn==null) return null;
            }
        }
    } else retn = oParse(UserAns);
    return retn;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This function randomly selects points from the interval [a,b]
% and calls the 'comp' function to compare results.
% Returns: null if the expression is bad, no penalty.
%          true if the error of the random comparison is less than epsilon
%          false if the error of the random comparison is greater than epsilon
%    \begin{macrocode}
function randomPointCompare (n,a,indepVar,epsilon,%
CorrAns,userAns,comp)
{
    var error, i, j, k;
    var aXY = new Array();
    a = a.replace(/[\[\]\s]/g, "");
    var aIntervals = a.split("&");
    for (k=0; k < aIntervals.length; k++)
    {
        var aInterval = aIntervals[k].split("x");
        nI = aInterval.length;
        with (Math) {
            for (j=0; j < n; j++)
            {
                for (i=0; i < nI; i++)
                {
                    var endpoints = aInterval[i].split(",");
                    aXY[i] = eval(endpoints[0])-0+(eval(endpoints[1])%
-eval(endpoints[0]))*Math.random();
                }
                var cXY = aXY.toString();
                error = comp(a,cXY,indepVar,CorrAns,userAns);
                if (error == null) return null;
                if ( (error == -1) || (error > epsilon) ) {j=-1; break;}
            }
        }
        if (j!=n) return false;
    }
    return true;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \texttt{diffCompare}: A simple comparison function, we evaluate the two input function `\texttt{\_F}'
% and `\texttt{\_G}' and the point `\texttt{\_c}' and return the absolute difference.
%
% Returns: Absolute difference between `\texttt{\_F}' and `\texttt{\_G}'
%          null if expression was not valid
%          -1 if expression is not a number
%    \begin{macrocode}
function diffCompare(_a,_c,_v,_F,_G) {
    var aXY = _c.split(",");
    var _V = _v.split(",");  // e.g. _V[0] = "i:x"
    var _n = aXY.length;
%    \end{macrocode}
% For each of the independent variables, we set them equal to a randomly chosen value
% from the specified interval.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    for (var _i=0; _i < _n; _i++)
    {
        if (_V[_i].charAt(0) == "r" )
          eval ("var "+_V[_i].charAt(2)+"="+aXY[_i]+";");
        else // assume type "i"
          eval ("var "+_V[_i].charAt(2)+"="+Math.ceil(aXY[_i])+";");
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \texttt{\_F} is the author's answer, we assume this is  well formed JavaScript
% and do not test it for possible errors. The author can correct before s/he distributes
% the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    _F = eval(_F);
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now we try to protect our code from bad input. We use \texttt{try/catch} to try and
% thrown exceptions. However, \texttt{try/catch} is not valid in any version of the
% Acrobat Reader prior to version 5.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if ( app.viewerVersion >= 5)
    {
%    \end{macrocode}
% This code, which uses \texttt{eval()} and \texttt{try/catch} is an attempt to write
% code that both works for Acro5 (or higher) and Acro4.05/4.0.  In Acro4.x, \texttt{try/catch}
% are reserved words, so we can't use them even in a conditional. However, within a string
% the JavaScript interpreter does not see them. The other complication is that Acro5 objects
% to having a \texttt{return} within an \texttt{eval()}, so we work around that with a
% \texttt{rtnCode}. The returns are executed outside the \texttt{eval()}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        var rtnCode = 0;
        eval("try {if(isNaN(_G = eval(_G))) rtnCode=-1; }"
            +"catch (e) { rtnCode=1; }");
        switch(rtnCode)
        {
            case  0: break;
            case  1: return null;
            case -1: return -1;
        }
    }
    else
%    \end{macrocode}
% For Acro4/4.05, all we can do is detect whether \texttt{\_G} is a number or not. If the user
% enters an undefined symbol, for example, we cannot catch this as we can with Acro5. Oh, well.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        if(isNaN(_G = eval(_G))) return -1;
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The function \texttt{G} is the user's input expression. There may be syntax errors
% that prevent the successful numerical evaluation of the expression. We try to
% prevent problems.
%
% If the user enters a function such as \texttt{sqrt( 1 - x )}, and this function is
% evaluated at a x = 2, for example, we are outside the domain of the function. The \texttt{isNaN}
% function will catch this type of error.  A return of \texttt{-1} signals an error
% at this of this type. This is considered to be an error by the user, and will be scored as an
% incorrect answer.
%
% The error described above does not throw an exception. What will throw an exception
% is if the users function has some undefined variables in it. For example, suppose
% we are expecting a response that is a function of \texttt{x} and the user enters a
% function of \texttt{t} instead. This will throw an exception as \texttt{t} is undefined.
% In this case, we do not treat this as an error, and expect the user to correct the
% input. This kind of error is signaled by returning a \texttt{null}.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
    return Math.abs ( _F - _G );
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This function is the same as above, but returns the relative absolute error.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function reldiffCompare(_a,_c,_v,_F,_G) {
    var aXY = _c.split(",");
    var _V = _v.split(",");  // e.g. _V[0] = "i:x"
    var _n = aXY.length
    for (var _i=0; _i < _n; _i++)
    {
            if (_V[_i].charAt(0) == "r" )
              eval ("var "+_V[_i].charAt(2)+"="+aXY[_i]+";");
            else // assume type "i"
              eval ("var "+_V[_i].charAt(2)+"="+Math.ceil(aXY[_i])+";");
    }
    _F = eval(_F);
    if ( app.viewerVersion >= 5)
    {
        var rtnCode = 0;
        eval("try { if(isNaN(_G = eval(_G))) rtnCode=-1; }"
            +"catch (e) { rtnCode=1; }");
        switch(rtnCode)
        {
            case  0: break;
            case  1: return null;
            case -1: return -1;
        }
    }
    else
        if(isNaN(_G = eval(_G))) return -1;
    return Math.abs ( (_F - _G)/_G );
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{requireForm}(07/16/11) The JS function \texttt{requireForm} is an example of a filter function. It is
% of such a general nature we put it in the \textsf{exerquiz} code, rather than the \textsf{dljslib} code.
% The function takes two or three arguments, the second one is an regular expression or an array
% of regular expressions to test \texttt{UserAns} against. The third, optional argument is a text message to
% be displayed if the \texttt{UserAns} is not of the required form.
%\changes{v6.4f}{2011/07/16}{Added \texttt{requireForm} filtering function}
%\par\medskip\noindent Usage: Factor: $-36z^5 - 96z^4 - 64z^3.$
%\begin{verbatim}
%\RespBoxMath{-4z^3(3z+4)^2}(z)*{3}{.0001}{[0,1]}[ { priorParse:
%    \Array( \Array( requireForm, \Array(%
%        /.*(\refac\repow|\refac\refac)/,%
%        /.*\refac\refac\repow\redigit+/,%
%        /.*\refac\repow\redigit+\refac/,%
%        /.*\refac\refac\refac/%
%        ), \myCustomMsg ) ) }
%    ]\CorrAnsButton{-4z^3(3z+4)^2}
%\end{verbatim}
% where \cs{refac}, \cs{repow}, \cs{redigit}, and \cs{rediv} are convenience macros defined
% earlier in \texttt{exerquiz.dtx}. The regular expression describe the form of the answer
% acceptable.
%
% There seems to be a redundancy in the usage of \cs{Array}, but this is by design.
% The first \cs{Array} is there so the function \texttt{\_ProcResp} does not misinterpret
% the second \cs{Array}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function requireForm(UserAns, regexpr) {
    var msg=\defaultReqFormMsg;
    UserAns = stripWhiteSpace (UserAns);
    if (!ok2Continue) return null;
    UserAns = stripOutMuli(UserAns);
    UserAns = ChngAllGrpsToParens(UserAns);
    if (arguments.length>2) msg=arguments[2];
    if (typeof(regexpr.length)=="undefined") {
        if (regexpr.test(UserAns)) return true;
        else { app.alert(msg,3); return null; }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \texttt{regexpr} is an array of regular expressions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    } else {
        for (var i=0; i<regexpr.length; i++)
            if (regexpr[i].test(UserAns)) break;
        if ( i < regexpr.length ) return true;
        else { app.alert(msg,3); return null; }
    }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{denyForm}Same type of function as \texttt{requireForm}.
% If the regular expression is found, we return \texttt{null}
% and emit an alert.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function denyForm(UserAns, regexpr) {
    var msg=\defaultReqFormMsg;
    UserAns = stripWhiteSpace (UserAns);
    if (!ok2Continue) return null;
    UserAns = stripOutMuli(UserAns);
    UserAns = ChngAllGrpsToParens(UserAns);
    if (arguments.length>2) msg=arguments[2];
    if (typeof(regexpr.length)=="undefined") {
        if (regexpr.test(UserAns)) { app.alert(msg,3); return null; }
        else return true;
%    \end{macrocode}
% \texttt{regexpr} is an array of regular expressions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    } else {
        for (var i=0; i<regexpr.length; i++)
            if (regexpr[i].test(UserAns)) break;
        if ( i < regexpr.length ) { app.alert(msg,3); return null; }
        else return true;
    }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \DescribeMacro{requireFormNot} does the opposite of
% \texttt{requireForm}. If the regular expression is found,
% we return \texttt{false}. \texttt{postParse} does not emit any messages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function requireFormNot(UserAns, regexpr) {
    UserAns = stripWhiteSpace (UserAns);
    if (!ok2Continue) return null;
    UserAns = stripOutMuli(UserAns);
    UserAns = ChngAllGrpsToParens(UserAns);
    if (typeof(regexpr.length)=="undefined") {
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the regular expression is found, we return false
% this is opposite to what \texttt{requireForm} returns
%    \begin{macrocode}
        if (regexpr.test(UserAns)) return false;
        else return true;
%    \end{macrocode}
% \texttt{regexpr} is an array of regular expressions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    } else {
        for (var i=0; i<regexpr.length; i++)
            if (regexpr[i].test(UserAns)) break;
        if ( i < regexpr.length ) return false;
        else return true;
    }
}
\end{newsegment}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Text Fill-in}
% Now the JS functions that process text fill-in questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{newsegment}{Eq: Support Text Fill-in}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This function processes fill-in problems that require only a text
% response. It takes a variable number of arguments, which are retrieved
% using the \texttt{arguments[]} array
%    \begin{macrocode}
function ProcRespTxt() {
    var i, success, authorAnswer, userAnswer = event.value;
    var fieldname=event.target.name;
    var flag = arguments[0];
    var filterMethod = arguments[1];
    var compareMethod = arguments[2];
    if ( !ProcessIt || userAnswer == "" ) return null;
    for (i = 3; i < arguments.length; i++)
        if ( success = compareTxt(userAnswer,arguments[i],%
filterMethod, compareMethod)) break;
    return notifyField(success, flag, fieldname);
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This is for text fill-in problems with partial credit. It takes a variable
% number of arguments. \texttt{arguments[i]=["<word>", part\_credit]}. This
% function has a property attached to it \texttt{ProcRespTxtPC.txtPCpCr}
% is the credit received for this problem. This function is called by
% \cs{RespBoxTxtPC}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function ProcRespTxtPC() {
    var i, success, authorAnswer, userAnswer = event.value;
    ProcRespTxtPC.txtPCpCr=0;
    var fieldname=event.target.name;
    var flag = arguments[0];
    var filterMethod = arguments[1];
    var compareMethod = arguments[2];
    if ( !ProcessIt || userAnswer == "" ) return null;
%    \end{macrocode}
% Unlike \texttt{ProcRespTxt}, we do not break at our first success. We go through
% all \texttt{<words>}, each having partial credit associated with it. For each
% success returned by \texttt{compareTxt}, we add in the credit to the total.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    for (i=3;i<arguments.length;i++)
        if(compareTxt(userAnswer,arguments[i][0],%
filterMethod,compareMethod))
            ProcRespTxtPC.txtPCpCr+=(arguments[i][1]);
%    \end{macrocode}
% success if at least one of the words were used, partial credit awarded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    success=(ProcRespTxtPC.txtPCpCr>0);
    return notifyField(success,flag,fieldname);
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \texttt{compareTxt} actually compares the \texttt{userAnswer} with the \texttt{authorAnswer}.
% there are options for various types of comparisons.
% Returns true or false.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function compareTxt(userAnswer,authorAnswer,filterMethod,compareMethod)
{
    var caseSensitive = ( compareMethod==3 ) ? "" : "i";
    var reSwitches = "g"+caseSensitive;
    userAnswer = new String(userAnswer).filter(filterMethod);
    switch(compareMethod) {
        case 1:
            var AuthorAnswer;
            var aAuthorAnswer = authorAnswer.split(/\s+/);
            for (var j=0; j < aAuthorAnswer.length; j++) {
                AuthorAnswer = new String(%
aAuthorAnswer[j]).filter(filterMethod);
%    \end{macrocode}
% When using \cs{RespBoxTxtPC}, if the author wants to use the
% character class . (period, meaning match anything newline or another unicode line terminator)
% we define in \cs{RespBoxTxtPC} a local command \cs{any} which expands to \texttt{@any@}.
% After we replace any occurrence of . (period) with \verb!\\.!, we then replace \texttt{@any@}
% with \texttt{.}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                AuthorAnswer = AuthorAnswer.replace(/\./g,"\\.");
                AuthorAnswer = AuthorAnswer.replace(/@any@/g,".");
                var re = new RegExp(AuthorAnswer, reSwitches);
                if (!re.test(userAnswer)) return false;
            }
            return true;
        default:
            authorAnswer=new String(authorAnswer).filter(filterMethod);
            return (userAnswer == authorAnswer) ? true : false;
    }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Various string prototypes. This function is called by compareTxt.
% The function returns the 'filtered' string.
%    \begin{macrocode}
String.prototype.filter = eqFilter;
function eqFilter(filterMethod) {
    switch (filterMethod) {
        case 0:
            var re = /\W/g;
            return this.replace(re,"").toLowerCase();
        case 1:
            var re = /\s/g;
            return this.replace(re,"").toLowerCase();
        case 2:
            var re = /\s/g;
            return this.replace(re,"");
%    \end{macrocode}
% If filter method 3 is used, a case-insensitive search is used in the
% \texttt{compareTxt} method. Added 04/21/09.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        case 3:
        default:
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v6.4k}{2011/08/17}{Within the function eqFilter, changed \texttt{this} to
% \texttt{this.toString()}. The comparisons were returning false when they shouldn't
% this is because in this case, we were comparing objects to objects}
%    \begin{macrocode}
            return this.toString();
    }
}
\end{newsegment}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Multiple Choice Questions}
% These are the routines for processing multiple choice questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{newsegment}{Eq: Quiz Management}
function InitMsg(msg) { return (\eqInitQuizMsg) }
function syntaxError() { app.alert(\eqSyntaxErrorUndefVar,3); }
%    \end{macrocode}
% There are four required parameters, if there is a fifth, that means
% we have a grouped question, parameter 5 will be the group sub-problem number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function ProcUserResp(key,userresp,probno,notify)
{
    if ( arguments.length > 4 ) {
        if ( typeof RightWrong[probno] == "undefined" ) {
            RightWrong[probno] = new Array();
            RightWrong[probno][0] = "grp";
            Responses[probno] = new Array();
        }
        RightWrong[probno][arguments[4]] = (!!key) ? 1 : 0;
        Responses[probno][arguments[4]] = userresp;
    } else {
%    \end{macrocode}
% If key is an array, we are processing a multiple selection problem. The
% actual key is the first entry. The second entry, not used here, is 1
% if user has selected at least one correct answer, zero otherwise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        if ( typeof key == "object" ) {
            RightWrong[probno][0] = key[0];
            RightWrong[probno][1] = key[1];
        } else
            RightWrong[probno] = (!!key)?1:0;
        Responses[probno] = userresp;
    }
}
function InitializeQuiz(qtfield,mark)
{
    var oQName=eval(qtfield);
    Score=0;
    retn = null;
    if (!isQuizInitialized(qtfield)&&!isAQuizUnfinished()) return null;
    neutralizeQuizzes();
    ProcessIt = false;
    aQuizControl[qtfield] = 1;
    this.resetForm(["ScoreField." + qtfield,"mc."+qtfield,
        "obj."+qtfield,"mck."+qtfield,"Ans."+qtfield,
        "PointsField."+qtfield,"PercentField."+qtfield,
        "essay."+qtfield,"GradeField."+qtfield,
        "grpobj."+qtfield,"qMark."+qtfield, qtfield+"SanityCheck",
        qtfield+"SanityCheckPts","rbmarkup."+qtfield]);
    ProcessIt = true;
    var f = this.getField("qMark."+qtfield);
    if ( f != null ) f.display = display.hidden;
    f = this.getField("promptButton."+qtfield);
    if (f != null) f.display=display.visible;
%    \end{macrocode}
% We create a special parameter for Oa.Sys. Then the arguments.length is
% 3 (or greater) we do not set the objective text fields to readonly=false.
% Oa.Sys already creates a readonly field for the solutions, we don't want
% to mess with that.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if (arguments.length<3)  {
        f = this.getField("obj." + qtfield);
        if ( f != null ) f.readonly = false;
    }
    RightWrong=new Array();
    Responses=new Array();
    ProbValue=new Array();
    ProbDist=new Array();
    ProbType=new Array();
    if (mark==1)
    {
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The next few lines support local symbol and color assignment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%        var oQName=eval(qtfield);
        var defaultColor=(typeof oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\defaultColorJS:oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc;
        var rightColor=(typeof oQName.RightColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\rghtColorJS:oQName.RightColorJSLoc;
        var corrAnsSymb=(typeof oQName.CorrAnsSymbJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\corrAnsSymbJS:oQName.CorrAnsSymbJSLoc;
        var f = this.getField("mcq." + qtfield);
        if (f != null) {
            f.delay=true;
            f.display=display.hidden;
            this.resetForm([f.name]);
%    \end{macrocode}
%    (2013/10/27) Removed legacy code for version prior to 4.0
%    \begin{macrocode}
            f.textColor = rightColor;
            var a = f.getArray();
            for (var i=0; i<a.length; i++) a[i].style=corrAnsSymb;
            f.delay=false;
        }
        f = this.getField("obj." + qtfield);
        if ( f != null ) f.strokeColor = defaultColor;
        f = this.getField("grpobj." + qtfield);
        if ( f != null ) f.strokeColor = defaultColor;
        f = this.getField("corr." + qtfield);
        if ( f != null ) f.display = display.hidden;
        f = this.getField(qtfield+"SanityCheck");
        if ( f != null ) f.strokeColor=defaultColor;
        f = this.getField("rbmarkup."+qtfield);
        if ( f != null ) f.display = display.hidden;
    }
    return null;
}
function neutralizeQuizzes()
{
    for ( var qtfield in aQuizControl ) aQuizControl[qtfield] = 0;
}
function isAQuizUnfinished()
{
    for ( var qtfield in aQuizControl )
        if ( aQuizControl[qtfield] == 1 )
        {
            app.alert(\eqerrUnfinishQuiz, 3);
            return false;
        }
    return true;
}
function isQuizInitialized(qtfield)
{
    if (typeof (aQuizControl[qtfield]) == "undefined")
    {
%    \end{macrocode}
%There is one complication.  In the Acrobat/Reader 4.05 versions,
%when the document is first opened, (almost) all format script is
%read and executed. As a result, when the doc is first opened, this
%function is called, and would normally return a 'false' which causes an alert box to
%appear stating that the user must initiate the quiz. The
%work around for this is to test whether we are in that situation,
%and if yes, return true (but only if the aQuizControl array has
%not been modified).  We manually modify the array (so the code below is
%not a factor again), and return true.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%        if ( (app.viewerVersion < 5 )&&(app.viewerVersion > 4)
%            && (aQuizControl.length == 0) ) {
%            aQuizControl[0] = -1;
%            return true;
%        }
        return false;
    }
    else
        return (aQuizControl[qtfield] == 1);
}
function isEndQuizPushed(qtfield)
{
    if (typeof (aQuizControl[qtfield]) == "undefined")
        return false;
    else
        return (aQuizControl[qtfield] == -1);
}
function resetQuiz(qtfield)
{
    aQuizControl[qtfield] = -1;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The function RecordPointValue has two required parameters. For a grouped question,
% there are three more parameters, they are, in order (2) grpquestionno (3) grpPointValue
% (4) total weight (5) grpEvalFunction, a JS function that evaluates the group.
% The elements of the ProbValue array are as follows:
%\begin{enumerate}
%    \item If multiple choice, then the entry is \texttt{[0, point value, partial credit]}
%    \item If objective type question that is not part of a group, the entry is a number \texttt{point value}
%    \item total weight of the group, significant only if greater than point value
%    \item If objective grouped-type question, the entry is\\
%          \texttt{[1, EvalJS, grpPointValue, <list of points for each part>]}
%\end{enumerate}
%    \begin{macrocode}
function RecordPointValue(ptvalue,probno)
{
    if (arguments.length > 2) {
        if ( typeof ProbValue[probno] == "undefined" ) {
           ProbValue[probno]=[1,arguments[5],arguments[3],arguments[4]];
           ProbValue[probno][3+arguments[2]] = ptvalue;
        } else ProbValue[probno][3+arguments[2]] = ptvalue;
    }
    else {
        ProbValue[probno]=ptvalue;
    }
}
function RecordProblemType(qType,probno)
{
    ProbType[probno]=qType;
}
function GrpRight( a, nProb, qtfield )
{
    var f = this.getField("grpobj."+qtfield+"."+nProb);
    var l = f.getArray().length
    var prod = 1;
    for ( var i=1; i <= l; i++) prod *= !!a[i];
    return prod;

}
function DisplayQuizResults(qtfield,nPointTotal,nQuestions)
{
    Score = 0; ptScore = 0;
    for (var i=1; i < RightWrong.length; i++)
    {
        if ( (typeof RightWrong[i] == "object" )
            && ( RightWrong[i][0] == "grp" ) ) {
            // grouped question
                Score += GrpRight(RightWrong[i], i, qtfield);
                var aWeights = ProbValue[i].slice(2);
                var evalGrpJS = eval(ProbValue[i][1]);
                var evalGrpJSValue = evalGrpJS(this,qtfield,i,
                    RightWrong[i],aWeights);
                ProbDist[i] = evalGrpJSValue;
                ptScore = ptScore + evalGrpJSValue;
        } else {
            if (typeof RightWrong[i] == "object") {
                if ( RightWrong[i][0] == 1 ) {
                    Score++;
                    ProbDist[i]=(typeof ProbValue[i] == "object") ?
                        1*ProbValue[i][1] : 1*ProbValue[i];
                    ptScore += (1*ProbDist[i]);
                } else {
                    if (RightWrong[i][1] == 1)
                        ProbDist[i]=(typeof ProbValue[i]=="object") ?
                            1*ProbValue[i][1] : 1*ProbValue[i];
                    else
                        ProbDist[i]=(typeof ProbValue[i] == "object") ?
                            1*ProbValue[i][1] : 0;
                    ptScore += (1*ProbDist[i]);
                }
            } else {
                if (RightWrong[i]==1) {
                    Score++;
                    ProbDist[i] = ( typeof ProbValue[i] == "object") ?
                        1*ProbValue[i][1] : 1*ProbValue[i];
                    ptScore += (1*ProbDist[i]);
                }
                else {
                    ProbDist[i] = ( typeof ProbValue[i] == "object") ?
                        1*ProbValue[i][2] : 0;
                    ptScore += (1*ProbDist[i]);
                }
            }
        }
    }
if ( !negPointsAllowed && (ptScore < 0) ) ptScore = 0;
    if (ptScore == nPointTotal) pcScore = 100;
    else pcScore = util.printf("\%.1f", (100 * ptScore) / nPointTotal);
    quizGrade = GetGrade(\eqGradeScale);
    var f = this.getField("ScoreField."+qtfield);
    if ( f != null ) f.value=(\eqQuizTotalMsg);
    f = this.getField("PointsField."+qtfield);
    if ( f != null) f.value=(\eqQuizPointsMsg);
    f = this.getField("PercentField."+qtfield);
    if ( f != null) f.value=(\eqQuizPercentMsg);
    f = this.getField("GradeField."+qtfield);
    if ( f != null) f.value=(\eqQuizGradeMsg);
}
function GetGrade()
{
    var cGrade, aRange;
    var l = arguments.length/2;
    if (pcScore >=100) return arguments[0];
    if (pcScore < 0 ) return arguments[arguments.length-2];
    for (var i=0; i < l; i++)
    {
        cGrade = arguments[2*i];
        aRange = arguments[2*i+1];
        if ( (pcScore >= arguments[2*i+1][0])
            && (pcScore < arguments[2*i+1][1])) return cGrade;
    }
    return null;
}
function ProcessQuestion (key,letterresp,probno,
    quizno,qtfield,notify,mark,msg) {
    var silent = ( arguments.length > 8 ) ? true : false;
    if (!isQuizInitialized(qtfield))
    {
        if (!silent) app.alert(InitMsg(msg),3);
        this.resetForm(["mc."+qtfield+"."+probno,
            "mck."+qtfield+"."+probno]);
    }
    else
    {
        ProcUserResp(key,letterresp,probno,notify);
        if (mark==1)
        {
            var oQName=eval(qtfield);
            var defaultColor=%
(typeof oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\defaultColorJS:oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc;
            var rightColor=%
(typeof oQName.RightColorJSLoc== "undefined")%
?\rghtColorJS:oQName.RightColorJSLoc;
            var wrongColor=%
(typeof oQName.WrongColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\wrngColorJS:oQName.WrongColorJSLoc;
            var rightAnsSymb=%
(typeof oQName.RightAnsSymbJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\rghtAnsSymbJS:oQName.RightAnsSymbJSLoc;
            var wrongAnsSymb=%
(typeof oQName.WrongAnsSymbJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\wrngAnsSymbJS:oQName.WrongAnsSymbJSLoc;
            var corrAnsSymb=%
(typeof oQName.CorrAnsSymbJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\corrAnsSymbJS:oQName.CorrAnsSymbJSLoc;
%    \end{macrocode}
% MC or MS questions
%    \begin{macrocode}
            var f = this.getField("mcq."+qtfield+"."+probno);
            var fck = this.getField("mck."+qtfield+"."+probno);
            var bMultiSelect = ( fck != null ) ? true : false;
            f.delay=true;
            this.resetForm([f.name]);
            var a = f.getArray();
            var l = a.length;
            if ( bMultiSelect ) {
                var ack = fck.getArray();
                for ( var i=0; i<l; i++) {
                    if ( ack[i].isBoxChecked(0)  ) {
                        a[i].style = ( a[i].isDefaultChecked(0) ) ?
                            rightAnsSymb : wrongAnsSymb;
                        a[i].textColor = ( a[i].isDefaultChecked(0) ) ?
                            rightColor : wrongColor;
                        a[i].value = "Yes";
                    } else {
                        a[i].style = ( a[i].isDefaultChecked(0) ) ?
                            corrAnsSymb : wrongAnsSymb;
                        a[i].textColor = ( a[i].isDefaultChecked(0) ) ?
                            rightColor : wrongColor;
                        a[i].value = ( a[i].isDefaultChecked(0) ) ?
                            "Yes" : "Off";
                    }
                }
            } else {
                for (var i=0; i < a.length; i++)
                    if (a[i].style == rightAnsSymb)
                    {
                        a[i].style = corrAnsSymb;
                        a[i].textColor = rightColor;
                    }
                var qr=this.getField(%
"mcq."+qtfield+"."+probno+"."+quizno);
%    \end{macrocode}
% (2013/10/27) removed legacy code for versions prior to 4.0.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                qr.textColor = key ? rightColor :wrongColor;
                qr.style = key ? rightAnsSymb : wrongAnsSymb;
                qr.value="Yes"; // gr.checkThisBox(0);  // ver 5.0
            }
            this.getField("mcq."+qtfield+"."+probno).delay=false;
        }
    }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Dependencies: \texttt{RightWrong}, \texttt{ProbDist} (if \texttt{qMark} is present).
%    \begin{macrocode}
function correctQuiz(qtfield,nQuestions)
{
    var oQName=eval(qtfield);
    var defaultColor=(typeof oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\defaultColorJS:oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc;
        var rightColor=(typeof oQName.RightColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\rghtColorJS:oQName.RightColorJSLoc;
        var wrongColor=(typeof oQName.WrongColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\wrngColorJS:oQName.WrongColorJSLoc;
        var rightAnsSymb=(typeof oQName.RightAnsSymbJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\rghtAnsSymbJS:oQName.RightAnsSymbJSLoc;
        var wrongAnsSymb=(typeof oQName.WrongAnsSymbJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\wrngAnsSymbJS:oQName.WrongAnsSymbJSLoc;
%    \end{macrocode}
% MC or MS questions
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var f = this.getField("mcq." + qtfield);
    if ( f != null) f.display = display.visible;
    f = this.getField("obj." + qtfield);
    if ( f != null ) {
        var a = f.getArray();
        var re=/^obj\./;
        for (var i = 0; i < a.length; i++) {
            var probno = a[i].name.replace(/.*\./g,"");
            var rbmuname = a[i].name.replace(re,"rbmarkup\.");
            var oRBMarkup = this.getField(rbmuname);
            var bRBMU = ( oRBMarkup != null );
            if ( RightWrong[probno] == 1 ) {
                a[i].strokeColor = rightColor;
                if (bRBMU) {
                    oRBMarkup.textColor=rightColor;
                    oRBMarkup.style=rightAnsSymb;
                }
            } else {
                a[i].strokeColor = wrongColor;
                if (bRBMU) {
                    oRBMarkup.textColor=wrongColor;
                    oRBMarkup.style=wrongAnsSymb;
                }
            }
        }
    }
    f = this.getField("grpobj." + qtfield);
    var re=/^grpobj\./;
    if ( f != null ) {
        var a = f.getArray();
        for ( var i = 0; i < a.length; i++) {
            var rbmuname = a[i].name.replace(re,"rbmarkup\.");
            var oRBMarkup = this.getField(rbmuname);
            var bRBMU = ( oRBMarkup != null );
            var aX = a[i].name.split(".");
            var probno = 1*aX[aX.length-2];
            var grpProbno = 1*aX[aX.length-1];
            if ( ( RightWrong[probno] != undefined ) %
&& ( RightWrong[probno][grpProbno] == 1 ) ) {
                a[i].strokeColor = rightColor;
                if (bRBMU) {
                    oRBMarkup.textColor=rightColor;
                    oRBMarkup.style=rightAnsSymb;
                }
            } else {
                a[i].strokeColor = wrongColor;
                if (bRBMU) {
                    oRBMarkup.textColor=wrongColor;
                    oRBMarkup.style=wrongAnsSymb;
                }
            }
        }
    }
    f=this.getField("rbmarkup."+qtfield);
    if ( f != null ) f.display = display.visible;
    f = this.getField("Ans." + qtfield);
    if ( f != null ) f.strokeColor = defaultColor;
    f = this.getField("promptButton." + qtfield)
    if ( f != null ) f.display = display.hidden;
    f = this.getField("corr." + qtfield);
    if ( f != null ) f.display = display.noPrint;
%    \end{macrocode}
% dps (01/01/04) If there are qMark fields, then write marks for each question
% to them.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    f = this.getField("qMark."+qtfield);
    if ( f != null )
    {
%        console.println("ProbDist = " + ProbDist.toSource() );
        for ( var i = 1; i <= nQuestions; i++)
        {
            if ( ProbValue[i] == undefined ) ProbValue[i]=0
            f = this.getField("qMark."+qtfield+"."+(i-1));
            if ( f != null )
            {
%    \end{macrocode}
% (3/22/04) This is code to account for grouping
%    \begin{macrocode}
                // find the next non-null field
                for ( var j=i; j <= nQuestions; j++)
                {
                    var h = this.getField("qMark."+qtfield+"."+j);
                    if ( h != null ) break;
                }
                var g = f.getArray();
                var qpts=(ProbDist[i]==undefined) ? 0 : ProbDist[i];
                if ( !negPointsMarkupAllowed && (qpts < 0) ) qpts=0;
                g[0].value = qpts + (( qpts == 1 ) ? "\eqptLabel\space"
                    : " \eqptsLabel");
            }
        }
        this.getField("qMark."+qtfield).display = display.visible;
    }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% When pdftex is used, the total tally box does not work because pdftex does not support
% the calculate key in AcroForms. We try to simulate this.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function getTotalTally(basename) {
    var sqtotal=0;
    var f=this.getField("tally."+basename);
    var g = f.getArray();
    for (var i=0; i<g.length; i++) {
        if ( g[i] == event.target ) sqtotal += (1*event.value);
        else sqtotal += (1*g[i].value);
    }
% console.println("sqtotal="+sqtotal);
    if ( ( f=this.getField("tallytotal."+basename) ) != null )
        f.value = sqtotal;
}
\end{newsegment}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Support for Multiple Selection Questions}
% This function
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{newsegment}{Eq: Support for Multi-Selection}
function ProcessMultiSelection(key,letterresp,probno,%
quizno,qtfield,pts,ppts) {
%    var f = this.getField("mcq."+qtfield+"."+probno);
    var f = this.getField("mck."+qtfield+"."+probno);
%    \end{macrocode}
%        For the multiple selection problem, the formats for the \texttt{RightWrong} and \texttt{ProbValue}
%        arrays are as follows:
%\begin{verbatim}
%        RightWrong[probno]
%            [0, 1, [undefined, undefined, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1]]
%\end{verbatim}
%        The first entry records whether the user answered the question totally correctly,
%        the second entry is for awarding points, 1 if the user selected at least one correct
%        answer. The third entry is an array of right/wrong responses to the user's responses.
%\begin{verbatim}
%        ProbValue[probno]
%            [3, 5, [undefined, undefined, -2, 3, 3, -2, 3]]
%\end{verbatim}
%        First entry is the number of correct answers for this problem, the second entry is the
%        number of points the student has earned for this problem, the third entry is an array of points obtained
%        based on the user's responses.
%\changes{v6.3h}{2008/10/17 }
%{%
%   For the manswers environment, we were not determining if the user had answered the question
%   correctly.
%}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if ( ProbValue[probno] == null )  {
        var g = f.getArray();
        var nTotalCorrect = 0;
        for ( var i=0; i<g.length; i++ )
            nTotalCorrect += (1*g[i].exportValues[0].charAt(0));
        ProbValue[probno] = new Array();
        RightWrong[probno] = new Array();
        ProbValue[probno] = [nTotalCorrect,pts,[]];
        RightWrong[probno][2] = new Array();
    } else var nTotalCorrect = ProbValue[probno][0];
    var fck = this.getField("mck."+qtfield+"."+probno+"."+quizno);
    if ( fck.isBoxChecked(0) ) {
        ProbValue[probno][2][quizno] = ppts;
        RightWrong[probno][2][quizno] = key;
    } else {
        ProbValue[probno][2][quizno] = null;
    }
    var pointsThisProblem=0;
    var scoreThisProblem = 0;
    var letterResponses = new Array();
    var areAllCorrect=1;
    var numCorrect=0;
    for ( var i=1; i< ProbValue[probno][2].length; i++ ) {
        if (ProbValue[probno][2][i] != null )
            letterResponses[i] = (String.fromCharCode(96+i));
        pointsThisProblem += ((ProbValue[probno][2][i]==null) ?
            0 : ProbValue[probno][2][i]);
        if ( (ProbValue[probno][2][i]!=null) ) {
%    \end{macrocode}
% As we go through the \texttt{ProbValue[probno][2]} array, we use the index
% to make some tallies in the \texttt{RightWrong[probno][2]} array. We multiply
% and add all entries together. The value of \texttt{areAllCorrect} will be 1 if the
% student only chooses correct answers, while \texttt{numCorrect} totals the number of
% correct responses.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            areAllCorrect *= (1*RightWrong[probno][2][i]);
            numCorrect +=(1*RightWrong[probno][2][i]);
%    \end{macrocode}
% The calculation of scoreThisProblem is overwritten immediaely
% following this segment of code. So can I delete?
%    \begin{macrocode}
%            scoreThisProblem = (areAllCorrect*(scoreThisProblem
%                +1*ProbValue[probno][2][i]));
        }
    }
%    var nCorrectSoFar=0;
%    \end{macrocode}
% The value of \texttt{scoreThisProblem} will be 0 of the user selects any false
% answers, and will be the number of correct answers selected otherwise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    scoreThisProblem = areAllCorrect*numCorrect;
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now the value of \texttt{scoreThisProblem} is 0 if the user selects any false
% answers, and~1 if the number of correct answer equals the total number of
% correct answers for this problem.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var scoreThisProblem = Number( scoreThisProblem == nTotalCorrect );
%    \end{macrocode}
% \texttt{dps 02/02/09}: If we determine this problem is right, but the \texttt{pointsThisProblem} is zero,
% then there must be no partial credit specification of the points, so we'll award all points.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if (scoreThisProblem==1 && pointsThisProblem==0 )
        pointsThisProblem=pts;
%    \end{macrocode}
% If negative numbers are not allowed, then we zero out the negative value
% of \texttt{pointsThisProblem}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    if (!negPointsAllowed)
%        pointsThisProblem =
%            (pointsThisProblem < 0) ? 0 : pointsThisProblem;
% dps 11/30/08
    ProbValue[probno][1] =
        ( (ProbValue[probno][1] == 0) && (scoreThisProblem == 1) )
            ? pts : pointsThisProblem;
%    ProbValue[probno][1]=pointsThisProblem;
    var passKey = ( pointsThisProblem > 0 ) ? 1 : 0;
    var retn = [ [ scoreThisProblem, passKey ], letterResponses ] ;
    return retn;
}
function LimitSelection(n,fname,k) {
    var f = this.getField(fname);
    var g = f.getArray();
    var total=0;
    for (var i=0; i<g.length; i++) {
        total+=( g[i].isBoxChecked(0) );
    }
    if (total > n) {
        app.alert(\limSelWarningMsg,3);
        f=this.getField(fname+"."+k);
        f.checkThisBox(0,false);
        return false
    } else return true;
}
\end{newsegment}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Miscellaneous JS}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{newsegment}{Eq: Miscellaneous JS}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This function notifies the calling field of the results. If flag=0,
% it changes the color of the field and updates the tally field.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function chooseJSColor( b, c1, c2 ) {
    return ( b ) ? c1 : c2;
}
function notifyField(success, flag, fieldname) {
    if ( flag != 0 )
        return (success)?true:false;
%    \end{macrocode}
% if \texttt{flag == 0}, then we are working with a \texttt{shortquiz}, and immediate response
% is needed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var f = this.getField(fieldname);
	var re=/^(obj|grpobj)\./;
	var gname=fieldname.replace(re,"rbmarkup\.");
	var g =this.getField(gname);
	var isthereRBUP = ( g !=null );
%    \end{macrocode}
% Extract the quiz name from the field name: \texttt{obj.QName.num} or \texttt{grpobj.QName.num}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    var h = fieldname.replace(re,"");
    var index=h.indexOf(".");
    var oQName = eval(h.substring(0,index));
    var rightColor=(typeof oQName.RightColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\rghtColorJS:oQName.RightColorJSLoc;
    var rightSymb=(typeof oQName.RightColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\rghtAnsSymbJS:oQName.RightAnsSymbJSLoc;
        var wrongColor=(typeof oQName.WrongColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\wrngColorJS:oQName.WrongColorJSLoc;
        var wrongSymb=(typeof oQName.WrongAnsSymbJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\wrngAnsSymbJS:oQName.WrongAnsSymbJSLoc;
    if (success) {
        f.strokeColor = rightColor
        if (isthereRBUP) {
            g.style = rightSymb;
            g.textColor=rightColor;
            g.display=display.visible;
        }
        return true;
    } else {
        updateTally.downState=false;
        updateTally(fieldname);
        f.strokeColor = wrongColor;
		if (isthereRBUP) {
            b2 = ( typeof oQName.WrongAnsSymbJSLoc == "undefined" );
            g.style = wrongSymb;
            g.textColor=wrongColor;
            g.display=display.visible;
        }
        return false;
    }
    return null;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
function updateTally(fieldname)
{
    var objre = /^obj\./;
    var grpre = /^grpobj\./;
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the question is part of a group of questions, then it has a root name of \texttt{grpobj}.
% This root needs to be removed, as well as the sub-group number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    if ( grpre.test(fieldname) ) {
        fieldname = fieldname.replace(grpre,"");
        var pos = fieldname.lastIndexOf(".");
        fieldname = fieldname.substring(0,pos);
    } else if ( objre.test(fieldname) )
        fieldname = fieldname.replace(objre,"");
    var f = this.getField("tally."+fieldname);
    if ( f != null ) {
        if (!updateTally.downState) f.value += 1;
        return true;
    } else return false;

}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Below is the \texttt{noPeek} JS function that has been part of \textsf{exerquiz} from the
% beginning.
%\begin{verbatim}
%function noPeek(qtfield,rtnPage)
%{
%    if ( (typeof (aQuizControl[qtfield]) == "undefined") %
%|| (aQuizControl[qtfield] != -1) ) {
%        this.pageNum = rtnPage-1;
%        app.alert(\noPeekMsg,3);
%    }
%}
%\end{verbatim}
% (2010/08/09 v6.3s) One user recently reported that Acrobat/Reader can crash when \texttt{noPeek} is in effect.
% This occurs when the down arrow on the scroll bar is pressed and kept pressed by the mouse.
% The pages can jump between the quiz and a solution page, and build up alert boxes each time.
% Eventually, there is a crash (though I haven't experienced the crash, I have seen the effects
% of using the down arrow on the scroll bar). Below is a proposed ``fix'' for using this
% hellish button. We turn off the alert for 5 milliseconds but always return to the
% starting page (\texttt{rtnPage}), it is not the best solution, but it fixes the crashing
% problem.
%    \begin{macrocode}
var bNoPeekWait=false;
var oNoPeekTimer;
function noPeek(qtfield,rtnPage)
{
    if (!bNoPeekWait) {
        if ( (typeof (aQuizControl[qtfield]) == "undefined") %
|| (aQuizControl[qtfield] != -1) ) {
            bNoPeekWait=true;
            oNoPeekTimer=app.setTimeOut("bNoPeekWait=false;%
app.clearTimeOut(oNoPeekTimer);",5);
            this.pageNum = rtnPage-1;
            app.alert(\noPeekMsg,3);
        }
    } else this.pageNum = rtnPage-1;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% When the user exits a fill-in shortquiz field, this function is called.
% It immediately notifies user of whether their answer is right
% or wrong, and changes the color of the boundary field.
%    \begin{macrocode}
var oCB=\bcheckboxused
function OnBlurRespBox (retn)
{
    var qname = arguments[1];
    var oQName = eval(qname);
    var respMsg;
    var cTitle = "AcroTeX eDucation Bundle";
    if (retn != null) {
        if ( typeof appAlerts[qname] == "undefined")
            appAlerts[qname] = {bAfterValue: false};
        var respMsg = (retn) ? \eqsqrtmsg\space : \eqsqwgmsg;
        if ( (event.target == this) || !oCB)
            app.alert({ cMsg: respMsg, nIcon: 3, cTitle: cTitle });
        else {
            if ( ! appAlerts[arguments[1]].bAfterValue )
                app.alert({ cMsg: respMsg, nIcon: 3, cTitle: cTitle,
                oCheckbox: appAlerts[qname]});
        }
    }
    else {
        var str = event.target.value.toString();
        if (str.replace(/\s/g,"") == "") {
            var defaultColor=%
(typeof oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc=="undefined")%
?\defaultColorJS:oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc;
            var b = (typeof oQName.DefaultColorJSLoc == "undefined");
            event.target.strokeColor = defaultColor;
        }
    }
}
function jmpToNamedDest(fName,cDest,bAlert) {
    if ( (typeof appAlerts[fName]!="undefined" %
&& appAlerts[fName].bAfterValue) || bAlert==0)
        app.setTimeOut("this.gotoNamedDest(\""+cDest+"\")",500);
    else
        this.gotoNamedDest(cDest);
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Description: This is the default function for determining whether
%   the minimal requirements for finishing a quiz have been met. The
%   default is that there is no minimal requirement.
% Arguments: qtfield = name of the field.
% Returns: true if minimum threshold is met, false otherwise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function lowThreshold(nQuestions)
{
    return true;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Description: This is the default function for determining whether
%   the minimal requirements for finishing a quiz have been met. Here
%   the requirements are to answer all the questions.
% Arguments: nQuestions = number of questions.
% Returns: true if minimum threshold is met, false otherwise.
%
% \noindent You can define this function as the default threshold function by
% typing\par
%\begin{verbatim}
%\renewcommand\minQuizResp{highThreshold}
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
function highThreshold(nQuestions)
{
    var cnt=0;
    for ( var i=0; i< Responses.length; i++ ) {
        if ( typeof Responses[i]!="undefined") cnt++
    }
    if ( cnt<nQuestions )
        app.alert(\highThresholdMsg,3);
    return (cnt >= nQuestions);
}
\end{newsegment}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{Support for Grouped Questions}
% These function can be called by the \texttt{mathGrp} environment to score the user's
% responses to the grouped questions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{newsegment}{Eq: Support for Grouped Questions}
function groupEval(doc,qtfield,probno,aKey,aWeights)
{
    var totalGrpPts = aWeights[0];
    var totalWeight = aWeights[1];
    for ( var i=1,total=0; i< aKey.length; i++ )
        if (aKey[i] != undefined) total += aKey[i]*aWeights[i+1];
    return total;
}
function WeightedEval(doc,qtfield,probno,aKey,aWeights)
{
    var f = doc.getField("grpobj." + qtfield + "." + probno);
    var nGrpQno = f.getArray().length;
    var totalGrpPts = aWeights[0];
    var totalWeight = aWeights[1];
    for ( var i=1,total=0; i < aKey.length; i++ )
        if (aKey[i] != undefined) total += aKey[i]*aWeights[i+1];
    total /= totalWeight;
    total = Math.floor( total * totalGrpPts );
    return total;
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This function gives full credit if all parts are answer correctly,
% otherwise, it gives no credit.  This defeats the purpose of partial
% credit. But someone asked for it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
function groupBernoulliEval(doc,qtfield,probno,aKey,aWeights)
{
    var f = doc.getField("grpobj." + qtfield + "." + probno);
    var nGrpQno = f.getArray().length;
    var totalGrpPts = aWeights[0];
    for ( var i=1,isCorrect=1; i<= nGrpQno; i++ )
        isCorrect *= (aKey[i] != undefined) ? (Number(aKey[i])) : 0;
    return (isCorrect*totalGrpPts);
}
\end{newsegment}
\end{insDLJS*}
%</aebjs>
%<*sumrytbls>
%    \end{macrocode}
% This function is called by the \cs{eqButton}, it does nothing if the ``SanityCheck''
% fields are not present; otherwise,  it colors the boundaries red, green or blue
% depending on whether the problem is wrong, right, or wrong with partial credit given.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{insDLJS}[correctSumryTbl]{sumtbljs}{Eq: Populate Summary Table}
function correctSumryTbl(qtfield,nQuestions) {
    var sc=this.getField(qtfield+"SanityCheck");
    var nc=this.getField(qtfield+"NoCorrections");
    if (sc != null && nc == null ) {
        for (var i=0; i<nQuestions; i++) {
            var cb=this.getField(qtfield+"SanityCheck."+(i+1));
            if (typeof RightWrong[i+1] == "undefined" ) {
                cb.strokeColor=\wrngColorJS;
                continue;
            }
            if ( RightWrong[i+1] == 1 ) {
                cb.strokeColor=\rghtColorJS;
                continue;
            }
            if ( RightWrong[i+1] == 0 ) {
                // this is either an obj or multiple choice q
                if ( typeof ProbValue[i+1] == "object" )
                    cb.strokeColor=( ProbValue[i+1][2] > 0 )?%
\partialColorJS:\wrngColorJS;
                else cb.strokeColor=\wrngColorJS; // obj q
                continue;
            }
            // either multiple selection or grouped math
            if ( RightWrong[i+1][0] == "grp" ) {
                // grouped question
                var f = this.getField("grpobj."+qtfield+"."+(i+1));
                var l = f.getArray().length;
                // is this right?
                for (var sum=0, j=1; j<=l; j++)
                    sum+=(!!RightWrong[i+1][j]);
                if ( sum == l ) cb.strokeColor=["RGB", 0, .6, 0];
                else cb.strokeColor=( sum > 0 )?%
\partialColorJS:\wrngColorJS;
                continue;
            }
            // multiple selection
            if ( RightWrong[i+1][0] == 1 ) cb.strokeColor=\rghtColorJS;
            else cb.strokeColor=(RightWrong[i+1][1]== 1)?%
\partialColorJS:\wrngColorJS;
        }
    }
    var f=this.getField(qtfield+"SanityCheckPts");
    if ( f != null ) {
        for ( var i = 1; i <= nQuestions; i++) {
            if ( ProbValue[i] == undefined ) ProbValue[i]=0
                // find the next non-null field
                var g=this.getField(qtfield+"SanityCheckPts."+i);
                var qpts=(ProbDist[i]==undefined) ? 0 : ProbDist[i];
                g.value = qpts + (( qpts == 1 ) ? "\eqptLabel\space"
                    : " \eqptsLabel");
        }
    }
}
function popVisitsTbl(qtfield,nQuestions) {
    if ( aQuizControl[qtfield] == 1) {
        this.resetForm([qtfield+"SanityCheck"]);
        for ( var i=0; i < nQuestions; i++ ) {
            var f=this.getField(qtfield+"SanityCheck."+(i+1));
            if ( typeof Responses[i+1]!="undefined")
                f.checkThisBox(0,true);
            else
                f.checkThisBox(0,false);
        }
    }
}
\end{insDLJS}
%</sumrytbls>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \section{Language Definitions}
% \StopEventually{Comment out \cs{OnlyDescription}
%   at the beginning of this file to see the language code.}
%    \subsection{French}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqfr>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqfr.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator: Jean-Michel SARLAT             %%
%% Language: French                                   %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
% Exercise label
\renewcommand\exlabel{Exercice}
% The value of this macro is written to \jobname.sol,
% accented characters must be protected with a \protect
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for exercise
\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Solution} :}

% Title of exercise solution section
\renewcommand\exsectitle{Solutions des \exlabelsol s}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle}

% Title of quiz solution section
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Les r\'{e}ponses aux questionnaires}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

% Running header/section title for solutions to quizzes
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Les r\'{e}ponses aux questionnaires}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

% Label for solutions to quizzes, appears in solutions sections
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
   \protect\textbf{R\protect\'{e}ponse :}}
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}% User access

% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Solution} :}

% Here is the default short quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Question.}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

% Here is the default short quiz return label
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Retour au questionnaire.}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

% Short quiz feedback messages
\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Exact !"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Faux !"}

% Here is the default quiz label. No formatting allowed!
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{D\'ebut}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
%==> modif JMS <==%
% Les modifications du contenu de \eqlabel ne seront pas prises en
% compte dans les messages de javascript (pb pour faire passer les
% accents dans le code !). Ceci justifie pour moi l'introduction de
% la variable \bqlabelISO ou le label de debut de questionnaire est
% cod\'{e}  ISO (octal). Cela parce que je veux utiliser le mot D\'ebut.
% Use \protect\351, this helps out TeX4ht by Eitan Gurari
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{D\string\351but}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabelISO}

% Here is the default quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Fin}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%
% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments
\renewcommand\eq@Score{Score :}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{sur}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%
   "Vous devez initialiser le questionnaire ! Clicker sur "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{
   "Vous avez d\string\\351j\string\\340 fait un choix,
    ce choix est ("+Responses[probno]+").
    Souhaitez vous le modifier ?"}
%
% Valeur "Yes" d'Acrobat
%
% Default button labels for \eqButton
%\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{R\string\351ponses}
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{%
    R\texorpdfstring{\'}{\string\351}ponses}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Correctes}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{SVP !}
%</eqfr>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{German}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqde>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqde.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator: Michael Wiedmann               %%
%% e-mail address: michael.wiedmann@detewe.de         %%
%% Language: German                                   %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
% The exercise label
\renewcommand\exlabel{\"Ubung}
% The value of this macro is written to \jobname.sol,
% accented characters must be protected with a \protect
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\protect\"Ubung}

% Title of exercise solution section
\renewcommand\exsectitle{L\"osungen der \exlabel en}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{L\protect\"osungen der \exlabelsol en}

% Solution label for solutionafter option
\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{L\"osung}:}

% Title of quiz solution section
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{L\"osungen der Aufgaben}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

% Running header/section title for solutions to quizzes
%\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{L\"osungen der \"Ubungen}
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{L\"osungen der Aufgaben}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

% Label for solutions to quizzes, appears in solutions sections
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
   \protect\textbf{L\protect\"osung zu Aufgabe:}}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{L\"osung}:}

% Here is the default short quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Aufgabe}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

% Here is the default short quiz return label
%\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Ende Aufgabe}
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Test beenden}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

% Short quiz feedback messages
\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Richtig!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Falsch!"}

% Here is the default quiz label.
%\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Beginn Aufgabe}
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Test starten}
% User access to quiz label
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
% Used for writing JavaScript Messages on screen. Use PDFDocEncoding
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabelISO}

% Here is the default quiz label.
%\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Ende Aufgabe}
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Test beenden}
% User access to quiz label
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%
% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments. Use PDFDocEncoding
%
\renewcommand\eq@Score{Punkte:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{von}
%\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%
%   "Sie m\protect\374ssen die Aufgaben initialisieren!"
%   +" Bitte klicken Sie auf "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%
   "Sie m\protect\374ssen die Aufgaben zuerst initialisieren!"
   +" Bitte klicken Sie hierf\protect\374r auf "+msg+" am Anfang des Tests."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
   "Sie haben bereits geantwortet.
    Ihre Antwort war ("+Responses[probno]+").
    Wollen Sie dies \protect\344ndern?"}
%
% Default button labels for \eqButton
%\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Richtig}
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Korrigiere}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Meine Antworten!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Bitte!}

\renewcommand\eqerrABS{"Betr\string\344ge sind nicht ausgeglichen. Bitte korrigieren
    Sie das."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadMathFunc{"Der Ausdruck `"+aF[i]+"' ist weder
    eine definierte Funktion noch ein g\string\374ltiger mathematischer Ausdruck."}
\renewcommand\eqParens{"runde Klammern"} % ( )
\renewcommand\eqBrackets{"eckige Klammern"} % [ ]
\renewcommand\eqBraces{"geschweifte Klammern"} % { }
\renewcommand\eqerrDelimNotBal{aGroup[i][2] + " sind nicht ausgeglichen.
    Bitte korrigieren Sie das."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadExp{"Ung\string\374ltiger mathematischer Ausdruck.
    Es gibt ein Problem mit einem der Exponenten. Bitte korrigieren Sie das."}
\renewcommand\eqerrUnfinishQuiz{"Sie haben einen Test nicht beendet.
    Bitte beenden Sie diesen, bevor Sie einen neuen Test beginnen."}
\renewcommand\noPeekMsg{"Bevor Sie den Test nicht beendet haben, ist es
    nicht erlaubt, die L\"{o}sungen anzuschauen!"}
\renewcommand\highThresholdMsg{"Sie m\string\374ssen alle Fragen beantworten, bevor
    der Test ausgewertet wird."}
\renewcommand\eqSyntaxErrorUndefVar{"Syntax Error: Es existiert
    m\"{o}glicherweise eine undefinierte Variable oder ein Ausdruck ist nicht im
    erwarteten Format geschrieben."}
%</eqde>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Norwegian}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqno>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqno.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator: Hans Fredrik Nordhaug          %%
%% e-mail address: hansfn@mi.uib.no                   %%
%% Language: Norwegian                                %%
%%                                                    %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\renewcommand\exlabel{{\O}velse}
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{{\protect\O}velse}

\renewcommand\exsectitle{L{\o}sning p{\aa} {\o}velsene}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{L{\protect\o}sning p{\protect\aa}
   {\protect\o}velsene}

\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{L{\o}sning}:}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{L{\o}sning p{\aa} oppgavene}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{L{\o}sning p{\aa} oppgavene}
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
    \protect\textbf{L{\protect\o}sning p{\protect\aa} oppgave:}}
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{L{\o}sning}:}

\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Oppgave}}
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Slutt}
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Rett!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Feil!"}

\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Start oppgaver}
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}

\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Slutt}
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}

\renewcommand\eqScore{Poeng:}\renewcommand\eqOutOf{av}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{"Du m\string\\345 initialisere testen!"
+" Klikk p\string\\345 "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
    "Du har allerede gjort et valg.
     Valget var ("+Responses[probno]+").
     Vil du endre det?"}
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Rett}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{mine svar!}
%\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{V\string\346r s\string\345 snill!}}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{%
    V\texorpdfstring{\ae}{\string\346}r s\texorpdfstring{\r}{\string\345}snill!}
%</eqno>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Dutch}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqnl>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqnl.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator: Henny Wilbrink                 %%
%% e-mail address: wsdwhw@win.tue.nl                  %%
%% Language: Dutch                                    %%
%%                                                    %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
% The exercise label
\renewcommand\exlabel{Opgave}
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}

% Title of exercise solution section
\renewcommand\exsectitle{Oplossingen van de Opgaven}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for exercise
\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Oplossing}:}

% Title of short quiz solution section
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Oplossingen van de Toetsen}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

% Running header/section title for solutions to short quizzes
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Oplossingen van de Toetsen}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

% Solution label for solutionafter option
\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Oplossing}:}

% Label for solutions to short quizzes, appears in solutions sections
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{\string\textbf{Oplossing van Toets:}}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Oplossing}:}

% Here is the default short quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Toets.}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

% Here is the default short quiz return label
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Terug naar Toets}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

% Short quiz feedback messages
\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Goed!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Fout!"}

% Here is the default quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Begin Toets}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
% Used for writing JavaScript Messages on screen. Use PDFDocEncoding
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}

% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Einde Toets}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}

%
% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments. Use PDFDocEncoding
%
\renewcommand\eq@Score{Score:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{van de}

\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%
  "U moet de Toets initialiseren! Klik op "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
   "U hebt al een keuze gemaakt.
    Uw keuze was ("+Responses[probno]+").
    Wil u dit veranderen?"}
%
% Default button labels for \eqButton
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Corrigeer}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Mijn Antwoorden!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{AUB!}
%</eqnl>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Spanish}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqes>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqes.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator: Pedro Luis Luque               %%
%% e-mail address: calvo@cica.es                      %%
%% Language:  (spanish)                               %%
%%                                                    %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

% The exercise label
\renewcommand\exlabel{Ejercicio}
% The value of this macro is written to \jobname.sol,
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}

% Title of exercise solution section
\renewcommand\exsectitle{Soluciones a los \exlabel s}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle} %% change to @ form

% Solution label for solutionafter option for exercise
\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Soluci\'{o}n}:}

% Title of short quiz solution section
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Soluciones a los Tests}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

% Running header/section title for solutions to short quizzes
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Soluciones a los Tests}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

% Label for solutions to short quizzes, appears in solutions sections
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
  \string\textbf{Soluci\protect\'{o}n al Test:}}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Soluci\'{o}n}:}

% Here is the default short quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Test.}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

% Here is the default short quiz return label
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Final del Test}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

% Short quiz feedback messages
\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Correcto!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Incorrecto!"}

% Here is the default quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Inicio del Test}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
% Used for writing JavaScript Messages on screen. Use PDFDocEncoding
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}

% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Final del Test}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%
% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments. Use PDFDocEncoding
%
\renewcommand\eq@Score{Puntos:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{de}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{"Debes inicializar el Test! Click sobre "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
   "Ya has elegido una respuesta.
    Tu respuesta fue ("+Responses[probno]+").
    Quieres cambiarla?"}
%
% Default button labels for \eqButton
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Correctas}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Mis Respuestas!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Por Favor!}
%</eqes>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Italian}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqit>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqit.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator:  PierLuigi Zezza               %%
%% e-mail address:  pzezza@cce.unifi.it               %%
%% Language: Italian                                  %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% The exercise label
\renewcommand\exlabel{Esercizio}
%
% The value of this macro is written to \jobname.sol,
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}
%
% Title of exercise solution section
\renewcommand\exsectitle{Soluzioni degli Esercizi }
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle}
%
% Solution label for solutionafter option for exercise
\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Soluzione}:}
%
% Title of short quiz solution section
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Soluzioni dei Quiz}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}
%
% Running header/section title for solutions to short quizzes
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Soluzioni dei Quiz}
%
% User access
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}
%
% Label for solutions to short quizzes, appears in solutions sections
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{\string\textbf{Soluzione del Quiz:}}
%
% User access
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}
%
% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Soluzione}:}
%
% Here is the default short quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Quiz.}}
%
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}
%
% Here is the default short quiz return label
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Fine Quiz}
%
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}
%
% Short quiz feedback messages
\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Giusto!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Sbagliato!"}
%
% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Inizio Test}
%
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
%
% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Fine Test}
%
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%
% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments. Use PDFDocEncoding
%
\renewcommand\eq@Score{Punteggio:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{su}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{"Dovete inizializzare il Quiz! Click su "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
   "Avete gi\string\\340 fatto una scelta.
    La vostra scelta era ("+Responses[probno]+").
    Volete cambiarla ?"}
%
% Default button labels for \eqButton
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Correggere}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Le mie risposte!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Per favore!}
%</eqit>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Russian}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqru>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqru.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator:  Sergei V. Znamenskii          %%
%% e-mail address:  znamensk@rustex.botik.ru          %%
%% Language: Russian                                  %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%\PassOptionsToPackage{unicode}{hyperref}
\expandafter\ifx\csname inputencoding\endcsname\relax
	\RequirePackage{inputenc}\fi
\inputencoding{cp1251}\makeatletter
\expandafter\ifx\csname Russian\endcsname\relax
	\RequirePackage[russian]{babel}\fi
% Language dependent definitions for Web.sty
    \def\web@versionlabel{\^{A}{\aa}ð\~{n}\`{e}\"{y}}%
    \def\web@toc{\~{N}\^{\i}\"{a}{\aa}ð{\ae}\`{a}\'{\i}\`{e}{\aa}}%
    \def\web@continued{\"{\i}ð\^{\i}\"{a}\^{\i}\"{e}{\ae}.}%
    \def\web@article{\'{I}\`{a}{\div}\`{a}\"{e}\^{\i} \hyperlink{section.1}{}}%
    \def\web@directory{\"{I}\`{a}\"{\i}\^{e}\`{a}}%
    \def\web@revision{\"{A}\`{a}\`{o}\`{a} \"{\i}\^{\i}\~{n}\"{e}{\aa}\"{a}\'{\i}{\aa}\~{a}\^{\i} \`{e}\c{c}\`{\i}{\aa}\'{\i}{\aa}\'{\i}\`{e}\"{y}:}%
    \def\web@copyright{\^{E}\^{\i}\"{\i}\`{e}ð\`{a}\'{e}\`{o}}%
    \def\web@section{\textsection\ }%
    % Label Navibar
    \def\web@back{\'{I}\`{a}\c{c}\`{a}\"{a}}%
    \def\web@doc{\"{A}\^{\i}\^{e}.}% restricted to three characters

% The exercise label
% Accents: \renewcommand\exlabel{\"Ubung} (German)
\renewcommand\exlabel{\'{O}\"{\i}ð\`{a}{\ae}\'{\i}{\aa}\'{\i}\`{e}{\aa}}
% The value of this macro is written to \jobname.sol,
% accented characters must be protected with a \protect
% E.g., \renewcommand\exlabelsol{\protect\"Ubung} (German)
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\^{E} \'{o}\"{\i}ð\`{a}{\ae}\'{\i}{\aa}\'{\i}\`{e}þ}

% Title of exercise solution section
% E.g.: \renewcommand\exsectitle
%            {L\"osungen der \exlabel en} (German)
\renewcommand\exsectitle{Ð{\aa}{\o}{\aa}\'{\i}\`{e}\"{y} \'{o}\"{\i}ð\`{a}{\ae}\'{\i}{\aa}\'{\i}\`{e}\'{e}}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle} %% change to @ form

% Solution label for solutionafter option for exercise
\renewcommand\exsolafter{\textit{Ð{\aa}{\o}{\aa}\'{\i}\`{e}{\aa}}:}

% Title of short quiz solution section
% Example: \renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle
%               {L\"osungen der Aufgaben} (German)
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{\^{I}\`{o}\^{a}{\aa}\`{o}\^{u} \^{e} \`{o}{\aa}\~{n}\`{o}\`{a}\`{\i}}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

% Running header/section title for solutions to short quizzes
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{\^{I}\`{o}\^{a}{\aa}\`{o}\^{u} \^{e} \^{e}\^{\i}ð\^{\i}\`{o}\^{e}\`{e}\`{\i} \`{o}{\aa}\~{n}\`{o}\`{a}\`{\i}}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

% Label for solutions to short quizzes, appears
% in solutions sections
% Protect accents with \protect
% E.g.: \renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel
%       {\string\textbf{L\protect\"osung zu Aufgabe:}} (German)
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{\string\textbf{\^{I}\`{o}\^{a}{\aa}\`{o}\^{u}:}}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Ð{\aa}{\o}{\aa}\'{\i}\`{e}{\aa}}:}

% Here is the default short quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{\c{C}\`{a}\"{a}\`{a}\'{\i}\`{e}{\aa}.}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

% Here is the default short quiz return label
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{\^{a}{\aa}ð\'{\i}\'{o}\`{o}\"{u}\~{n}\"{y}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

\cyrCommand\eqsqslrtnlabel{\^{E} \^{o}\^{\i}ð\`{\i}\'{o}\"{e}\`{e}ð\^{\i}\^{a}\^{e}{\aa} \c{c}\`{a}\"{a}\`{a}\'{\i}\`{e}\"{y}}
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{\eqsqslrtnlabel}


% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
% For Example: \renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{D\'ebut}  (French)
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{CTAPT}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
% Used for writing JavaScript Messages on screen.
% Use PDFDocEncoding
% For Example:
% \renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{D\string\351but}  (French)
% Use \string not \protect, this helps out
% TeX4ht by Eitan Gurari.
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}

% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{\^{O}\`{E}\'{I}\`{E}{\O}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
\def\ScoreFieldDefaults
{%
    \Ff{\FfReadOnly}\BC{1 0 0}\BG{}\S{S}
    \DV{\^{A}{\aa}ð\'{\i}\^{\i}:}
}
% Default button labels for \eqButton
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{\`{E}\~{n}\"{\i}ð\`{a}\^{a}\`{e}\`{o}\"{u}}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{\`{\i}\^{\i}\`{e} \^{\i}\`{o}\^{a}{\aa}\`{o}\^{u}!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{\"{I}\^{\i}{\ae}\`{a}\"{e}\'{o}\'{e}\~{n}\`{o}\`{a}!}

% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments. Use PDFDocEncoding
% In the Text Field showing the score, there is the default phrase in English
% Score: 2 out of 3, the word "Score" and "out of" needs  translation.
%% In Cyrillic, at least with pdflatex v.1.40.3 , the same \eq@Score unfortunately
%% can not serve both \ScoreFieldDefaults and \eqQuizTotalMsg.

\renewcommand\eq@Score{\u0412\u0435\u0440\u043D\u043E:}
\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{\u0438\u0437}

% Short quiz feedback messages
%\def\eq@sqrtmsg{"\u0412\u0435\u0440\u043D\u043E!"}
%\def\eq@sqwgmsg{"\u041E\u0448\u0438\u0431\u043A\u0430!"}
\def\eqsqrtmsg{"\u0412\u0435\u0440\u043D\u043E!"}
\def\eqsqwgmsg{"\u041E\u0448\u0438\u0431\u043A\u0430!"}

% If you are taking a quiz and click on an alternative without initializing the quiz first, this message appears.
% Example: \renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{"Sie m\string\\374ssen die Aufgaben initialisieren! Bitte klicken Sie auf "+msg+"."}%    (German)
\def\eqInitQuizMsg{"\u041A\u043B\u0438\u043A\u043D\u0438\u0442\u0435 \u043D\u0430 \u00AB"+msg+"\u00BB, \u0447\u0442\u043E\u0431\u044B \u043D\u0430\u0447\u0430\u0442\u044C \u043E\u0442\u0432\u0435\u0442."}

% This macro doesn't usually need translation, it uses \eqScore and \eqOutOf. However, if the sentence "Score: 2 out of 3" does not translate conveniently into a particular language, this macro may have to be modified.  It's the one that puts the message in the message box.
% \renewcommand\eqQuizTotalMsg {"\eqScore\space"+Score+" \eqOutOf\space"+nQuestions}
% \renewcommand\eqQuizPointsMsg{"\eqScore\space"+ptScore+" \eqOutOf\space"+nPointTotal}
% \renewcommand\eqQuizPercentMsg{pcScore+"\%"}
% \renewcommand\eqQuizGradeMsg{quizGrade}
% In the link form of a quiz, of you change your choice, this message appears.
% For Example: \renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{"Vous avez d\string\\351j\string\\340 fait un choix, ce choix est ("+Responses[probno]+"). Souhaitez vous le modifier ?"}  (French)
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{"\u0412\u044B \u0443\u0436\u0435 \u0432\u044B\u0431\u0440\u0430\u043B\u0438 \u043E\u0442\u0432\u0435\u0442 ("+Responses[probno]+"). \u0418\u043B\u0438 \u0412\u044B \u043F\u0435\u0440\u0435\u0434\u0443\u043C\u0430\u043B\u0438?"}
% Default button label of \CorrAnsButton.
\renewcommand\eq@local@CorrAnsButton{Ans}
% These (error) messages are generated when the user enters an invalid math expression into a math fill-in response box. The messages come in the form of an app.alert() so PDFDocEncoding needs to be used.
\renewcommand\eqerrABS{"\u0417\u043D\u0430\u043A\u0438 \u0430\u0431\u0441\u043E\u043B\u044E\u0442\u043D\u043E\u0439 \u0432\u0435\u043B\u0438\u0447\u0438\u043D\u044B \u043D\u0435 \u0441\u0431\u0430\u043B\u0430\u043D\u0441\u0438\u0440\u043E\u0432\u0430\u043D\u044B. \u0418\u0441\u043F\u0440\u0430\u0432\u044C\u0442\u0435, \u043F\u043E\u0436\u0430\u043B\u0443\u0439\u0441\u0442\u0430."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadMathFunc{"\u0412\u044B\u0440\u0430\u0436\u0435\u043D\u0438\u0435 `"+aF[i]+"' \u043D\u0435 \u044F\u0432\u043B\u044F\u0435\u0442\u0441\u044F \u043D\u0438 \u0432\u0441\u0442\u0440\u043E\u0435\u043D\u043D\u043E\u0439 " +"\u0444\u0443\u043D\u043A\u0446\u0438\u0435\u0439, \u043D\u0438 \u043A\u043E\u0440\u0440\u0435\u043A\u0442\u043D\u044B\u043C \u043C\u0430\u0442\u0435\u043C\u0430\u0442\u0438\u0447\u0435\u0441\u043A\u0438\u043C \u0432\u044B\u0440\u0430\u0436\u0435\u043D\u0438\u0435\u043C."}
\renewcommand\eqParens{"\u041A\u0440\u0443\u0433\u043B\u044B\u0435 \u0441\u043A\u043E\u0431\u043A\u0438"}
\renewcommand\eqBrackets{"\u041A\u0432\u0430\u0434\u0440\u0430\u0442\u043D\u044B\u0435 \u0441\u043A\u043E\u0431\u043A\u0438"}
\renewcommand\eqBraces{"\u0424\u0438\u0433\u0443\u0440\u043D\u044B\u0435 \u0441\u043A\u043E\u0431\u043A\u0438"}
\renewcommand\eqerrDelimNotBal{aGroup[i][2] + " \u043D\u0435 \u0441\u0431\u0430\u043B\u0430\u043D\u0441\u0438\u0440\u043E\u0432\u0430\u043D\u043E. \u041F\u043E\u0436\u0430\u043B\u0443\u0439\u0441\u0442\u0430, \u0438\u0441\u043F\u0440\u0430\u0432\u044C\u0442\u0435."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadExp{"\u0418\u0441\u043F\u0440\u0430\u0432\u044C\u0442\u0435, \u043F\u043E\u0436\u0430\u043B\u0443\u0439\u0441\u0442\u0430, \u0432\u044B\u0440\u0430\u0436\u0435\u043D\u0438\u0435 \u0441\u043E \u0441\u0442\u0435\u043F\u0435\u043D\u044C\u044E."}
\renewcommand\eqerrUnfinishQuiz{"\u041F\u043E\u0436\u0430\u043B\u0443\u0439\u0441\u0442\u0430, \u0437\u0430\u043A\u043E\u043D\u0447\u0438\u0442\u0435 \u043D\u0430\u0447\u0430\u0442\u043E\u0435 \u0440\u0430\u043D\u0435\u0435 \u0437\u0430\u0434\u0430\u043D\u0438\u0435."}
\renewcommand\noPeekMsg{"\u0420\u0435\u0448\u0435\u043D\u0438\u044F \u043D\u0435 \u043F\u043E\u043A\u0430\u0436\u0443\u0442\u0441\u044F, \u043F\u043E\u043A\u0430 \u0437\u0430\u0434\u0430\u043D\u0438\u0435 \u043D\u0435 \u0431\u0443\u0434\u0435\u0442 \u0437\u0430\u043A\u043E\u043D\u0447\u0435\u043D\u043E!"}
\renewcommand\highThresholdMsg{"\u0412\u044B \u043D\u0435 \u043F\u043E\u043B\u0443\u0447\u0438\u0442\u0435 \u043E\u0446\u0435\u043D\u043A\u0438, \u043F\u043E\u043A\u0430 \u043D\u0435 \u043E\u0442\u0432\u0435\u0442\u0438\u0442\u0435 \u043D\u0430 \u0412\u0421\u0415 \u0432\u043E\u043F\u0440\u043E\u0441\u044B."}
\renewcommand\eqSyntaxErrorUndefVar{"\u0421\u0438\u043D\u0442\u0430\u043A\u0441\u0438\u0447\u0435\u0441\u043A\u0430\u044F \u043E\u0448\u0438\u0431\u043A\u0430: \u0432\u043E\u0437\u043C\u043E\u0436\u043D\u043E, \u043F\u0435\u0440\u0435\u043C\u0435\u043D\u043D\u0430\u044F \u043D\u0435 \u043E\u043F\u0440\u0435\u0434\u0435\u043B\u0435\u043D\u0430."}
%</eqru>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Danish}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqda>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqda.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator: Erik Leimand                   %%
%% e-mail address: buhlleimand@worldonline.dk         %%
%% Language: Danish                                   %%
%%                                                    %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\renewcommand\exlabel{{\O}velse}
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{{\protect\O}velse}

\renewcommand\exsectitle{L{\o}sning p{\aa} {\o}velserne}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{L{\protect\o}sning p{\protect\aa}
   {\protect\o}velserne}

\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{L{\o}sning}:}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{L{\o}sning p{\aa} opgaverne}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{L{\o}sning p{\aa} opgaverne}
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
    \string\textbf{L{\protect\o}sning p{\protect\aa} opgave:}}
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{L{\o}sning}:}

\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Opgave.}}
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Slut}
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Rigtigt!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Forkert!"}

\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Start opgaver}
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}

\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Slut}
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}

\renewcommand\eq@Score{Score:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{ud af}
%\renewcommand\eqQuizTotalMsg{"\eqScore\space"+Score+" \eqOutOf\space"+"\thequestionno"}
\renewcommand\eqQuizTotalMsg{"\eqScore\space"+Score+" \eqOutOf\space"+nQuestions}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{"Du skal starte testen! Klik p\string\\345 "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
   "Du har allerede valgt.
    Du valgte ("+Responses[probno]+").
    Vil du \string\\346ndre det?"}
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Ret}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Mine svar!}
%\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{V\string\346r s\string\345 god!}}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{%
    V\texorpdfstring{\ae}{\string\346}r s\texorpdfstring{\r}{\string\345}god!}
%</eqda>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Polish}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqpo>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqpo.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator: Jerzy Mycielski                %%
%% e-mail address: jmyc@poczta.onet.pl                %%
%% Language: Polish                                   %%
%%                                                    %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% The polish accented characters included in pdfendconding is
%% lslash and oacute, not included are zacute, zdot, cacute,
%% nacute, sacute, aogonek, eogonek and corresponding capital characters.
%  Z   \'{Z}  \u0179
%  a   \k{a}  \u0105
%  c   \'{c}  \u0107
%  l   \l     \u0142
%  s   \'{s}  \u015B
%  z   \.{z}  \u017C
%  \'{o}   \'{o}  \u00F3
\renewcommand\exlabel{Zadanie}
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}

\renewcommand\exsectitle{Rozwi\k{a}zania Zada\'{n}}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\protect\exsectitle}

\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Rozwi\k{a}znie}:}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Rozwi\k{a}zania Test\'{o}w}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Rozwi\protect\k{a}zania Test\protect\'{o}w}
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{\string\textbf{Rozwi\protect\k{a}zanie Testu:}}
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Rozwi\k{a}zanie}:}

\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Test.}}
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

%\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Zako\protect\'{n}cz Test}
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Zako\ifeq@solutionsafter\else\expandafter\protect\fi\'{n}cz Test}
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Dobrze!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"\string\\u0179le!"}
%\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"\'{Z}le!"}

\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Rozpocznij Test}
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}

\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Zakoncz Test}
% \renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Zako\'{n}cz Test}
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}

\renewcommand\eq@Score{Punkt\'{o}w:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{z mozliwych}
%\renewcommand\eq@Score{Punkt\'{o}w:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{z mo\'{z}liwych}
\renewcommand\eqQuizTotalMsg{"\eqScore\space"+Score+" \eqOutOf\space"+nQuestions}

\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{"Musisz rozpoczac Test! Kliknij na "+msg+"."}
%\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{"Musisz rozpocz\'{a}c Test! Kliknij na "+msg+"."}

\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
   "Juz dokonal\string\\233e\string\\u015B wyboru.
    Twoim wyborem by\string\\233o ("+Responses[probno]+").
    Czy chcesz go zmieni\string\\u0107?"}
%\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
%"Ju\.{z} dokona\string\233e\'{s} wyboru. Twoim wyborem"
%+" by\string\233o ("+Responses[probno]+")."+" Czy chcesz go zmieni\'{c}?"}

\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Popraw}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Moje odpowiedzi!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Prosze!}
%\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Prosz\k{e}!}
%</eqpo>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{Finnish}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqfin>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqfin.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package.  %%
%% Name of translator: Paivi Porras                    %%
%% e-mail address: paivi.porras@lut.fi                 %%
%% Language: Finnish                                   %%
%%                                                     %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\renewcommand\exlabel{Harjoitus}
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{Harjoitus}

\renewcommand\exsectitle{Ratkaisut}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{Ratkaisu \exlabelsol }

\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Ratkaisu}:}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Vastaukset testikysymyksiin}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Vastaukset testikysymyksiin}
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
   \string\textbf{Vastaus testikysymykseen:}}
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Ratkaisu}:}

\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Testikysymys}}
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Lopeta testi}
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Oikein!"} %muokattu
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"V\string\344\string\344rin!"} %m
%\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"V\"a\"arin!"} %m

\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Aloita testi}
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabelISO}

\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Lopeta testi}
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}

\renewcommand\eq@Score{Pisteet:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{/}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%m
   "Testi on aloitettava painamalla  "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%m
   "Olet jo kerran valinnut.
    Valintasi oli ("+Responses[probno]+")."
+" Haluatko vaihtaa?"}
\AtEndOfPackage{%
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Oikein}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Omat vastaukset!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Ole hyv\string\344!}}
%</eqfin>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{catalan}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqcat>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqcat.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package.  %%
%% Name of translator: Ramon Ballester                 %%
%% e-mail address: ramon.ballester@udg.es              %%
%% Language:  (catalan)                                %%
%%                                                     %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

% The exercise label
\renewcommand\exlabel{Exercici}
% The value of this macro is written to \jobname.sol,
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}

% Title of exercise solution section
\renewcommand\exsectitle{Solucions als \exlabel s}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle} %% change to @ form

% Solution label for solutionafter option for exercise
\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Soluci\'o}:}

% Title of short quiz solution section
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Solucions als Tests}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

% Running header/section title for solutions to short quizzes
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Solucions als Tests}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

% Label for solutions to short quizzes, appears in solutions sections
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
   \string\textbf{Soluci\protect\'{o} al Test:}}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Soluci\'o}:}

% Here is the default short quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Test.}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

% Here is the default short quiz return label
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Final del Test}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

% Short quiz feedback messages
\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Correcte!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Incorrecte!"}

% Here is the default quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Inici del Test}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
% Used for writing JavaScript Messages on screen. Use PDFDocEncoding
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}

% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Final del Test}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%
% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments. Use PDFDocEncoding
%
\renewcommand\eq@Score{Punts:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{de}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{"Has d'iniciar el Test! Prem sobre "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
    "Ja has elegit una resposta.
     La teva resposta ha estat ("+Responses[probno]+").
     Vols canviar--la?"}
%
% Default button labels for \eqButton
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Correctes}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Les meves Respostes!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Si us plau!}
%</eqcat>
%    \end{macrocode}
%--------------------------------------------------------
%    \subsection{Czech}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqcz>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqcat.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package.  %%
%% Name of translator: Robert Marik                    %%
%% e-mail address: marik@mendelu.cz                    %%
%% Language:  (czech)                                  %%
%%                                                     %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\def\SFW{1.75in}

% The exercise label
\renewcommand\exlabel{Cvi\v{c}en\'{\i}}
% The value of this macro is written to \jobname.sol,
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{Cvi\protect\v{c}en\protect\'{\protect\i}}

% Title of exercise solution section
\renewcommand\exsectitle{\texorpdfstring{\v{R}e\v{s}en\'{\i} ke cvi\v{c}en\'{\i}m}
    {Resen\355{} ke cvicen\355m}} %% change to @ form
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\string\v{R}e\string\v{s}en\string\'{\string\i} ke cvi\string\v{c}en\string\'{\string\i}m}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for exercise
\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{\v{R}e\v{s}en\'\i}:}

% Title of short quiz solution section
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{\texorpdfstring{\v{R}e\v{s}en\'{\i} kv\'{\i}z\r{u}}{Resen\355{} kv\355zu}}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

% Running header/section title for solutions to short quizzes
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{\v{R}e\v{s}en\'{\i} kv\'{\i}z\r{u}}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

% Label for solutions to short quizzes, appears in solutions sections
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{\string\textbf{\string\v{R}e\string\v{s}en\string\'{\string\i} kv\string\'{\string\i}zu:}}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{\v{R}e\v{s}en\'{\i}}:}

% Here is the default short quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Kv\'{\i}z.}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

% Here is the default short quiz return label
%\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Konec kv\string\'{\string\i}zu}
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Zp\string\v{e}t na ot\string\'{a}zky}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

% Short quiz feedback messages
\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Spravne !"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Spatne !"}

% Here is the default quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Zacatek kvizu}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
% Used for writing JavaScript Messages on screen. Use PDFDocEncoding
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{Zacatek kvizu}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{Zacatek kvizu}

% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Konec kvizu}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%
% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments. Use PDFDocEncoding
%
%\renewcommand\eq@Score{Hodnoceni:}
\renewcommand\eq@Score{}
\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{z celkovych}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%
  "Chcete-li pracovat s kvizem, musite jej nejprve spustit! Kliknete na "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
  "Uz jste si jednou odpoved vybral(a). Vase odpoved byla ("+Responses[probno]+").
   Chcete ji opravdu zmenit?"}
%
% Default button labels for \eqButton
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Opravit}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{odpovedi!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Prosim!}
% Messages for math fill-in questions
\renewcommand\eqerrABS{"Spatne uzavrena absolutni hodnota. Opravte prosim."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadMathFunc{"Vyraz `"+aF[i]+"' neni ani definovanou funkci ani  " +", ani platnym matematickym vyrazem."}
\renewcommand\eqParens{"Zavorky (kulate)"}
\renewcommand\eqBrackets{"Hranate zavorky"}
\renewcommand\eqBraces{"Slozene zavorky"}
\renewcommand\eqerrDelimNotBal{aGroup[i][2] + " nejsou parove. Opravte je prosim."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadExp{"Spatny matematicky vyraz - problem v nekterem exponentu. Opravte jej prosim."}
\renewcommand\eqerrUnfinishQuiz{"Chyba: Nektery kviz mate nedokonceny. Musite jej dokoncit, nez budete pokracovat u dalsiho kvizu. Pokud si nepamatuje, ktery kviz jste nechali rozpracovany, zavrete cely soubor, znovu jej otevrete a k testu, ktery chcete vyplnovat, se vratte."}
\renewcommand\noPeekMsg{"Prohlizeni reseni neni povoleno pred dokoncenim kvizu!"}
\renewcommand\highThresholdMsg{"Musite odpovedet na vsechny otazky, nez ukoncite kviz."}
\renewcommand\eqSyntaxErrorUndefVar{"Chyba: Pravdepodobne pouzivate nespravnou promennou nebo mate preklep ve jmenu nektere funkce."}
\renewcommand{\promptButtonMsg}{%
        "Chcete ted videt spravnou odpoved? "\r\t\t
        + "Hodnocena bude Vase soucasna odpoved. "\r\t\t
        + "Kliknete-li na \\"Yes\\", uvidite spravnou odpoved, ale svou stavajici
           odpoved na tuto otazku uz nebudete moct zmenit."
}
%</eqcz>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{brazil}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqbr>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqbr.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator: Koichi Sameshima               %%
%% e-mail address: ksameshi@usp.br                    %%
%% Language:  (brazil)                                %%
%%                                                    %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

% The exercise label
\renewcommand\exlabel{Exerc\texorpdfstring{\'{\i}}{\string\355}cio}
% The value of this macro is written to \jobname.sol,
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{Exerc\string\'{\string\i}cio}

% Title of exercise solution section
\renewcommand\exsectitle{Solu\texorpdfstring{\c{c}}{\string\347}\texorpdfstring{\~{o}}{%
    \string\365}es dos  Exerc\texorpdfstring{\'{\i}}{\string\355}cios}
    %{Solu\string\\347\string\\363es dos Exerc\string\\355cios}}
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{%
    Solu\protect\c{c}\protect\~{o}es dos Exerc\protect\'{i}cios} %% change to @ form

% Solution label for solutionafter option for exercise
\renewcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Solu\c{c}\~{a}o}:}

% Title of short quiz solution section
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Solu\c{c}\~{o}es dos Testes}
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}

% Running header/section title for solutions to short quizzes
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Solu\protect\c{c}\protect\~{o}es dos Testes}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}

% Label for solutions to short quizzes, appears in solutions sections
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
  \string\textbf{Solu\protect\c{c}\protect\~{a}o do Teste:}}
% User access
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}

% Solution label for solutionafter option for shortquiz
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{Solu\protect\c{c}\protect\~{a}o}:}

% Here is the default short quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Teste.}}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}

% Here is the default short quiz return label
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Finaliza Teste}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}

% Short quiz feedback messages
\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Correto!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Incorreto!"}

% Here is the default quiz label.
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Inicia Teste}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
% Used for writing JavaScript Messages on screen. Use PDFDocEncoding
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}

% Here is the default quiz label.
% No formatting allowed
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Finaliza Teste}
% User access to shortquiz label
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%
% JavaScript Messages for Quiz Environments. Use PDFDocEncoding
%
\renewcommand\eq@Score{Pontos:}\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{de}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{% ******
   "Voc\string\352 precisa iniciar o Teste! Clique sobre "+msg+"."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
   "Voc\string\352 j\string\341 respondeu.
    Sua resposta foi ("+Responses[probno]+").
    Quer alter\string\341-la?"}
%
% Default button labels for \eqButton
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Corretas}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Minhas Respostas!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{Por Favor!}
%</eqbr>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \subsection{turkish}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eqtr>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% eqtr.def %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Foreign language support for the exerquiz package. %%
%% Name of translator: Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak               %%
%% e-mail address: mkocak@ogu.edu.tr                  %%
%% Language: Turkish                                  %%
%%                                                    %%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\renewcommand\exlabel{Al\i \c st\i rma}
\renewcommand\exlabelsol{\noexpand\c C\noexpand\"oz\noexpand\"um}
\renewcommand\exsectitle{\exlabel lar{\i}n \c C\"oz\"umleri  }
\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{Al\noexpand\i \noexpand\c st\noexpand\i rma \exlabelsol leri }
\renewcommand\exsolafter{\textbf{\c C\"oz\"um}:}
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Kuizlerin \c C\"oz\"umleri }
\renewcommand\sqslsectitle{\eq@sqslsectitle}
\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Kuizlerin \c C\"oz\"umleri}
\renewcommand\sqslsecrunhead{\eq@sqslsecrunhead}
\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
   \protect\textbf{Kuiz \noexpand\c C\noexpand\"oz\noexpand\"um\noexpand\"u:}}
\renewcommand\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}
\renewcommand\sqsolafter{\textit{\c C\"oz\"um}:}
\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Soru}}
\renewcommand\sqlabel{\eq@sqlabel}
\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{Kuizi Bitir}
\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}
% JavaScript alert box text
\renewcommand\eqsqrtmsg{"Do\protect\u011Fru!"}
\renewcommand\eqsqwgmsg{"Yanl\protect\u0131\protect\u015F!"}%347\c{c} harfi
%
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Kuize Ba\c sla}
\renewcommand\bqlabel{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\eq@bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabel}
\renewcommand\bqlabelISO{\eq@bqlabelISO}
\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{Kuizi Bitir}
\renewcommand\eqlabel{\eq@eqlabel}
%
% JavaScript messages
%
\renewcommand\eq@Score{Skor:}
\renewcommand\eq@OutOf{\protect\374zerinden}
\renewcommand\eqQuizTotalMsg{%
  "\eqScore\space"+nQuestions+" \eqOutOf\space"+Score}
  \renewcommand\eqQuizPointsMsg{%
  "\eqScore\space"+nPointTotal+" \eqOutOf\space"+ptScore}
\renewcommand\eq@local@CorrAnsButton{Cevap}
\renewcommand\eqInitQuizMsg{%
  "Kuizi Bitirdiniz. Do\protect\u011Fru cevaplar\protect\u0131 g\protect\u00F6rmek i\protect\u00E7in 'cevap' tu\protect\u015Flar\protect\u0131na bas\protect\u0131n\protect\u0131z."}
\renewcommand\eqMadeChoice{%
   "Bir se\protect\u00E7im yapt\protect\u0131n\protect\u0131z. Se\protect\u00E7iminiz ("+Responses[probno]+") idi."
    +" Se\protect\u00E7iminizi de\protect\u011Fi\protect\u015Ftirmek istermisiniz?"}
\renewcommand\eqerrABS{"Mutlak de\protect\u011Fer do\protect\u011Fru degil. L\protect\u00FCtfen d\protect\u00FCzeltiniz."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadMathFunc{" `"+aF[i]+"' ifadesi tan\protect\u0131ml\protect\u0131 bir fonksiyon veya ge\protect\u00E7erli bir matematiksel ifade de\protect\u011Fil."}
\renewcommand\eqParens{"Parentezler"}
\renewcommand\eqBrackets{"S\protect\u00FCsl\protect\u00FC Parentazle"}
\renewcommand\eqBraces{"K\protect\u00F6\protect\u015Feli Parentezler"}
\renewcommand\eqerrDelimNotBal{aGroup[i][2] + " do\protect\u011Fru de\protect\u011Fil. L\protect\u00FCtfen d\protect\u00FCzeltiniz."}
\renewcommand\eqerrBadExp{"Ge\protect\u00E7ersiz matematiksel ifade. \protect\u00FCstel ifadeli bir hata. L\protect\u00FCtfen d\protect\u00FCzeltiniz."}
\renewcommand\eqerrUnfinishQuiz{"Bitirilmemi\protect\u015F bir kuiz var, di\protect\u011Fer kuize ge\protect\u00E7meden \protect\u00F6nce bu kuizi tamamlay\protect\u0131n."}
\renewcommand\noPeekMsg{"Kuizi bitirmeden yada kuizden ba\protect\u015Far\protect\u0131l\protect\u0131 olana kadar \protect\u00E7\protect\u00F6z\protect\u00FCmleri g\protect\u00F6remezsiniz.!"}
\renewcommand\highThresholdMsg{"Kuiz sonucu hesaplanmadan \protect\u00F6nce b\protect\u00FCt\protect\u00FCn sorular\protect\u0131 cevapland\protect\u0131rmal\protect\u0131s\protect\u0131n\protect\u0131z."}
\renewcommand\eqSyntaxErrorUndefVar{"Syntax Error:  Tan\protect\u0131mlanmam\protect\u0131\protect\u015F de\protect\u011Fi\protect\u015Fken veya ifadeler
 istenilen formatta yaz\protect\u0131lmam\protect\u0131\protect\u015Ft\protect\u0131r."}
\renewcommand\eq@local@CA{Dogru}
\renewcommand\eq@local@RC{Benim Cevaplar\protect\u0131m!}
\renewcommand\eq@local@AC{L\protect\374tfen!}
%</eqtr>
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \Finale
\endinput

History:
    (2010/11/04 v6.3u) Added \xdef\oField{#2} to \def\@quiz*#1#2, this is
        needed for apb.dtx.
